Ricoh Fax Machine 340 User manual

Ricoh Fax Machine 340 User manual
340/350/450
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Modes
User Tools (System Settings)
Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy
for future reference.
For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To get
maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in
this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Please read the Safety Information before using this machine. It contains important information related
to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
- Notes:
Some illustrations may be slightly different from your machine.
Certain options may not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Operator Safety:
This machine is considered a CDRH class I laser device, safe for office/ EDP use. The machine contains two 5-milliwat, 760 - 800 nanometer wavelength, GaAIAs laser diodes. Direct (or indirect reflected) eye contact with the laser beam might cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and interlock
mechanisms have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
Laser Safety:
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical unit
in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite
equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser
chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis
and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement or the optical subsystem is required.
Warning:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Notes:
The model names of the machines do not appear in the following pages. Check the type of your machine before reading this manual. (For details, see ⇒ P.2 “Machine Types”.)
•
Type 1: Aficio 340
•
Type 2: Aficio 350
•
Type 3: Aficio 450
Certain types might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the Inch version.
For good copy quality, Ricoh recommends that you use genuine Ricoh toner.
Ricoh shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts other
than genuine Ricoh parts in your Ricoh office product.
Power Source:
120 V, 60 Hz, 10 A or more
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. For details about power source,
see “Power Connection” of the “Copy Reference”.
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL
Symbols
In this manual, the following symbols are used:
R WARNING:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in
death or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety Information in the “Copy Reference”.
R CAUTION:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in minor or moderate injury or property damage that does not involve personal injury
when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this
symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety
Information in the “Copy Reference”.
* The statements above are notes for your safety.
Important
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be
damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.
Preparation
This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before operating.
Note
This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misoperation.
Limitation
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,
or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.
Reference
This symbol indicates a reference.
[
]
Keys that appear on the machine's panel display.
{
}
Keys built into the machine's operation panel.
L
TABLE OF CONTENTS
MANUALS FOR THIS MACHINE ................................................................. 1
MACHINE TYPES ......................................................................................... 2
ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS PROVIDED BY OPTIONAL MEMORY UNITS 3
Copy Mode.................................................................................................... 3
Facsimile Mode (Option) ............................................................................... 4
1. MODES
CHANGING MODES ..................................................................................... 5
MULTI-ACCESS............................................................................................ 6
COPY MODE ............................................................................................... 10
Changing To Copy Mode ............................................................................ 10
FAX MODE .................................................................................................. 12
Changing To Facsimile Mode ..................................................................... 12
Printing A Received Fax.............................................................................. 12
Sending A Fax............................................................................................. 13
2. USER TOOLS (SYSTEM SETTINGS)
KEYS FOR USER TOOLS (SYSTEM SETTINGS) .................................... 15
ACCESSING THE USER TOOLS
(SYSTEM SETTINGS)................................................................................. 16
Exiting from User Tools............................................................................... 17
USER TOOLS MENU (SYSTEM SETTINGS) ............................................ 18
SETTINGS YOU CAN CHANGE WITH THE USER TOOLS .....................
System Settings 1/6 .....................................................................................
System Settings 2/6 .....................................................................................
System Settings 3/6 .....................................................................................
System Settings 4/6 .....................................................................................
System Settings 5/6 .....................................................................................
System Settings 6/6 .....................................................................................
19
19
20
21
23
25
26
INDEX........................................................................................................ 27
LL
MANUALS FOR THIS MACHINE
This is a multi-functional machine combining copying and facsimile functions.
This manual describes procedures common to these functions. Each function's
reference describes the operational procedures separately for the copying and
facsimile functions. Please consult the manual that suits your needs.
❖ System Settings (this manual)
Provides an overview of the machine. This manual introduces the functions
of the machine. It also introduces the options allowing you to use additional
functions and describes how to access the system user tools to make the machine easier to use.
❖ When using as a copier
• Copy Reference
Describes the various copying functions from basic copying to more advanced functions such as reducing/enlarging copies or combining originals into one copy.
❖ When using as a facsimile
• Facsimile Reference (option)
Describes the operational procedures and functions to use the machine as
a facsimile.
1
MACHINE TYPES
There are three models of this machine. The main differences between them are
memory capacity and copy speed. To make sure which model you have, see the
inside front cover.
Copy speed
Memory capacity
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
35 copies/minute
(A4K, 81/2" ×
11"K)
35 copies/minute
(A4K, 81/2" ×
11"K)
45 copies/minute
(A4K, 81/2" ×
11"K)
4 MB
12 MB
12 MB
Option
Option
(8 MB optional
memory available)
Fax unit
2
Option
ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS PROVIDED BY
OPTIONAL MEMORY UNITS
You can expand the capabilities of this machine to include fax functions. When
you want to add a function, contact your sales or service representative.
Copy Mode
In copy mode you can make basic copies and also copy using more sophisticated
techniques, such as reduction/enlargement or combining several originals onto
one copy. You can install an optional memory expansion for storage of document images, thereby making the best use of memory with various copy functions.
Expansion Memory (option)
❖ 8 MB copier memory unit (Electric sort kit) (option for Type 1)
Provides various functions including Image Rotate, Sort, and Duplex Copy.
❖ Copier hard disk (Image enhance kit)
Provides various functions such as:
• Archive File (copying stored images)
• Following functions using the Enhanced Image Copy:
Sort/Rotate Sort/Rotate Stack/Shift Sort/Shift Stack/Staple
Combine
Duplex
Repeat
Image Rotate
3
Facsimile Mode (Option)
You can send and receive fax messages in facsimile mode. Installation of optional expansion memory allows more functions to be used, and more data to be
stored.
Options for Memory Expansion
❖ 4 MB memory card
Provides a variety of memory-based functions including confidential reception, envelope reception, and two-sided printing. Also increases the number
of personal codes, groups, speed dials, files in memory, special stations, etc.
❖ Fax hard disk
Increases memory capacity, allowing you to increase the number of transmit
originals and receive images to be stored in memory.
❖ 400 dpi high resolution card
Allows sending/receiving in super fine mode. Also allows JBIG compression.
4
1. MODES
CHANGING MODES
You can use this machine not only as a copier, but optionally as a fax machine as
well. Press the {Copy} key to use copy functions, or press the {Fax} key to use
facsimile functions.
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
Copy Mode
Copy
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
Fax
Facsimile Mode
ND0X02EE
Limitation
❒ You cannot switch modes in any of the following cases:
• When scanning in a fax message for transmission.
• During immediate transmission.
• When accessing the user tools.
• During interrupt copying.
è
MODES
MULTI-ACCESS
You can carry out another job using a different function while the current job is
being performed.
This allows you to handle your jobs efficiently regardless of how the machine is
being used. For example:
• While making copies, the machine can send a fax message that has been
stored in memory.
• You can make copies while receiving fax data.
Performing multiple functions simultaneously like this is called Multi-accessing.
1
Limitation
❒ You cannot use Multi-accessing during interrupt copying.
Note
❒ You can choose which mode has highest priority for print jobs. The default is
the current mode shown on the display. See “16. Print Priority” in ⇒ P.23
“System Settings 4/6”.
❒ When your machine is equipped with the optional internal tray 2, you can
specify the tray used for each function so that completed documents are not
mixed. For example, set one tray for faxes and another tray for copies. If you
require the optional internal tray 2, contact your local dealer or service representative. See “15. Output Tray” in ⇒ P.23 “System Settings 4/6”.
ç
MULTI-ACCESS
-Multi-accessing example
The order of multi-accessing operations is as follows:
1
Time
Print
Job
Copying
2 originals
Start
1st
2nd
1st
copy
2nd
copy
3rd
4th
Printing
the
1st
received
fax
Printing
the
2nd
received
fax
Printing
Copy
Operation Mode
Received
data
processing
Facsimile
Scanning
Printing 2
received
faxes
Memory
transmission
operation
(2 pages)
Start
Background*1
Completion
1st page
Memory
reception *1
for
memory
reception
2nd page for
memory
reception
Scanning the
1st page
Scanning the
2nd page
Start
receiving
Memory
reception
MULTI2EE
*1
This job runs in the background, regardless of any current data scanning/writing operations.
Note that you can also receive faxes into memory with such a job.
- Sample operations
This chart is based on the following conditions:
• When “16. Print priority” is set to “Interleave” (See “16. Print Priority” in ⇒
P.23 “System Settings 4/6”)
• For details on operations under other conditions, contact your service representative.
æ
MODES
Memory Copy
Sort
Stapling
Scanning An Original for
Memory Transmission
Memory Transmission
Immediate Transmission
Memory Reception
Printing Received Data
Reception
Enhanced Image Copy
Transmission
Mode before
you select
Copy
Copying
❍
❍
❍ *4
❍ *4
❍ *4
❍
✩
❍
✩
✩
Enhanced
Image
Copy
❍
❍
❍ *4
❍ *4
❍ *4
×
✩
×
✩
✩
Memory
Copy
❍
❍
❍ *4
❍ *4
❍ *4
×
✩
×
✩
✩
Sort
❍
❍
❍ *4
❍ *4
❍ *4
❍ *1
✩
❍ *1
✩
✩
*4
*4
*1
✩
❍
*1
✩
✩ *5
1
Reception
Facsimile
Transmission
Stapling
å
Facsimile
Copying
Mode after Copy
you select
❍
*5
❍
*5
❍
❍
*5
*5
×
❍
Scanning An
Original
for
Memory
Transmission
×
×
×
×
×
×
✩
×
✩
✩ *2
Memory
Transmission
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
×
×
×
✩
Immediate
Transmission
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Memory
Reception
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
×
×
×
✩
Printing
Received
Data
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩ *5
✩ *2
✩ *6
→ *3
✩ *6
→
MULTI-ACCESS
✩…means that these functions can be used together.
❍…means that you can interrupt the current job with Function keys or the {Interrupt} key to proceed to a subsequent job.
→…means that another job will automatically start after the current job is finished.
×…means that you will manually start another job after the current job is finished (i.e. these functions cannot be used together).
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
1
Simultaneous operations are only available when copies are being made after their
originals are all scanned.
You might fail to print received data, depending on size or orientation of the original.
Priority is given to the subsequent job; after the subsequent job is finished, the interrupted operation is automatically resumed.
If the optional copier hard disk is installed, you can make interrupt copies with the
{Interrupt} key.
If you are making stapling copies on paper larger than A4, 81/2" × 11" with the optional 1000-sheet finisher, the subsequent operation is disabled until the current job
is finished. After you start interrupt copying with the {Interrupt} key, the Output Tray
is automatically changed to “Internal Tray”.
During parallel receptions, any subsequent job is disabled until the receptions are
completed.
ä
MODES
COPY MODE
Changing To Copy Mode
1
You can always make a copy when
the machine isn't printing or scanning
a fax data.
A Press the {Copy} key.
The copy display appears on the
panel display.
Reference
For details, see the “Copy Reference”.
Interrupt Copying To Make Urgently
Needed Copies
You can interrupt the current copying
job or printing of a received fax to
make a copy.
Limitation
❒ When the optional copier hard disk
is not installed, you cannot use the
following functions during interrupt copying:
• Duplex
• Combine
• Sort
• Copying archive files
❒ You cannot use the interrupt copy
function in the following cases:
• during fax immediate transmission
• while scanning an original for
memory transmission
• during interrupt copying
ìí
A Press the {Interrupt} key.
If the machine is scanning originals, it will immediately stop the
scanning job. On the other hand, if
the machine is performing a copy
or print job, it will still continue the
job until you press the {Start} key
after pressing the {Interrupt} key.
When the current job stops, the interrupt copy display appears on
the panel display.
Note
❒ When you interrupt a copying
job, remove the previous original.
B Make your copies.
Important
❒ If the remaining memory space
is 0 %, the machine fails to receive fax data. Wait until the
machine completes printing a
received fax, then start making
copies.
Note
❒ While copying, a received fax
document is stored in memory
and the Receive File indicator is
lit.
C After
interrupt copying is completed, remove the original and
delivered copies.
D Press the {Interrupt} key again.
The machine resumes the printing
job of the received fax document.
COPY MODE
Resuming the interrupted
copying job
A Reset the previous original.
B Press the {Start} key.
The machine resumes the interrupted copy run.
1
Copying And Multi-accessing
Note
❒ Machine operations are different
depending “16. Print Priority” (See
⇒ P.23 “System Settings 4/6”) or “18.
User Code Manage” (See ⇒ P.25
“System Settings 5/6”) settings.
Reference
⇒ P.6 “Multi-Access”
❖ When “Print Priority” = “Fax” or “Display” (default)
The machine completes the operation of the function set by Print priority before performing the
operation of another function.
Limitation
❒ While the machine is performing two-sided printing in fax
mode, you cannot make twosided copies until the printing
ends.
❖ When “Print Priority” = “Interleave”
The machine performs the operations in the order in which they are
initiated. If another function is initiated during operation, the machine completes the current
operation before performing the
operation of the function initiated.
ìì
MODES
FAX MODE
1
Changing To Facsimile Mode
Printing A Received Fax
You can always use the machine as a
facsimile when you are not copying.
When you are not copying, a received
fax is printed automatically. You do
not need to switch to Facsimile mode.
If you wish to print a received fax
while copying, see below.
A Press the {Fax} key.
The facsimile display appears on
the panel display.
Note
❒ The Memory Transmission/Reception function is performed
automatically even when another function is being used.
You need not switch the display. When data is received in
memory, the Receive File indicator is lit.
Reference
For details, see the “Facsimile
Reference”.
Preparation
Machine operations are different
depending “16. Print Priority” (See
⇒ P.23 “System Settings 4/6”) or “18.
User Code Manage” (See ⇒ P.25
“System Settings 5/6”) settings.
Reference
See ⇒ P.6 “Multi-Access”.
Printing a received fax while copying
❖ When “Print Priority” = “Fax” or “Display” (default)
The machine once interrupts the
copying and receives a fax. Upon
completing the fax reception, it resumes the interrupted copying job.
❖ When “Print Priority” = “Interleave”
The machine performs the operations in the order in which they are
initiated. If another function is initiated during operation, the machine completes the current
operation before performing the
operation of the function initiated.
❖ Printing a received fax in a hurry
Press the {Fax} key to switch to the
facsimile display. The copying job
is interrupted and the machine
starts printing the received fax automatically. After printing the fax,
ìë
FAX MODE
press the {Copy} key and do the
previous job again.
Sending A Fax
Sending a fax while printing a received
fax
1
Scanning originals for memory
transmission
The machine can scan your originals
for memory transmission even while
printing a received fax.
A Complete
the usual operations
for sending a fax, then press the
{Start} key.
Immediate transmission
Immediate transmission interrupts
the job of printing a received fax. This
is because the page memory is occupied as your originals are scanned.
A Complete
the usual operations
for sending a fax, then press the
{Start} key.
Sending a fax while copying
While scanning copy originals
A Press
the {Clear/Stop} key and
then the {Fax} key.
Copying is stopped and the display is switched to the Facsimile
mode.
Note
❒ Remove the copy originals.
ìê
MODES
While outputting copy
A Press the {Fax} key to switch to
the facsimile display.
You can send a fax while copying.
1
Note
❒ Remove any originals of your
copy job.
B Complete
the usual operations
for sending a fax, then press the
{Start} key.
C After
the transmission has finished, press the {Copy} key.
D Reset the copy job originals, then
press the {Start} key.
The machine resumes the interrupted copy run.
ìé
2. USER TOOLS (SYSTEM
SETTINGS)
KEYS FOR USER TOOLS (SYSTEM SETTINGS)
1
Sort
1-Sided
11
Communicating
Start
Manual RX
Receive
File
Standard
Confidential
File
TEL
Mode
TX File
Status
Detail
Super Fine
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
01
02
03
04
05
Immediate
Trans.
Memory
Trans.
06
07
G
A
B
C
D
E
F
08
01
10
11
12
13
14
M
N
20
21
H
I
J
K
L
15
16
17
18
19
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
X
Y
Z
V
W
2
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
Program
Clear Modes /
Energy Saver
C
Interrupt
2
2
2
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
On Hook Dial
Copy
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
Fax
1
4
GHI
Pause /
Redial
Series
Copies
1
Main
Power
On
Speed Dial
User Tools / Counter
*
Text . Photo
Photo
Special Orig.
2
3
ABC
DEF
5
6
JKL
MNO
7
8
9
PRS
TUV
WXY
Clear / Stop
C
Start
Enter
Lighter
Darker
Auto Image Density
Tone
0
OPER
3 4
5
6
7
ND2A01EE
1. {User Tools/Counter} key
2. Panel Display
3. {Selection} keys
Press the key under the item you wish to
select.
4. < and > keys (Cursor keys)
Press to select an item on the panel display.
5. {Number} keys
Use to enter a numeric value.
6. {#} key
Press to set a value you have entered.
7. {Clear/Stop} key
Press to delete a number you have entered.
ìè
86(5ý722/6ýõ6<67(0ý6(77,1*6ô
ACCESSING THE USER TOOLS
(SYSTEM SETTINGS)
This section is for the key operators in
charge of this machine. You can
change or set the machine's default
settings.
ë
C
Search for the desired menu. Enter its number with the {Number}
keys.
Preparation
After using the user tools, be sure
to exit it to return to Copy mode.
The settings are not canceled even
if the operation switch is turned off
or the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver}
key is pressed.
Limitation
❒ Function names displayed in a
faint font become available when
the machine is expanded.
Reference
For information on Copy and Fax
User Tools, see the appropriate reference manual.
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
The User Tools Main Menu appears.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L0103
B Enter {1} with the {Number} keys.
The system settings menu appears.
Note
❒ [↓
↓Next]: Press to go to the next
page.
❒ [↑
↑Prev.]: Press to go back to the
previous page.
Reference
⇒ P.18 “User Tools Menu (System Settings)”
ìç
$&&(66,1*ý7+(ý86(5ý722/6ýõ6<67(0ý6(77,1*6ô
D Change the settings by following
the instructions on the panel display. Then press the [OK] key.
Reference
⇒ P.19 “Settings You Can Change
With The User Tools”
Note
❒ [OK]: Press to set the new settings and return to the previous
menu.
❒ [Cancel]: Press to return to the
previous menu without changing any data.
Exiting from User Tools
A After changing the user tools settings, press
Counter} key.
Sort
the
1-Sided
11
Staple
Book
Stack
2-Sided
ë
2-Sided
2
2-Sided
2
2-Sided
2
2
Enhanced
{User Tools/
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L0103
Note
❒ You can also exit from user tools
by pressing the [Exit] key on the
User Tools Main Menu.
ìæ
86(5ý722/6ýõ6<67(0ý6(77,1*6ô
USER TOOLS MENU (SYSTEM SETTINGS)
ë
ìå
6(77,1*6ý<28ý&$1ý&+$1*(ý:,7+ý7+(ý86(5ý722/6
SETTINGS YOU CAN CHANGE WITH THE
USER TOOLS
Reference
For how to access the user tools, see ⇒ P.16 “Accessing The User Tools (System
Settings)”.
ë
System Settings 1/6
Menu
Description
01. Function Priority
(facsimile option required)
You can specify the mode to be displayed immediately after
the operation switch is turned on or System Reset mode is
turned on.
Note
❒ Default: Copy
02. Panel Beeper
The beeper (key tone) sounds when a key is pressed.
This beeper can be turned on or off.
Note
❒ Default: ON
03. Ready·Beeper
Choose whether the machine beeps when it becomes ready
for a copy run after power up.
Note
❒ Default: ON
04. Copy Count Display The copy counter can be set to show the number of copies
made (count up) or the number of copies remaining to be
made (count down).
Note
❒ Default: Up (count up)
ìä
86(5ý722/6ýõ6<67(0ý6(77,1*6ô
System Settings 2/6
Menu
Description
05. System Reset
The machine returns to its prioritized mode automatically
after your job is finished, after the selected time. This function is called “System Reset”. The time can be set from 10 to
999 seconds, or no system reset.
ë
Note
❒ Default: YES (60 seconds)
❒ You can specify the prioritized mode with the user tools.
See “01. Function Priority” in ⇒ P.19 “System Settings 1/6”
06. Function Switch
(facsimile option required)
How long the machine waits before switching to the default
mode if no operation has been performed after an operation
has finished.
Note
❒ Default: 3 seconds
07. Low Pwr. Shift Time The machine enters Low Power mode automatically after
your job is finished, after the selected time. The time can be
set from 1 to 240 minutes.
In Low Power mode, power consumption is saved about 35
% as compared with Stand-by mode. This value is a reference applicable to Type 1 (mainframe only).
Note
❒ Default: 15 minutes
08. Low Power Timer
The machine enters to Energy Saver mode automatically after your job is finished, after the selected time. The time can
be set from 10 to 999 seconds, or off.
Note
❒ Default: Yes (60 seconds)
ëí
6(77,1*6ý<28ý&$1ý&+$1*(ý:,7+ý7+(ý86(5ý722/6
System Settings 3/6
Menu
Description
09. Energy Saver Mode
The machine enters Energy Saver mode in the following
cases:
• If you hold down the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key for
about a second or more.
ë
• When the preset time selected with the Low Power Timer
has passed.
Reference
See “08. Low Power Timer” in ⇒ P.20 “System Settings
2
/6”.
In Energy Saver mode, power consumption is saved as
shown below, as compared with Stand-by mode.
• Level 1 (default): Saving about 25 %
• Level 2: Saving about 30 %
Warm-up time required for Energy Saver mode to return to
the ready condition is as follows:
• Level 1 (default): About 3 seconds
• Level 2: About 10 seconds
Note
❒ Default: Level 1
❒ The values above are references applicable to Type 1
(mainframe only).
10. Auto Off Timer
The machine turns itself off automatically to conserve energy after your job is finished, after the selected time. This
function is called “Auto Off ”. The time can be set from 1 to
240 minutes.
Note
❒ Default: 60 minutes
❒ Auto Off might not be effective when the machine is in
the following conditions:
• An error message is displayed.
• The remaining memory space for facsimile mode is
less than 100%.
❒ To return to the ready condition from Auto Off, the machine requires the same warm-up time as the time for becoming ready after its power is turned on.
❒ When the machine receives a fax in Auto Off mode, it automatically prints the fax.
ëì
86(5ý722/6ýõ6<67(0ý6(77,1*6ô
Menu
Description
11. Paper Size-Tray
Select the size of the copy paper set in the paper tray.
Note
❒ If the specified paper size differs from the size of paper
actually set in the paper tray, a paper misfeed might occur because the paper size is not detected correctly.
ë
Reference
See “Changing The Paper Size” in the “Copy Reference”.
12. Pap.Tray Priority
(for Copy mode only)
You can select the paper tray which will be selected as a default in the following conditions:
• When the operation switch is turned on.
• When System Reset or Auto Reset mode is turned on.
• When the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key is pressed.
• When the Auto Paper Select mode is not selected.
Tray1
Tray2
Tray3
Tray4
LCT
Optional Trays
ND6A0200
Note
❒ Default: Tray 1
❒ Tray 3, Tray 4, and LCT (Large Capacity Tray) are options.
ëë
6(77,1*6ý<28ý&$1ý&+$1*(ý:,7+ý7+(ý86(5ý722/6
System Settings 4/6
Menu
Description
13. Auto Tray Switch
If you load paper of the same size in two or more trays, the
machine automatically shifts another tray when the tray in
use runs out of paper. You can set or cancel this setting.
ë
Note
❒ Default: Yes
❒ If you put recycled paper or special paper in paper trays
using the Special Paper Indicate menu, the Auto Tray
Switch function is available to these trays only when
their settings are identical.
Reference
See “14. Sp. Paper Ind.” in ⇒ P.23 “System Settings 4/6”
14. Sp. Paper Ind.
When recycled paper or special paper is in the paper trays,
paper type can be indicated on the panel display.
Note
❒ Default: No Display
❒ “Rcyd. ppr.” appears on the panel display when recycled
paper is selected, and “Sp. ppr.” appears when special
paper is selected.
15. Output Tray
You can specify a tray to which documents are delivered for
each mode (copy and facsimile).
External Tray
Internal Tray
Finisher
Internal Tray 2
Finisher
Proof
Finisher
ND0P0202
Note
❒ You can specify a single tray for two or more modes.
❒ With the optional 3000-sheet finisher installed, B4, 81/2"
× 14" or larger paper will be automatically delivered to
the “Finisher Proof” even if you specified “Internal Tray”
as an output tray.
ëê
86(5ý722/6ýõ6<67(0ý6(77,1*6ô
Menu
Description
16. Print Priority (setSets the print priority for each mode.
ting the multi-accessing • “Display”
function)
Print priority is given to the mode displayed on the display.
• “Copy”
Print priority is given to the copy function.
ë
• “Fax”
Print priority is given to the fax function.
• “Interleave”
Prints jobs in the order in which they are initiated regardless of mode/function.
Different function's print output might be mixed. If you
want to avoid such mixing, specify an independent tray for
each feature using “Output Tray”. When using different
functions, attaching internal tray 2 allows you to specify an
independent tray for each function. If you want to attach
one, contact your local dealer.
Note
❒ Interrupt printing is disabled functions that have “User
Code Manage” set to “Yes”. The machine switches the
display after the time specified by “Function Switch” and
starts printing with the function.
Reference
⇒ P.6 “Multi-Access”
“15. Output Tray” in ⇒ P.23 “System Settings 4/6”
“18. User Code Manage” in ⇒ P.25 “System Settings 5/6”
“06. Function Switch” in ⇒ P.20 “System Settings 2/6”
ëé
6(77,1*6ý<28ý&$1ý&+$1*(ý:,7+ý7+(ý86(5ý722/6
System Settings 5/6
Menu
Description
17. Contrast
You can adjust the brightness of the panel display.
18. User Code Manage
ë
If the machine is set to use the User Code function, operators must input their user
codes before the machine can operate. The machine keeps count of the number of copies made under each user code.
Note
❒ Enter a previously registered key operator code with the {Number} keys.
Reference
“Key Operator Code”
Code Manage-Copy
Specify whether to employ user codes to restrict copier users and manage the number of copies made.
Note
❒ Default: No
19. Management Setting
Use these settings to manage use of the machine.
Note
❒ Enter a previously registered key operator code with the {Number} keys.
Reference
“Key Operator Code”
Show/PrintCounter
You can check and print the number of copies made under
each function.
Print CounterList
You can print the counter data for all functions.
Key Operator Code
If you select “Yes”, only operators who know the key operator code can access the “18. User Code Manage” and “19.
Management Setting” user tools.
Note
❒ Default: No
❒ If you select “Yes”, you should register the key operator
code. See below.
Reg/Chg KeyOpCode
Use to register or change the key operator code (up to 8 digits).
ëè
86(5ý722/6ýõ6<67(0ý6(77,1*6ô
System Settings 6/6
Menu
Description
22. ADF Orig. Ejection
As a default setting, the scanned originals from the document feeder (ADF) are ejected to the ADF external tray. But,
if there is no space to attach an ADF external tray, you can
change the output tray to the ADF tray. However, if the output tray is set to the ADF tray, it takes a little more time than
to the ADF external tray.
ë
Note
❒ Default: ADF External Tray
24. <F/F4>Size Setting
Currently three types of F size are available; 81/2" × 13", 81/4"
× 13" and 8" × 13".
The document feeder or platen cover sensor cannot distinguish these 3 types of originals.
This function sets the F size from the document feeder or
platen cover sensor.
Auto Paper Select or Auto Reduce/Enlarge in the case of F
size originals functions based on this setting.
Note
❒ Default: 81/2" × 13"L
ëç
INDEX
Symbols
# key,
N
ìè
Number keys,
A
O
ADF Orig. Ejection, ëç
Auto Off Timer, ëì
Auto Tray Switch, ëê
Output Tray,
Panel Beeper, ìä
Panel Display, ìè
Pap. Tray Priority, ëë
Paper Size-Tray, ëë
Print CounterList, ëè
Print Priority, ëé
Clear/Stop key, ìè
Code Manage-Copy, ëè
Contrast, ëè
Copy Count Display, ìä
Copy Mode, ì, ê, ìí
Cursor keys, ìè
R
Ready·Beeper, ìä
Reg/Chg KeyOpCode,
E
ëì
Energy Saver Mode,
ëè
S
F
Selection keys, ìè
Show/PrintCounter,
Sp. Paper Ind., ëê
System Reset, ëí
F/F4 Size Setting, ëç
Facsimile Mode, ì, é, ìë
Function Priority, ìä
Function Switch, ëí
ëè
U
I
User Code Manage, ëè
User Tools (System Settings),
User Tools/Counter key, ìè
ìí
K
Key Operator Code, ëè
Keys for User Tools (System Settings),
ëê
P
C
Interrupt Copying,
ìè
ìè
ìè
L
Low Power Timer, ëí
Low Pwr. Shift Time, ëí
M
Management Setting,
Modes, è
Multi-Access, ç
ëè
ëæ
Note to users in the United States of America
Notice:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur
in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help.
Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
1. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for connections to host computer (and/or peripheral) in order to meet FCC emission limits.
2. AC adapter with ferrite core must be used for RF interference suppression.
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Ricoh Corporation, 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ 07006
201-882-2000
Note to users in Canada
Warning:
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada
Avertissement:
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel
brouilleur du Canada.
In accordance with ISO Standard 7001, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power
switch:
a means POWER ON.
c means STAND BY.
Copyright © 1998 Ricoh Co., Ltd.
RICOH COMPANY, LTD.
15-5, 1 chome, Minami-Aoyama,
Minato-ku, Tokyo
Telephone: Tokyo 3479-3111
U.S.A.
RICOH CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006
(TEL) 973-882-2000
Spain
RICOH ESPAÑA S.A.
Guitard, 45
08014 Barcelona
(TEL) 490-09-60
Netherlands
RICOH EUROPE B.V.
Groenelaan 3 P.O. Box 114
1180 AC - Amstelveen Holland
(TEL) 020-5474111
Italy
RICOH ITALIA S.p.A.
Via della Metallurgia, 12
(zona Basson) - 37139 VERONA
(TEL) 045-851 00 44
United Kingdom
RICOH U.K. LTD.
Ricoh House
1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham,
Middlesex, TW13 7HG
(TEL) 181-261-4000
Hong Kong
RICOH HONG KONG LTD.
23/F., China Overseas Building,
139, Hennessy Road,
Wan Chai, Hong Kong
(TEL) 2862-2888
Germany
RICOH DEUTSCHLAND GMBH
Mergenthalerallee 38-40,
65760 Eschborn
(TEL) (06196) 906-0
France
RICOH FRANCE S.A.
383 Avenue du Général de Gaulle,
B.P. 307, 92143 Clamart Cedex
(TEL) 01-4094-3838
Singapore
RICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
#15-01/02 The Heeren,
260 Orchard Road,
Singapore 238855
(TEL) 65-830-5888
Printed in China
UE USA A2308607
340/350/450 Operating Instructions
Overseas Affiliates
340/350/450
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
COPY REFERENCE
ND0A0101
Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy
for future reference.
For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To get
maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in
this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Please read the Safety Information before using this machine. It contains important information related
to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
- Notes:
Some illustrations may be slightly different from your machine.
Certain options may not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Operator Safety:
This machine is considered a CDRH class I laser device, safe for office/ EDP use. The machine contains two 5-milliwat, 760 - 800 nanometer wavelength, GaAIAs laser diodes. Direct (or indirect reflected) eye contact with the laser beam might cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and interlock
mechanisms have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
Laser Safety:
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical unit
in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite
equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser
chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis
and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement or the optical subsystem is required.
Warning:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Notes:
The model names of the machines do not appear in the following pages. Check the type of your machine before reading this manual. (For details, see ⇒ P.1 “Machine Types”.)
•
Type 1: Aficio 340
•
Type 2: Aficio 350
•
Type 3: Aficio 450
Certain types might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the Inch version.
For good copy quality, Ricoh recommends that you use genuine Ricoh toner.
Ricoh shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts other
than genuine Ricoh parts in your Ricoh office product.
Power Source:
120 V, 60 Hz, 10 A or more
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. For details about power source,
see ⇒ P.167 “Power Connection”.
SAFETY INFORMATION
When using your machine, the following safety precautions should be always be
followed.
Safety During Operation
In this manual, the following important symbols are used:
R WARNING:
Ignoring this warning could cause serious injury or even death.
R CAUTION:
Ignoring this caution could cause injury or damage to property.
Examples Of Indications
Symbols R mean a situation that requires you take care.
Symbols v mean “Hot surface”.
Do NOT carry out the operation represented by this symbol m.
This example means “Do not take apart”.
Symbols ● mean you MUST perform this operation.
This example means “You must remove the wall plug”.
i
R WARNING:
• Only connect the machine to the power source described on
the inside front cover of this manual.
• Avoid multi-wiring.
• Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power cord. Do not place heavy objects on it, pull it hard or bend
it more than necessary. These actions could cause an electric shock or fire.
• Do not plug or unplug the power cord with your hands wet.
Otherwise, an electric shock might occur.
• Make sure the wall outlet is near the machine and freely accessible so that in event of an emergency it can be unplugged easily.
• Do not remove any covers or screws other than those specified in this manual. Some parts of the machine are at a high
voltage and could give you an electric shock. Also, if the machine has laser systems, direct (or indirect) reflected eye
contact with the laser beam may cause serious eye damage.
When the machine needs to be checked, adjusted, or repaired, contact your service representative.
• Do not take apart or attempt any modifications to this machine. There is a risk of fire, electric shock, explosion or loss
of sight. If the machine has laser systems, there is a risk of
serious eye damage.
• If the machine looks damaged or breaks down, smoke is
coming out, there is a strange smell or anything looks unusual, immediately turn off the operation and main power
switches then unplug the power cord from the wall. Do not
continue using the machine in this condition. Contact your
service representative.
• If metal, liquid or foreign matter falls into the machine, turn
off the operation and main power switches, and unplug the
main power cord. Contact your service representative. Do
not keep using the machine with a fault or defect.
• Do not put any metal objects or containers holding water
(e.g. vases, flowerpots, glasses) on the machine. If the contents fall inside the machine, a fire or electric shock could
occur.
ii
• Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust
might ignite when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of the
used toner containers according to local regulations for
plastics.
iii
R CAUTION:
• Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. A fire or an electric shock might occur.
• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it topples over, it could cause injury.
• After you move the machine, fix it with the caster fixture. Otherwise, the machine might move or come down to cause a personal
injury.
• When you move the machine, unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet to avoid fire or electric shock.
• When the machine will not be used for a long time, unplug the
power cord.
• When you pull out the plug from the socket, grip the plug to avoid
damaging the cord and causing fire or electric shock.
• If you use the machine in a confined space, make sure there is a
continuous air turnover.
• Do not reuse stapled paper. Do not use aluminum foil, carboncontaining paper or other conductive paper. Otherwise, a fire
might occur.
• When removing misfed paper, do not touch the fusing section because it could be very hot.
• This machine has been tested for safety using this supplier's
parts and consumables. We recommend you only use these
specified supplies.
• Do not eat or swallow toner.
• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of reach of
children.
• This equipment is only to be installed by a qualified service personnel.
LY
• Deliver to collection point for waste products. Do not be disposed
of via domestic refuse collection.
v
ENERGY STAR
As an Energy Star Partner, we have determined that this machine model meets
Energy Star Guidelines for energy efficiency.
This product was designed to reduce the environmental impact associated with
copying equipment by means of energy saving feature such as Auto Off mode.
For details, see the following pages.
❖ Auto Off Timer
See “10. Auto Off Timer” in “System Settings 3/6” in the System Settings.
❖ Low Pwr. Shift Time
See “07. Low Pwr. Shift Time” in “System Settings 2/6” in the System Settings.
❖ Duplex Priority
See “10. Duplex Priority” in ⇒ P.153 “1. General Features 3/4”.
- Recycled Paper
Please contact your sales or service representative for recommended recycled
paper types that may be used in this machine.
vi
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL
Symbols
In this manual, the following symbols are used:
R WARNING:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in
death or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety Information section.
R CAUTION:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in minor or moderate injury or property damage that does not involve personal injury
when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this
symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety
Information section.
* The statements above are notes for your safety.
Important
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be
damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.
Preparation
This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before operating.
Note
This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misoperation.
Limitation
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,
or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.
Reference
This symbol indicates a reference.
[
]
Keys that appear on the machine's panel display.
{
}
Keys built into the machine's operation panel.
vii
WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH THIS MACHINE
(COPY MODE)
Directional Size
Magnification(inch)
⇒ Page 69.
Enhanced Image Copy ⇒ Page 38.
Directional
Magnification(%)
⇒ Page 71.
Clear Image Copy
Map
a%
A"
a"
b%
B"
b"
Positive / Negative ⇒ Page 98.
OHP Slip Sheet ⇒ Page 96.
2
1
2
112
*1
Image Repeat ⇒ Page 99.
Series Copies
⇒ Page 82.
Double Copies
R
R
1 2
R
1 2
Image Repeat
R
RRRR
RRRR
Cover / Paper Designate
⇒ Page 91.
Front Cover
1
Archive File ⇒ Page 102.
2
3
1
2
3
*1
Both Covers
*2
Store
1
MAP
Memory
2
3
1
3
*1
Paper Designate
10
10
5
Recall
2
1
5
1
ND0X0400
YLLL
Sort ⇒ Page 45.
Staple ⇒ Page 49.
Auto Reduce / Enlarge
⇒ Page 42.
81/2 x 11"
1
3
3
2
2
1
1
2
3
*3
Duplex ⇒ Page 85.
1
2
Zoom ⇒ Page 67.
1
R RRR
2
*5
Sort
1-Sided
11
11" x 17"
*3 *4
RR
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
Program
2
2
2
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
Speed Dial
User Tools / Counter
On Hook Dial
Copy
Pause /
Redial
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
Fax
*1 Type 1 requires the optional bypass tray.
*2 The optional copier hard disk is required
*
Text . Photo
Photo
Special Orig.
Lighter
Darker
Auto Image Density
Tone
*3 Type 1 reguires the optional 8MB copier
memory unit.
*4 The optional finisher is required.
*5 Type 1 requires the optional duplex unit,
interchange unit and 8MB copier memory
unit.
Combine ⇒ Page 78.
Text·Photo Mode ⇒ Page 39.
Photo + Text
1 2
Clear Image Copy
1 2
3 4
3 4
The game of go
The game of go
Photo Mode ⇒ Page 39.
Margin Adjustment
⇒ Page 73.
A
A
Erase Center / Border
⇒ Page 75.
Photo
Clear Image Copy
Erase Center
A
B
A
B
A
B
Erase Border
A
B
ND0X0401
L[
TABLE OF CONTENTS
MACHINE TYPES ....................................................................................... 1
GUIDE TO COMPONENTS ........................................................................
Guide.............................................................................................................
OPTIONS ....................................................................................................
Type 1 ...........................................................................................................
Type 2 and Type 3 ........................................................................................
FUNCTION LIST BASED ON OPTIONS ....................................................
2
5
7
7
8
9
OPERATION PANEL ................................................................................ 12
PANEL DISPLAY...................................................................................... 14
Displays And Key Operations ..................................................................... 14
Display Panel Layout .................................................................................. 16
1. BASICS
STARTING THE MACHINE ......................................................................
Turning On The Power................................................................................
Turning Off The Power................................................................................
CHANGING MODES................................................................................
17
17
18
19
ORIGINALS...............................................................................................
Sizes And Weights Of Recommended Originals.........................................
Sizes Difficult To Detect ..............................................................................
Original Sizes And Scanning Area/Missing Image Area .............................
COPY PAPER ...........................................................................................
Recommended Paper Sizes And Types .....................................................
Non-recommended Paper...........................................................................
Paper Storage .............................................................................................
TONER ......................................................................................................
Handling Toner............................................................................................
Toner Storage .............................................................................................
Used Toner .................................................................................................
20
20
21
22
23
23
25
26
27
27
27
27
2. COPYING
BASIC PROCEDURE ............................................................................... 29
SETTING ORIGINALS ..............................................................................
Setting Originals On The Exposure Glass ..................................................
Setting Originals In The Document Feeder.................................................
Using SADF, Mixed Sized, and Thin Paper modes ....................................
BASIC FUNCTIONS .................................................................................
Adjusting Copy Image Density ....................................................................
Enhanced Image Copy................................................................................
Selecting Original Type Setting...................................................................
x
31
31
32
33
37
37
38
39
Selecting Copy Paper ................................................................................. 40
Auto Reduce/Enlarge—Having The Machine Choose The Reproduction
Ratios .......................................................................................................... 42
SORT/STACK/STAPLE ............................................................................ 43
Sort—Sorting Into Sets (123, 123, 123) ...................................................... 45
Stack—Stacking Together All Copies Of A Page (111, 222, 333) .............. 47
Staple .......................................................................................................... 49
COPYING FROM THE BYPASS TRAY.................................................... 55
When copying onto OHP transparencies or thick paper ............................. 58
PROGRAM—STORING YOUR COPY SETTINGS IN MEMORY ............ 60
Storing Your Settings .................................................................................. 60
Deleting A Program..................................................................................... 61
Recalling A Program ................................................................................... 62
OTHER FUNCTIONS ................................................................................ 63
Energy Saver Mode—Saving Energy ......................................................... 63
Interrupt—Temporarily Stopping One Job To Copy Something Else.......... 63
User Codes ................................................................................................. 63
Auto Start—Entering Copy Job Settings During The Warm-up Period ....... 64
Original Beeper ........................................................................................... 64
PRESET REDUCE/ENLARGE—REDUCING AND ENLARGING USING
PRESET RATIOS...................................................................................... 65
ZOOM—REDUCING AND ENLARGING IN 1 % STEPS ......................... 67
DIRECTIONAL SIZE MAGNIFICATION (INCH)—STRETCHING AND
SQUEEZING THE IMAGE INTO THE COPY AREA ................................ 69
DIRECTIONAL MAGNIFICATION (%)—STRETCHING AND SQUEEZING
THE IMAGE IN 1 % STEPS ...................................................................... 71
MARGIN ADJUSTMENT—ADJUSTING THE MARGIN .......................... 73
ERASE CENTER/BORDER—ERASING THE CENTER AND THE
BORDER ................................................................................................... 75
COMBINE—COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO ONE COPY ...................... 78
SERIES COPIES—MAKING ONE-SIDED COPIES FROM VARIOUS
ORIGINALS............................................................................................... 82
Book → 1-Sided—Making One-sided Copies From Two Facing Page Of A
Bound Original (Book)................................................................................. 82
2-Sided→1-Sided—Making One-sided Copies From Two-sided
Originals ...................................................................................................... 84
DUPLEX—MAKING TWO-SIDED COPIES.............................................. 85
1-Sided → 2-Sided—Making Two-sided Copies From One-sided
Originals ...................................................................................................... 86
Book → 2-Sided—Making Two-Sided Copies From Facing Pages Of A Bound
Original (Book) ............................................................................................ 89
2-Sided → 2-Sided—Making Two-sided Copies From Two-sided
Originals ...................................................................................................... 90
COVER/PAPER DESIGNATE—ADDING OR INSERTING SHEETS ...... 91
xi
Front Cover—Copying Or Adding A Front Cover........................................ 91
Both Covers—Copying Or Adding Front And Back Covers ........................ 93
Paper Designate—Copying Designated Pages Of Originals Onto Slip
Sheets ......................................................................................................... 94
OHP SLIP SHEET—COPYING OR INSERTING SLIP SHEET................ 96
POSITIVE/NEGATIVE—COPYING IN COMPLEMENTALY COLORS.... 98
IMAGE REPEAT—REPEATING AN IMAGE............................................ 99
Double Copies—Copying The Image Twice On One Page ........................ 99
Image Repeat—Repeating An Image Over The Entire Copy ................... 100
ARCHIVE FILE—STORING THE IMAGES OF YOUR ORIGINALS INTO
MEMORY ................................................................................................ 102
Storing The Images................................................................................... 103
Deleting The Stored Images ..................................................................... 105
Printing A List Of The Stored Images........................................................ 106
Recalling The Stored Images.................................................................... 107
COMBINATION CHART ......................................................................... 108
3. WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG
IF YOUR MACHINE DOES NOT OPERATE AS YOU WANT ...............
Message....................................................................................................
Display ......................................................................................................
IF YOU CANNOT MAKE CLEAR COPIES.............................................
111
111
112
113
IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU WANT ...............................
Adjust Image .............................................................................................
Combine....................................................................................................
Duplex .......................................................................................................
B LOADING PAPER..............................................................................
Loading Paper In The Large Capacity Tray ..............................................
D ADDING TONER................................................................................
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
x CLEARING MISFEEDS .....................................................................
CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE ..............................................................
d ADDING STAPLES............................................................................
1000-Sheet Finisher..................................................................................
3000-Sheet Finisher..................................................................................
e REMOVING JAMMED STAPLES......................................................
1000-Sheet Finisher..................................................................................
3000-Sheet Finisher..................................................................................
y REMOVING PUNCH WASTE ............................................................
124
132
134
134
136
139
139
141
144
4. USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)
ACCESSING THE USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)......................... 145
Exiting From User Tools............................................................................ 146
xii
USER TOOLS MENU (COPY FEATURES)............................................
SETTINGS YOU CAN CHANGE WITH THE USER TOOLS..................
1. General Features 1/4 .............................................................................
1. General Features 2/4 .............................................................................
1. General Features 3/4 .............................................................................
1. General Features 4/4 .............................................................................
2. Adjust Image 1/2 ....................................................................................
2. Adjust Image 2/2 ....................................................................................
3. Input/Output 1/2 ......................................................................................
3. Input/Output 2/2 ......................................................................................
4. Shortcut Keys 1/1 ...................................................................................
148
150
150
152
153
154
155
157
160
162
164
5. REMARKS
DO'S AND DON'TS................................................................................. 165
WHERE TO PUT YOUR MACHINE........................................................
Machine Environment ...............................................................................
Power Connection.....................................................................................
Access To Machine...................................................................................
MAINTAINING YOUR MACHINE ...........................................................
Cleaning The Exposure Glass ..................................................................
Cleaning The Platen Cover .......................................................................
Cleaning The Document Feeder ...............................................................
166
166
167
168
169
169
169
169
6. SPECIFICATION
MAINFRAME........................................................................................... 171
DOCUMENT FEEDER (OPTION) ........................................................... 176
PAPER TRAY UNIT (OPTION)............................................................... 177
INTERNAL TRAY 2 (1 BIN TRAY) (OPTION) ........................................ 178
1000-SHEET FINISHER (OPTION) ........................................................ 179
3000-SHEET FINISHER (OPTION) ........................................................ 180
PUNCH KIT (OPTION)............................................................................ 182
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY (LCT) (OPTION) .......................................... 183
DUPLEX UNIT (OPTION) ....................................................................... 184
BYPASS TRAY (OPTION)...................................................................... 185
8 MB COPIER MEMORY UNIT (ELECTRIC SORT KIT) (OPTION) ...... 186
COPIER HARD DISK (IMAGE ENHANCE KIT) ..................................... 187
INDEX...................................................................................................... 188
xiii
xiv
MACHINE TYPES
There are three models of this machine. The main differences between them are
memory capacity and copy speed. To make sure which model you have, see the
inside front cover.
Copy speed
Memory capacity
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
35 copies/minute
(A4K, 81/2" ×
11"K)
35 copies/minute
(A4K, 81/2" ×
11"K)
45 copies/minute
(A4K, 81/2" ×
11"K)
4 MB
12 MB
12 MB
Option
Option
(8 MB optional
memory available)
Fax unit
Option
1
GUIDE TO COMPONENTS
1
5
6
7
2
Main
Power
On/Off
On
8
3
9
4
10
11
12
13
ND0A02EE
1. Platen cover (option) or Document Feeder (ADF) (option)
if the main power switch is turned on.
If it is off, turn it on.
Lower the platen cover over originals
placed on the exposure glass for copying.
If you have the document feeder, insert a
stack of originals here. They will be fed
automatically.
(The illustration shows the document
feeder.)
5. ADF external tray
2. Exposure glass
7. On indicator
Position originals here face down for
copying. See ⇒ P.20 “Originals”.
3. Internal tray
Copied paper is delivered here face down.
4. Main power switch
Do not touch this switch. This switch is
used only by a service representative
when the optional fax unit is installed.
Note
❒ If the machine does not operate after
turning on the operation switch, check
Originals are delivered here.
6. Main Power indicator
This indicator lights up when the main
power switch is turned on, and goes off
when the switch is turned off.
This indicator lights up when the operation switch is turned on, and goes off
when the switch is turned off.
8. Operarion switch
Press this switch to turn the power on
(the On indicator lights up). To turn the
power off, press this switch again (the On
indicator goes off).
9. Operation panel
See ⇒ P.12 “Operation Panel”.
10. Duplex unit (Unit for two-sided
copies) (option for Type 1)
Makes two-sided copies.
2
11. Front cover
Open to access the inside of the machine.
12. Paper tray
Set paper here. See ⇒ P.119 “B Loading
Paper”.
13. Paper tray unit (option)
3
Preface2 Page 4 Tuesday, May 19, 1998 1:55 PM
1
2
3
ND6A0101
1. Bypass tray (option for Type 1)
2. Right side cover
Use to copy onto OHP transparencies,
adhesive labels, translucent paper, post
cards, and non-standard size paper. See
⇒ P.55 “Copying From The Bypass Tray”.
Open this cover before making 2-sided
copies on B4, 8 1/2" × 14" or larger copy
paper.
3. Lower right cover
Open this cover to remove jammed paper
which fed from the optional paper tray
unit.
1
ND8A0102
1. Ventilation hole
Prevents overheating. Do not obstruct
the ventilation hole by placing or leaning
4
an object near it. If the machine overheats, a fault might occur.
Guide
The guides of the internal tray minimize curled copies when they are delivered.
Raise these guides when you make copies on A3, 11" × 17" or thin paper.
❖ To copy onto A3, 11" × 17" paper
Raise the end fence.
ND3P0100
❖ If either side of the OHP transparencies or thin paper is curled
Raise the left end of the guide until it clicks.
ND3P0200
5
❖ If the end of the sheet is curled
A
Remove the guide.
ND3P0300
B
Reinstall the guide in the opposite direction.
ND3P0400
6
OPTIONS
Type 1
1
2
3
6
7
4
5
8
9 10
ND0P01EE
1. 1000-sheet finisher
7. Paper tray unit
Sorts, stacks, and staples copies.
Consists of two paper trays.
2. External tray
8. Large Capacity Tray (LCT)
If you selected this as the output tray,
copied paper is delivered here face
down. See “15. Output Tray” in the System Settings.
Holds 1,500 sheets of paper.
3. Platen cover
Lower this cover over originals for copying.
4. Document feeder (ADF)
Insert a stack of originals here.
They will be fed automatically.
5. Internal tray 2 (1 bin tray)
If you selected this as the output tray,
copied paper is delivered here face
down. See “15. Output Tray” in the System Settings.
9. Bypass tray
Use to copy onto OHP transparencies,
adhesive labels, translucent paper, post
cards, and non-standard size paper. See
⇒ P.55 “Copying From The Bypass Tray”.
10. Duplex unit
Use to make two-sided copies.
Other options:
• Interchange unit
• 8 MB copier memory unit (Electric
sort kit)
• Copier hard disk (Image enhance
kit)
6. Bridge unit
Relays copies to the external tray or finisher. (The Punch function is optional.)
7
Type 2 and Type 3
1
2
3
6
7
8
4
5
9
ND0P02EE
1. 1000-sheet finisher
6. 3000-sheet finisher (only for Type
Sorts, stacks, and staples copies.
3)
2. External tray
Sorts, stacks, staples copies, and makes
punch holes (The Punch function is optional).
If you selected this as the output tray,
copied paper is delivered here face
down. See “15. Output Tray” in the System Settings.
3. Platen cover
7. Bridge unit
Lower this cover over originals for copying.
Relays copies to the external tray or finisher.
4. Document feeder (ADF)
8. Paper tray unit
Insert a stack of originals here.
They will be fed automatically.
Consists of two paper trays.
5. Internal tray 2 (1 bin tray)
Holds 1,500 sheets of paper.
If you selected this as the output tray,
copied paper is delivered here face
down. See “15. Output Tray” in the System Settings.
8
• 1: Proof tray
• 2: Shift tray
9. Large Capacity Tray (LCT)
Other options:
• Copier hard disk (Image enhance
kit)
• Punch kit (only for Type 3 with
3000-sheet finisher)
FUNCTION LIST BASED ON OPTIONS
The function that are available to you depend on your machine configuration
and which options you have. See the table below.
❍…Available
×…Not available
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Selecting Original Type
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Auto Paper Select
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Selecting Copy Paper
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Auto Reduce/Enlarge
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Enhanced Image Copy
❍
❍
*1
❍
*1
❍
❍
Sort
×
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Rotate Sort/Rotate Stack
×
*2
*2
*2
*2
❍
❍
Shift Sort/Shift Stack
×
*3
*3
*3
*3
❍
❍
Stapling
×
*3
*3
*3
*3
❍
❍
Copying from the Bypass Tray
*4
*4
*4
❍
❍
❍
❍
Program
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Reduce/Enlarge
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Zoom
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Directional Size
Magnification (inch)
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Directional Magnification (%)
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Margin Adjustment
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Erase Center/Border
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
on the exposure glass
in the document feeder
❍
Type 2, Type 3 with
copier hard disk
❍
Type 2, Type 3
Adjusting Image Density
Type 1
Type 1 with 8 MB copier memory
unit and copier hard disk
Place originals
Type 1 with 8 MB copier memory
unit
Model
9
❍
❍
❍
❍
4 pages → 1-sided
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
8 pages → 2-sided
×
*5
*5
❍
❍
❍
❍
4 pages → 2-sided
×
*5
*5
❍
❍
❍
❍
16 pages → booklet
×
*5
*5
❍
❍
❍
❍
Series Copies
Book → 1-sided
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
2-sided→ 1-sided
*6
*6
*6
*6
*6
×
❍
Duplex
1-sided → 2-sided
×
*5
*5
❍
❍
❍
❍
Book → 2-sided
×
*5
*5
❍
❍
❍
❍
2-sided → 2-sided
×
*5
*5
❍
❍
❍
❍
*4 *7
*4
*4
❍
❍
❍
❍
*4
*4
*4
❍
❍
❍
❍
Positive/Negative
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Repeat
Double copies
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Image Repeat
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
×
×
❍
×
❍
❍
×
Cover/Paper Designate
OHP Slip Sheet
Archive File
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
Standard setting.
Set the paper of the same size KL in the paper trays.
Finisher required.
Bypass tray required.
Duplex unit and interchange unit required.
Document Feeder required.
Only a set of copies can be made.
on the exposure glass
in the document feeder
❍
Type 2, Type 3 with
copier hard disk
❍
Type 2, Type 3
Type 1 with 8 MB copier memory
unit and copier hard disk
❍
Type 1
2 pages → 1-sided
Combine
10
Place originals
Type 1 with 8 MB copier memory
unit
Model
11
OPERATION PANEL
1
2
3
Sort
4 5
1-Sided
11
Communicating
Start
Manual RX
Receive
File
Standard
Confidential
File
TEL
Mode
TX File
Status
Detail
Super Fine
Immediate
Trans.
Memory
Trans.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
08
01
10
11
12
13
14
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
20
21
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
22
15
23
24
25
26
27
28
X
Y
Z
V
16
17
W
18
19
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
User Tools / Counter
Copy
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
Fax
14
17
13 15 16 18
1. Operation panel for facsimile
6. Panel display
mode (for machine with optional fax
function)
See the “Facsimile Reference”.
Shows operation status, error messages,
and function menus. See ⇒ P.14 “Panel
Display”.
2. {Sorter} key
7. {Program} key
Sort/Rotate Sort/Shift Sort: automatically sorts copies.
Rotate Stack/Shift Stack: stacks together
copies of each page.
Staple: staples each set of copies together.
8. {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key
3. {Duplex} key
Makes two-sided copies. See ⇒ P.85 “Duplex—Making Two-Sided Copies”.
Press to clear the previously entered copy
job settings. Also use to switch to and
from Energy Saver mode. See ⇒ P.63
“Energy Saver Mode—Saving Energy”.
4. {User Tools/Counter} key
9. {Interrupt} key
• User Tools
Press to change the default settings
and conditions to meet your requirements.
• Counter
Press to check or print the total
number of copies made.
See ⇒ P.145 “USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)”.
5. Indicators
These indicators show errors or the status
of the machine.
See ⇒ P.111 “WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG”.
12
Press to select the program mode. See ⇒
P.60 “Program—Storing Your Copy Settings In Memory”.
Press to make interrupt copies during a
copy run. See ⇒ P.63 “Interrupt—Temporarily Stopping One Job To Copy Something
Else”.
10. Main Power indicator
This indicator lights up when the main
power switch is turned on, and goes off
when the switch is turned off.
11. On indicator
This indicator lights up when the operation switch is turned on, and goes off
when the switch is turned off.
6
7
Program
8
Clear Modes /
Energy Saver
C
9
Interrupt
10
Main
Power
On
Speed Dial
On Hook Dial
1
4
GHI
Pause /
Redial
*
Text . Photo
Photo
Special Orig.
2
3
ABC
DEF
5
6
JKL
MNO
7
8
9
PRS
TUV
WXY
Clear / Stop
C
11
12
Start
Enter
Lighter
Darker
Auto Image Density
Tone
0
OPER
19
20
21 22
23
24
25 26
12. Operation switch
Press this switch to turn the power on
(the On indicator lights up). To turn the
power off, press this switch again (the On
indicator goes off).
20. {Lighter} and {Darker} keys and
{Auto Image Density} key
Adjusts the copy image density.
21. Selection keys
13. {Enhanced Image} key
Press the key under the item you wish to
select.
Reproduces copies with a better image
quality.
22. <> keys (Cursor keys)
14. {Menu} key
Press to select an item on the panel display.
Displays the names of available functions.
23. Operation panel for facsimile
15. Shortcut keys
mode (for machines with optional
fax function)
Press to use the stored functions you frequently use.
See the “Facsimile Reference”.
16. {Zoom} key
Changes the reproduction ratio in 1 %
steps.
17. {Auto Reduce/Enlarge} key
Enlarges or reduces the image automatically according to the specified paper
size.
18. Function keys
Press to change modes. To use copy functions, press the {Copy} key.
19. {Original Type} key
Press to select the type of your originals.
24. {Number} keys
Use to enter the desired number of copies
and data for selected modes.
Use the {#} key to enter data in selected
modes.
25. {Start} key
Press to start copying. Use to set the Auto
Start. See ⇒ P.64 “Auto Start—Entering
Copy Job Settings During The Warm-up Period”.
26. {Clear/Stop} key
While entering numbers, press to cancel a
number to have entered. While copying,
press to stop copying.
13
PANEL DISPLAY
The panel display shows operational status, error messages, and function menus.
Important
❒ Do not apply a strong shock or force of about 30 N (about 3 kgf) or more to
the panel display. Otherwise, the display might be damaged.
Note
❒ When you select or specify an item on the panel display, it is highlighted like
Auto .
❒ Keys appearing as OK cannot be used.
❒ By default, the machine is in Copy mode when you switch on. This can be
changed. See “Settings You Can Change With The User Tools” of the System
Settings.
Displays And Key Operations
Note
❒ The following illustrations are examples for the machine with the optional
paper tray unit and large capacity tray installed.
❖ Copy initial display
1
2
3
GAMEN00
4
1. The function items for the selected function are displayed.
2. Number of originals set.
3. Displays operational status or messages.
4. These keys correspond to the item on the display.
Press a relevant key to select a function.
• To move the selection to the left, press the < key.
• To move the selection to the right, press the > key.
5. Displays items which can be selected or specified.
14
5
❖ Function menu display
2
1
3
GAMEN01
1. When you select a function name, ' mark appears before the name.
2. Displays operational status or message.
3. Displays items which can be selected or specified.
❖ Common keys
[OK]
Sets a selected function or entered value and returns to the previous display.
[Cancel]
Cancels a selected function or entered value and returns to the previous display.
[↑
↑Prev.][↓
↓Next]
When there are too many items fit on the display, use these keys
to move between pages.
<>
Press to highlight the selection you wish to select.
[Menu]
Press to return to the previous menu.
[Exit]
Sets a selected function or entered value and returns to the initial
display.
15
Display Panel Layout
The basic elements used on the display are shown below. Understanding their
meaning helps you exploit this machine's features quickly and easily.
❖ Sample Display for Erasing the Center/Border
1
2
3
GAMEN02
1. Operational status or message.
2. Selectable/specifiable functions are displayed.
3. Screened key means to press it.
kPress the [Center] key.
1
GAMEN03
2
3
1. Selectable/specifiable functions are displayed.
2. Cancels the settings and returns to the previous display.
3. Confirms the settings and returns to the previous display.
16
1. BASICS
STARTING THE MACHINE
To start the machine, turn on the operation switch.
Note
❒ This machine automatically enters
Energy Saver mode or turns itself
off if you do not use the machine
for a while. See “09. Energy Saver
Mode”, “10. Auto Off Timer” of
the System Settings.
Turning On The Power
A Make sure that the power cord is
plugged into the wall outlet firmly and the Main Power indicator
is lit.
B Press
the operation switch to
make the On indicator light up.
- Power switches
This machine has two power switches: See ⇒ P.2 “Guide To Components”.
❖ Operation switch (right side of the operation panel)
Turn on this switch to activate the
machine. When the machine has
warmed up, you can make copies
or send faxes.
❖ Main power switch (left side of the machine)
Do not touch the main power
switch. It should be used only by a
service representative when the
optional fax unit is installed.
Important
❒ If you leave the main power switch
off for more than about one hour,
all fax files in memory will be lost.
See “Turning Off The Power” of
the Facsimile Reference.
Main
Power
On
r / Stop
ND1M01EE
The panel display will come on.
Note
❒ During the warm-up period,
you can use the Auto Start function. See ⇒ P.64 “Auto Start—
Entering Copy Job Settings During The Warm-up Period”.
❒ Warm-up period is as follows:
• Type 1 and Type 2: less than
85 seconds
• Type 3: less than 100 seconds
17
BASICS
When the machine is set for user codes
Turning Off The Power
A Enter
A Press
your user code using the
{Number} keys. Then press the {#}
key.
1
Note
❒ To prevent others from making
copies with your user code,
press the {Clear Modes/Energy
Saver} key and the {Clear/Stop}
key simultaneously after copying.
Reference
For setting user codes, see ⇒
P.154 “1. General Features 4/4”.
When the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver}
indicator is lit
The machine is in Energy Saver
mode.
A Press the {Clear Modes/Energy Sav-
er} key.
The machine will return to the
ready condition.
Note
❒ The machine will also return to
the ready condition when an
original is set in the document
feeder, or when the platen cover
or document feeder is opened.
Reference
See “08. Low Power Timer” of
the System Settings.
18
the operation switch to
make the On indicator go off.
Main
Power
On
r / Stop
ND1M01EE
Important
❒ If you want to unplug the power cord or turn off the main
power switch, make sure that
the remaining memory space
indicates 100 % on the display
for facsimile mode.
❒ Fax files stored in memory will
be lost an hour after you turn
the main power switch off or
you unplug the power cord. See
“Turning Off The Power” of the
Facsimile Reference.
CHANGING MODES
CHANGING MODES
You can use this machine not only as a copier, but optionally as a fax machine as
well. Press the {Copy} key to use functions, or press the {Fax} key to use facsimile functions.
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
1
Copy Mode
Copy
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
Fax
Facsimile Mode
ND0X02EE
Limitation
❒ You cannot switch modes in any of the following cases:
• When scanning in a fax message for transmission.
• During immediate transmission.
• When accessing the user tools.
• During interrupt copying.
19
BASICS
ORIGINALS
Sizes And Weights Of Recommended Originals
1
❖ Metric version
Where original is set
Exposure glass
Document feeder
Original Size
Up to A3
1-sided originals:
A3L – B6KL
2-sided originals:
A3L – A5KL
Thin Paper mode:
A3L – A5KL
Original Weight
-52 – 128 g/m2
52 – 105 g/m2
41 – 128 g/m2
❖ Inch versions
Where original is set
Exposure glass
Document feeder
Original Size
Up to 11" × 17"
1-sided originals: 11" ×
17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"KL
2-sided originals: 11" ×
17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"KL
Thin Paper mode: 11" ×
17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"KL
Original Weight
-14 – 34 lb
14 – 28 lb
11 – 34 lb
Non-recommended originals for the document feeder
Setting the following originals in the document feeder might cause paper misfeeds or damage to the originals. Set these originals on the exposure glass.
• Originals other than those specified in ⇒ P.20 “Sizes And Weights Of Recommended Originals”
• Stapled or clipped originals
• Perforated or torn originals
• Curled, folded, or creased originals
• Pasted originals
• Originals with any kind of coating, such as thermal fax paper, art paper, aluminum foil, carbon paper, or conductive paper
• Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts
• Sticky originals such as translucent paper
• Thin original that has low stiffness
20
ORIGINALS
• Originals of inappropriate weight ⇒ P.20 “Sizes And Weights Of Recommended
Originals”
• Bound originals such as books
• Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper
1
Sizes Difficult To Detect
It is difficult for the machine to detect the sizes of the following originals, so select the paper size manually.
• Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts
• Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper
• Dark originals with many letters and drawings
• Originals which partially contain solid image
• Originals which have solid image at their edges
• Originals other than those (with ❍) in the table below. See ⇒ P.21 “Sizes detectable by the Auto Paper Select”.
Sizes detectable by the Auto Paper Select
❖ Metric version
Size A3 B4 A4
B5
A5 11 " × 81/2" × 81/2" ×
51/2" × 81/2" ×
17"L
L
L
KL
KL
KL
1
Place of
14"L 11"KL 8 /2"KL 13"L
*1
original
Exposure
glass
❍
❍
❍
❍
×
×
×
×
×
❍
Document
feeder
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
×
❍
×
❍
*1
You can select from 81/2" × 13", 81/4" × 13" and 8" × 13" using the user tool (system
settings). See "24. <F/F4> Size Setting" in the System Settings.
❖ Inch version
Size A3 B4 A4
B5
A5 11 " × 81/2" × 81/2" ×
51/2" × 81/2" ×
17"L
L
L
KL
KL
KL
1
Place of
14"L 11"KL 8 /2"KL 13"L
*1
original
Exposure
glass
×
×
×
×
×
❍
❍
❍
×
×
Document
feeder
×
×
❍
×
×
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
*1
You can select from 81/2" × 13", 81/4" × 13" and 8" × 13" using the user tool (system
settings). See "24. <F/F4> Size Setting" in the System Settings.
21
BASICS
Original Sizes And Scanning Area/Missing Image Area
❖ Exposure glass
1
Reference
position
A3
Horizontal size
Vertical size
Maximum Scanning area
A3
(297x420mm)
11"x17"
(279x432mm)
A4 A3
CP01AEE
❖ Document feeder
Horizontal size
Vertical size
Maximum Scanning area
(297x432mm)
A4 A3
CP02AEE
Limitation
❒ Even if you correctly set originals in the document feeder or on the exposure
glass, 3 mm margins on all four sides might not be copied.
22
COPY PAPER
COPY PAPER
Recommended Paper Sizes And Types
1
The following limitations apply to each tray:
Metric version Inch version
Paper weight
Paper
capacity
Paper tray
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL,
64 – 105 g/m2, 500 sheets
A5L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 20 – 28 lb
81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"L,
71/4" × 101/2"L, 8" × 13"L,
81/2" × 13"L, 81/4" × 13"L
Paper tray unit
Note
❒ You have to specify paper
size using the user tools. See
⇒ P.132 “Changing The Paper
Size”.
(option)
Bypass
tray
Standard
size
A3L, A4L,
A5L, 81/2" ×
13"L
A3L,
52 – 157 g/m2,
11" × 17"L,
16 – 42 lb
81/2" × 14"L,
81/2" × 11"L,
51/2" × 81/2"L
50 sheets (52
– 90 g/m2, 16
– 20 lb),
25 sheets (91
– 157 g/m2,
20 – 42 lb)
Non-stan- Vertical: 100 –
dard size 297 mm
*1
Vertical: 4.0" – 52 – 157 g/m2, 1 sheet
11.7"
16 – 42 lb
Horizontal: 148 Horizontal:
– 432 mm
6.0" – 17.0"
Postcards, adhesive labels,
translucent paper
Large capacity tray
(option)
*1
A4K
81/2" × 11"K
64 – 105 g/m2, 1,500 sheets
20 – 28 lb
When you set non-standard size paper in the bypass tray, you have to specify the
size. See ⇒ P.55 “Copying From The Bypass Tray”.
Important
❒ If you use damp or curled paper, a misfeed might occur. In such a case, try
turning over the paper stack in the paper tray. If there is no improvement,
change to copy paper with less curl.
23
BASICS
Note
❒ When you use the bypass tray, it is recommended to set the copy paper direction to L.
❒ Post cards should be fed from the bypass tray.
❒ If you load paper of the same size and in the same direction in two or more
trays, the machine automatically shifts to another tray when the tray in use
runs out of paper. This function is called Auto Tray Switch. (If you put recycled paper or special paper in paper trays using the Special Paper Indicate
menu, this function is not available to these trays unless their settings are
identical.) This saves interrupting a copy run to replenish paper even when
you make a large number of copies. You can cancel this setting. See “13. Auto
Tray Switch” and “14. Sp. Paper Ind.” of the System Settings.
1
Reference
If you want to add paper, see ⇒ P.119 “B Loading Paper”.
If you want to change the paper size, see ⇒ P.132 “Changing The Paper Size”.
24
COPY PAPER
Non-recommended Paper
R CAUTION:
• Do not reuse stapled paper. Do not use aluminum foil, carbon-
1
containing paper or other conductive paper. Otherwise, a fire
might occur.
Important
❒ Do not use paper with any kind of coating such as:
• Thermal fax paper
• Art paper
• Aluminum foil
• Carbon paper
• Conductive paper
Otherwise, a fault might occur.
❒ Do not use copy paper that has been already copied on. Otherwise, a fault
might occur.
Note
❒ Do not use the following type of paper because a paper misfeed might occur.
• Bent, folded, or creased paper
• Torn paper
• Slippery paper
• Perforated paper
• Rough paper
• Thin paper that has low stiffness
• Paper with much paper dust on its surface
❒ If you make a copy on rough grain paper, the copy image might be blurred.
❒ Do not use paper which has been copied or printed on.
25
BASICS
Paper Storage
Note
❒ When storing paper, the following precautions should always be followed:
• Do not store paper where it will be exposed to direct sunlight.
• Avoid storing paper in humid areas (humidity: 70 % or less).
• Store on a flat surface.
❒ Keep open reams of papers in the package, and store as you would unopened
paper.
❒ Under high temperature and high humidity, or low temperature and low humidity conditions, store papers in a vinyl bag.
1
26
TONER
TONER
Handling Toner
1
R WARNING:
• Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust
might ignite when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of the
used toner containers according to local regulations for
plastics.
R CAUTION:
• Do not eat or swallow toner.
• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of reach of
children.
R CAUTION:
• This machine has been tested for safety using this supplier's
parts and consumables. We recommend you only use these
specified supplies.
Important
❒ If you use toner other than that recommended, a fault might occur.
Reference
If you want to add toner, see ⇒ P.121 “D Adding Toner”.
Toner Storage
Note
❒ When storing toner, the following precautions should always be followed:
• Store toner containers in a cool, dry place free from direct sunlight.
• Do not store toner where it will be exposed to heat.
• Do not eat or swallow toner, and keep it out of reach of children.
• Store on a flat surface.
Used Toner
Note
❒ Used toner cannot be re-used.
27
BASICS
1
28
2. COPYING
BASIC PROCEDURE
Note
❒ As default, Type 1 with the duplex
unit, Type 2, and Type 3 are initially in Duplex mode (1-sided → 2sided). You can cancel Duplex
mode by pressing the {Duplex} key.
You can also change the default
value. See “10. Duplex Priority” in
⇒ P.153 “1. General Features 3/4”.
A When the machine is set for user
code, enter the user code with the
{Number} keys and then press the
{#} key.
Reference
See ⇒ P.63 “User Codes”.
B Make sure that the machine is in
Copy mode.
F Enter
the number of copies required with the {Number} keys.
eed Dial
n Hook Dial
ause /
edial
1
2
3
ABC
DEF
4
5
6
GHI
JKL
7
8
PRS
TUV
Clear / Stop
C
Start
9
WXY
Enter
one
0
OPER
ND2R02EE
Note
❒ The maximum copy quantity
can be set between 1 and 999
(default: 999). See “05. 0D[ï
&RS\ý4öW\” in ⇒ P.152 “1. General Features 2/4”.
❒ To change the number entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key and
enter the new number.
G Press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ If not, press the {Copy} key.
C Make sure that there are no previous settings remaining.
Note
❒ To clear settings, press the
{Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key.
D Set your originals.
The machine starts copying.
Note
❒ To stop the machine during the
multi-copy run, press the {Clear/
Stop} key.
❒ To return the machine to the initial condition after copying,
press the {Clear Modes/Energy
Saver} key.
Reference
See ⇒ P.31 “Setting Originals”.
E Set your desired settings.
ëä
COPYING
-Auto Reset
The machine returns to its initial condition automatically after your job is
finished, after a certain period of
time. This function is called “Auto
Reset”.
2
Note
❒ You can change the Auto Reset
time. See “11. Auto Reset” in ⇒
P.153 “1. General Features 3/4”.
- Auto Off
The machine turns itself off automatically after your job is finished, after a
certain period of time. This function is
called “Auto Off”.
Note
❒ You can change the Auto Off time.
See “10. Auto Off Timer" in the
System Settings.
❒ You can change the default settings for basic functions. See ⇒
P.150 “Settings You Can Change
With The User Tools” and “USER
TOOLS (SYSTEM SETTINGS)” in
the System Settings.
êí
SETTING ORIGINALS
SETTING ORIGINALS
Limitation
❒ Set the original after correction fluid and ink has completely dried.
Not taking this precaution could
mark the exposure glass and cause
marks to be copied.
Note
❒ Basically the originals should be
aligned to the rear left corner.
However, some copy functions
may produce different results depending on the direction of the
originals. For details, see explanations of each function.
Originals
Set in the
document
feeder
Set on the
exposure
glass
Setting Originals On The
Exposure Glass
A Lift the platen cover or the docu-
2
ment feeder.
Note
❒ Be sure to open the platen cover
or the document feeder by more
than 30°, otherwise the original
size might not be detected correctly.
B Set the original face down on the
exposure glass. The original
should be aligned to the rear left
corner.
1
R
R
set1EE
2
ND1C01EE
R
R
1: Reference mark
2: Scale
set2EE
C Lower the platen cover or the document feeder.
Reference
See ⇒ P.20 “Originals”.
êì
COPYING
Setting a stack of originals in the
document feeder
Setting Originals In The
Document Feeder
Note
❒ Do not stack originals above the
limit mark.
2
❒ When copying thin originals (41 –
52 g/m2, 11 – 14 lb), select [DF Setting] and set to Thin Paper mode,
or set your originals on the exposure glass to avoid damage due to
a multi-sheet feed (if several sheets
are fed together at the same time).
See ⇒ P.35 “Thin paper mode”.
❒ The original might become dirty if
it is written with a pencil or similar
tools.
❒ For 1-sided originals, you can select the ADF tray or the ADF external tray as an output tray. See “22.
ADF Orig. Ejection” in the System
Settings.
1
2
A Adjust the guide to the original
size.
B Set the aligned originals face up
into the document feeder.
1
2
ND1D01EE
1: Limit mark
2: Document guide
Note
❒ To avoid a multi-sheet feed,
shuffle the originals before setting them in the document feeder.
When SADF mode is selected
ND1D04EE
1: ADF tray
2: ADF external tray
❒ Copying or scanning speed might
be a little reduced if the ADF tray is
selected as an output tray.
Reference
Regarding originals that the document feeder can handle, see ⇒ P.20
“Originals”.
êë
Reference
See ⇒ P.33 “SADF mode”.
A Set one original face up into the
document feeder. Then, press the
{Start} key.
The Auto Feed indicator is lit.
B Set
the next original while the
Auto Feed indicator is lit.
SETTING ORIGINALS
The second and subsequent originals can be fed automatically without pressing the {Start} key.
Using SADF, Mixed Sized, and
Thin Paper modes
SADF mode
If you set one original at a time in the
document feeder, the second and subsequent originals can be fed automatically without pressing the {Start}
key.
2
ND1D0201
Note
❒ You can adjust the time the machine waits before being ready
for the next original. See “SADF
Auto Reset” in ⇒ P.160 “3. Input/Output 1/2”.
Limitation
❒ Copying or scanning speed might
be a little reduced.
A Press the {Menu} key.
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
Copy
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
Fax
ND2L0203
B Press the [↓↓Next] key until [DF Setting] is displayed.
ND2C0102
êê
COPYING
C Select [DF Setting] with the <>
keys, then press the [Select] key.
Mixed sizes mode
Limitation
❒ The weight of originals that can be
set with this function is 52 – 81 g/
m2, 14 – 20 lb.
❒ The paper sizes that can be set with
this function are as follows:
2
ND2C0109
D Press the [Select] key.
ND2C0104
Note
❒ To deselect [SADF], press the
[Select] key again.
E Press the [Exit] key.
Metric version
B5 – A3
Inch version
51/2" × 81/2" – 11"
× 17"
❒ You can set originals of two different sizes at a time.
❒ Copying speed and scanning
speed will be reduced.
❒ For smaller originals, the copy image might be slanted since the originals might not be correctly
aligned with the original guide.
A Press the {Menu} key.
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
Copy
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
Fax
ND2L0203
ND2C0103
B Press the [↓↓Next] key until [DF Setting] is displayed.
ND2C0102
êé
SETTING ORIGINALS
C Select [DF Setting] with the <>
keys, then press the [Select] key.
B4 A3
1
CP19AEE
ND2C0109
D Select [Mixed Sizes] with the <>
keys, then press the [Select] key.
2
1: Set into the document feeder
(ADF).
Important
❒ If the originals are of different
vertical sizes, put the longer
original on the bottom; otherwise the original size might not
be detected correctly.
G Adjust
the guide to the widest
original size.
ND2C0109
H Set the aligned originals face up
into the document feeder.
Note
❒ To deselect [Mixed Sizes], press
the [Select] key again.
E Press the [Exit] key.
Thin paper mode
Note
❒ Set to Thin Paper mode when you
place thin paper into the document
feeder; otherwise your originals
may be damaged.
A Press the {Menu} key.
ND2C0103
F Align the rear and left edges of
the originals as shown in the illustration.
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
Copy
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
Fax
ND2L0203
êè
COPYING
B Press the [↓↓Next] key until [DF Setting] is displayed.
2
ND2C0102
C Select [DF Setting] with the <>
keys, then press the [Select] key.
ND2C0109
D Select [Thin Paper] with the <>
keys, then press the [Select] key.
ND2C0109
Note
❒ To deselect [Thin Paper], press
the [Select] key again.
E Press the [Exit] key.
ND2C0103
êç
BASIC FUNCTIONS
BASIC FUNCTIONS
The following basic functions are explained in this section.
❖ Adjusting Copy Image Density
Auto and Manual Image Density
❖ Enhanced Image Copy
This function provides clearer
copy image.
❖ Selecting Original Type Setting
Text, Text·Photo, Photo, Copied
original, Low density original
❖ Selecting Copy Paper
Auto Paper Select and Manual Paper Select
❖ Auto Reduce/Enlarge
The machine can choose an appropriate reproduction ratio based on
the paper and original sizes you select.
Note
❒ You can select functions to be activated when Auto Reset is turned
on, when Energy Saver is turned
off, or after the machine is powered on. See ⇒ P.150 “1. General
Features 1/4”.
❒ You can change default settings for
basic functions. See ⇒ P.150 “Settings You Can Change With The User
Tools”.
Adjusting Copy Image Density
You can adjust the copy image density to match your originals.
There are three types in this function:
2
❖ Auto Image Density
The machine automatically adjusts
the image density.
❖ Manual Image Density
If you require darker or lighter
copies, adjust the image density
yourself.
❖ Combined Auto and Manual Image
Density
Use when copying originals with a
dirty background (such as newspapers). You can adjust the foreground density while leaving the
background unchanged.
Reference
You can change the density level
with the user tools. See “12. Density Pattern” in ⇒ P.153 “1. General
Features 3/4”.
A Select
one of Image Density
modes.
Auto Image Density
A Make sure that the Auto Image
Density indicator is lit.
Text . Photo
Photo
Special Orig.
Lighter
Darker
Auto Image Density
ND2C0201
Note
❒ If not, press the {Auto Image
Density} key.
êæ
COPYING
Manual Image Density
Enhanced Image Copy
A Press the {Auto Image Density}
key to cancel it.
B Press the {Lighter} or {Darker}
key to adjust the image density.
2
Text . Photo
Photo
Special Orig.
Lighter
Darker
Auto Image Density
This function reproduces copies of
better image quality. It is useful when
copying detailed originals such as
maps.
This function is turned on automatically if you have the optional copier
hard disk.
ND2C0202
Combined Auto and Manual
Image Density
A Make sure that the Auto Image
Density indicator is lit.
B Press the {Lighter} or {Darker}
key to adjust the density.
Text . Photo
Photo
Special Orig.
Lighter
Darker
Auto Image Density
ND2C0202
Limitation
❒ The optional copier hard disk is required to use this image enhanced
feature with the following functions:
• Rotate Copy
• Sort/Stack/Staple
• Combine Copy
• Double Copy
• Sort involving cover/slip sheets
• Double Copy
• Repeat Copy
Note
❒ Copying speed decreases from the
normal speed as follows. However, the copying speed remains unchanged with the optional copier
hard disk.
Type 1, Type 2 35 → 30 copies/min
Type3
45 → 40 copies/min
for A4K, 81/2" × 11"K
êå
BASIC FUNCTIONS
A Press the {Enhanced Image} key.
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
Selecting Original Type
Setting
Copy
Select one of the following types to
match your originals:
Fax
❖ Text
Select this mode when your originals contain only letters (no pictures).
2
ND2L0201
❖ Text·Photo
Select Text·Photo when your originals contains photographs or pictures with letters.
❖ Photo
Delicate tones of photographs and
pictures can be reproduced with
this mode.
❖ Special original (Copied original)
If your originals are copies (generation copies), the copy image can
be reproduced sharply and clearly.
To use this mode, activate the Enhanced Image Copy function first.
❖ Special original (Low density original)
Select this mode for originals that
have lighter lines written in pencil,
or for faint copied slips. The faint
lines will be clearly copied.
To use this mode, activate the Enhanced Image Copy function first.
If you do not select any mode, your
originals will be scanned with the settings suitable for text originals (Text
mode).
A Press the {Original Type} key and
select the original type.
Text . Photo
Photo
Special Orig.
Lighter
Darker
Auto Image Density
ND2C0203
êä
COPYING
Note
❒ Press the {Original Type} key to
step through the following
types:
2
No indicator lit
Text
Top indicator lit
Text·Photo
Center indicator
lit
Photo
Bottom indicator
lit
Special Original
Selecting Copy Paper
There are two ways to select copy paper:
❖ Auto Paper Select
The machine selects a suitable size
of copy paper automatically based
on the original size and the reproduction ratio.
❒ To use Special Original mode,
press the {Enhanced Image} key
first.
Special Original
A Select [Copied Orig.] or [Low
Dens. Orig.] with the <> keys,
then press the [OK] key.
Note
❒ When the original is set at a different direction from the copy
paper in the paper tray with
Auto Tray Switch mode ON, the
machine automatically rotates
the original image by 90° to
match the copy paper direction.
This applies to the following paper sizes:
Metric version
A4 KL, B5 KL
Inch version
81/2" × 11" KL
Reference
For Auto Tray Switch, see “13.
Auto Tray Switch” in the System Settings.
ND2C0109
❖ Manual Paper Select
You can select the desired copy paper size manually. You can also select the bypass tray.
Reference
See ⇒ P.55 “Copying From The
Bypass Tray”.
Note
❒ When you use Auto Paper Select,
refer to the following table for possible copy paper sizes and directions. (if the ratio is 100 %)
éí
BASIC FUNCTIONS
❖ Metric version
Where original
is set
Paper size and direction
Exposure glass
A3 L, B4 L, A4
KL, B5 KL, 81/2"
× 13" L *1
Document feeder A3 L, B4 L, A4
KL, B5 KL, A5
KL, 11" × 17" L,
81/2" × 11" KL, 81/2"
× 13"L *1
*1
You can select from 81/2" × 13",
81/4" × 13" and 8" × 13" using the
user tool (system settings). See "24.
<F/F4> Size Setting" in the System
Settings.
A Select the copy paper.
Auto Paper Select
A Make sure that the Auto (Auto
Paper Select) is selected.
2
Manual Paper Select
A Select the paper tray or bypass
tray by pressing the [Paper] or
<>keys.
❖ Inch version
Where original
is set
Paper size and direction
Exposure glass
11" × 17" L, 81/2" ×
14" L, 81/2" ×
11"KL
ND2C0109
Document feeder A4 KL, 11" × 17"
L, 81/2" × 14" L,
81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2"
× 81/2" KL, 81/2" ×
13" L *1
*1
You can select from 81/2" × 13",
81/4" × 13" and 8" × 13" using the
user tool (system settings). See "24.
<F/F4> Size Setting" in the System
Settings.
❒ For some originals, the original
size might not be detected correctly. See ⇒ P.21 “Sizes Difficult To
Detect”.
❒ When you set special paper, such
as recycled paper, in the paper
tray, you can have the kind of paper shown on the display. See “14.
Sp. Paper Ind.” of the System Settings.
éì
COPYING
Auto Reduce/Enlarge—Having
The Machine Choose The
Reproduction Ratios
The machine can choose an appropriate reproduction ratio based on the
paper and original sizes you select.
2
Note
❒ When you use Auto Reduce/Enlarge, refer to the following table
for possible original sizes and directions:
❖ Metric version
Where original is set
Original size and direction
Exposure
glass
Document
feeder
A3 L, B4 L, A4 KL, B5 KL,
Document
feeder
A4 KL, 11" × 17" L, 81/2" ×
14" L, 81/2" × 11" KL, 51/2" ×
81/2"KL, 81/2" × 13"L *1
*1
You can select from 81/2" × 13",
81/4" × 13" and 8" × 13" using the
user tool (System Settings). See
“24. <F/F4>Size Setting” in the
System Settings.
❒ The reproduction ratios the machine will select are as follows:
• Type 1, Type 2
Metric version: 25 – 400 %
Inch version: 25 – 400 %
• Type 3
Metric version: 35 – 400 %
Inch version: 32 – 400 %
❒ For some originals, the original size
might not be detected correctly. See
⇒ P.21 “Sizes Difficult To Detect”.
❒ You can set originals of different
sizes in the document feeder at a
time. See ⇒ P.34 “Mixed sizes mode”.
A Press the {Auto Reduce/Enlarge} key.
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
81/2" × 13" L *1
A3 L, B4 L, A4 KL, B5 KL,
A5 KL, 11" × 17" L, 81/2" ×
11" KL, 81/2" × 13" L *1
*1
Where original is set
Original size and direction
You can select from 81/2" × 13",
81/4" × 13" and 8" × 13" using the
user tool (System Settings). See
“24. <F/F4>Size Setting” in the
System Settings.
❖ Inch version
Copy
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
Fax
ND2L0202
B Select the paper tray by pressing
the [Paper] or <>.
Where original is set
Original size and direction
Exposure
glass
11" × 17" L, 81/2" × 14" L,
81/2" × 11" KL
ND2C0109
éë
SORT/STACK/STAPLE
SORT/STACK/STAPLE
Type 1 requires the optional 8 MB copier memory unit to use these functions.
The machine can scan your originals
into memory and automatically sort
the copies.
❖ Sort
• Sort
• Rotate Sort
• Shift Sort
(the optional finisher required)
❖ Stack
• Rotate Stack
• Shift Stack
(the optional finisher required)
❖ Staple (the optional 1000-sheet finisher required)
• Top 2
❖ Staple (the optional 3000-sheet finisher required)
• Top 1
❖ Punch (the optional 3000-sheet finisher and punch kit required)
• Makes punch holes in combination with Sort/Stack/Staple.
2
Limitation
❒ The optional 3000-sheet finisher
and punch kit are for Type 3 only.
❒ You cannot use the bypass tray
with this function.
Note
❒ The maximum tray capacity is as
follows. When the number of copies exceeds the tray capacity, remove copies from the tray.
❖ Metric version
Internal tray 1 • B4 or larger: 250
sheets (80 g/m2)
• A4 or smaller: 500
sheets (80 g/m2)
Internal tray 2 125 sheets (80 g/m2)
External tray
125 sheets (80 g/m2)
1000-sheet fin- • B4 or larger: 500
isher
sheets (80 g/m2)
• Top 2
• Top 3
• A4 or smaller: 1,000
sheets (80 g/m2)
3000-sheet fin- • Except A4: 1,500
isher (without
sheets (80 g/m2)
punch)
• A4: 3,000 sheets (80
g/m2)
• Double
éê
COPYING
❖ Inch version
Internal tray 1 • 81/2" × 14" or larger:
250 sheets (20 lb)
• 81/2" × 11" or smaller: 500 sheets (20 lb)
Internal tray 2 125 sheets (20 lb)
2
External tray
125 sheets (20 lb)
1000-sheet fin- • 81/2" × 14" or larger:
isher
500 sheets (20 lb)
• 81/2" × 11" or smaller: 1,000 sheets (20
lb)
-Punching (Type 3 only, the
optional 3000-sheet finisher
and punch kit required)
You can make punch holes in combination with Sort/Stack/Staple.
Limitation
❒ You cannot make punch holes
with Rotate Sort or Rotate Stack.
Note
❒ Originals orientation and punch
holes position are as follows:
3000-sheet fin- • Except 81/2" × 11":
isher (without
1,500 sheets (20 lb)
punch)
• 81/2" × 11": 3,000
sheets (20 lb)
❒ The maximum tray capacity might
be less than the above when you
use the Rotate Sort, Punch, or Staple function.
❒ The maximum tray capacity might
also be reduced when copy paper
is considerably curled.
Original setting
Exposure
glass
Punch
hole posiAuto Doction
ument
Feeder
K
L
Reference
If the punch waste box is full, see
⇒ P.144 “y Removing Punch
Waste”.
For the size and thickness (paper
weight) of paper to which punching is applicable, see ⇒ P.182
“Punch Kit (Option)”.
éé
SORT/STACK/STAPLE
Sort—Sorting Into Sets (123,
123, 123)
Copies can be assembled as sets in sequential order.
❖ Sort
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
the finisher provides this function
by sliding from side to side.
Note
❒ To switch among Sort, Rotate Sort,
and Shift Sort modes, access the
user tools. See “6. Sort” in ⇒ P.162
“3. Input/Output 2/2”.
❒ The paper sizes that can be used in
Sort function are as follows:
Metric version
A3LB4LA4KL
B5KLA5L
Inch version
11" × 17" L, 81/2" ×
14" L, 11" × 81/2"
KL, 51/2" × 81/2"
L
3
❖ Rotate Sort
2
❒ The paper sizes that can be used in
Rotate Sort function are as follows:
3
2
3
1
3
1
2
2
1
1
2
3
❖ Shift Sort
2
3
123
123 123
1
There are three types in the Sort function:
❖ Sort
Copies can be assembled as sets in
sequential order.
❖ Rotate Sort
Every other copy set is rotated by
90°KL and delivered to the copy
tray.
❖ Shift Sort (optional finisher required)
Every other copy set is shifted for
ease of separation. The shift tray of
Metric version
A4KLB5KL
Inch version
81/2" × 11"KL
❒ To use the Rotate Sort function,
two paper trays identical in size
and different in direction (K L)
are required.
❒ The paper sizes that can be used in
Shift Sort function are as follows:
1000-sheet
finisher
3000-sheet
finisher
Metric A3L, B4L,
A3L, B4L,
version A4KL, B5K A4KL,
B5KL
Inch
11" × 17" L,
version 81/2" × 14" L,
81/2" × 11"
KL
11" × 17" L,
81/2" × 14" L,
81/2" × 11"
KL
Reference
For the paper capacity of the optional finisher, see ⇒ P.49 “Staple”.
éè
COPYING
A Press
the {Sorter} key until the
Sort indicator (top) is lit.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
2
Enhanced
the number of copy sets
with the {Number} keys.
Limitation
❒ The maximum number of sets is
999.
2-Sided
Staple
D Enter
User Tools / Counter
E Set your originals.
Auto Reduce/
ND2L0101
B To make punch holes, press the
[Punch] key.
ND2C0101
Limitation
❒ The optional 3000-sheet finisher
and punch kit are required to
use this function (Type 3 only).
❒ You cannot make punch holes
with Rotate Sort.
Note
❒ If you do not make punch holes,
go to Step D.
C Make
sure that [ON] is selected,
then press the [OK] key.
When setting a stack of originals
in the document feeder
A Set a stack of originals in the
document feeder, then press
the {Start} key.
After all the originals are
scanned, the copies are delivered to the tray.
Note
❒ The last page should be on
the bottom.
❒ If an original is misfed during sorted copying, reset
your originals in the document feeder according to the
instruction on the display.
The display will indicate the
number of originals you
should return.
When setting an original on the
exposure glass or in the
document feeder
Reference
See ⇒ P.33 “SADF mode”
A Set the original, then press the
{Start} key.
ND2C0104
éç
Note
❒ Start with the first page to be
copied.
B Set the next original, then
press the {Start} key.
SORT/STACK/STAPLE
Note
❒ Set the original in the same
direction as the first one.
C After all originals are scanned,
press the {#} key.
The copies are delivered to the
tray.
Stack—Stacking Together All
Copies Of A Page (111, 222,
333)
Copies can be assembled with each
page set.
2
❖ Rotate Stack
3
1
1
3
2
1
2
2
2
1
3
3
❖ Shift Stack
2
3
222
111 333
1
There are two types in the Stack function:
❖ Rotate Stack
Every other page set is rotated
90°KL and delivered to the copy
tray.
❖ Shift Stack (optional finisher required)
Every other page set is shifted for
ease of separation. The shift tray of
the finisher provides this function
by sliding from side to side.
Note
❒ To select Rotate Stack or Shift Stack,
access the user tools. See “7. Stack”
in ⇒ P.162 “3. Input/Output 2/2”.
❒ The sizes that can be used in this
function are as follows:
éæ
COPYING
2
Metric version
A3LB4LA4KL
B5KLA5L
Inch version
11" × 17" L, 81/2" ×
14" L, 11" × 81/2"
KL, 51/2" × 81/2"
L
❒ The paper sizes that can be used in
the Rotate Stack function are as follows:
Metric version
A4KL, B5KL
Inch version
8 /2" × 11" KL
1
Limitation
❒ The optional 3000-sheet finisher
and punch kit are required to
use this function (Type 3 only).
❒ You cannot make punch holes
with Rotate Stack.
Note
❒ If you do not wish to make
punch holes, go to Step D.
C Make
sure that [ON] is selected.
Then, press the [OK] key.
❒ To use the Rotate Stack function,
two paper trays identical in size
and different in direction (KL)
are required.
Reference
For the maximum tray capacity of
the optional finisher, see ⇒ P.49
“Staple”.
A Press
the {Sorter} key until the
Stack indicator (bottom) is lit.
Sort
1-Sided
11
Staple
Book
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
D Enter the number of copies with
the {Number} keys.
E Set your originals.
When setting a stack of originals
in the document feeder
2
2-Sided
2
2-Sided
2
2
Enhanced
ND2C0104
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L0101
B To make punch holes, press the
[Punch] key.
A Set a stack of originals in the
document feeder, then press
the {Start} key.
After all the originals are
scanned, the copies are delivered to the tray.
Note
❒ The last page should be on
the bottom.
ND2C0101
éå
SORT/STACK/STAPLE
When setting an original on the
exposure glass or in the
document feeder
Reference
See ⇒ P.33 “SADF mode”
Staple
The optional finisher is required to use
this function.
Each copy set can be stapled together.
A Set the original, then press the
{Start} key.
2
Note
❒ Start with the first page to be
copied.
B Set the next original, then
press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ Set the original in the same
direction as the first one.
C After all originals are scanned,
press the {#} key.
The copies are delivered to the
tray.
Limitation
❒ You cannot use the following paper in this function:
• Post cards
• Translucent paper
• OHP transparencies
• Adhesive labels
• Curled paper
• Low stiffness paper
Note
❒ For this mode, the following limitation apply. When the number of
copies exceeds the tray capacity,
copying stops. In this case, remove
the copies from the shift tray and
then resume copying.
éä
COPYING
❖ Metric version
2
1000-sheet
finisher
3000-sheet
finisher
Paper
size
A3L, B4L,
A4KL,
B5K
A3L, B4L,
A4KL,
B5KL
Stapler
capacity
• A4 or
• A4 or
smaller:
smaller:
50 sheets
30 sheets
(80 g/m2)
(80 g/m2)
• B4 or
• B4 or
larger: 20
larger: 30
sheets (80
sheets (80
g/m2)
g/m2)
(without
punch)
Shift tray 1,000 sheets
capacity (80 g/m2)
(A4K)
3,000 sheets
(80 g/m2)
❖ Inch version
1000-sheet
finisher
3000-sheet
finisher
Paper
size
11" × 17"L,
81/2" ×
14"L, 81/2"
× 11"KL
11" × 17"L,
81/2" ×
14"L, 81/2"
× 11"KL
Stapler
capacity
• 81/2" ×
11" or
smaller:
30 sheets
(20 lb)
• 81/2" ×
11" or
smaller:
50 sheets
(20 lb)
• 81/2" ×
• 81/2" ×
14" or
14" or
larger: 20
larger: 30
sheets (20
sheets (20
lb)
lb)
(without
punch)
Shift tray
capacity
(81/2" ×
11"K)
èí
1,000 sheets
(20 lb)
3,000 sheets
(20 lb)
❒ In the following cases, the copies
will be delivered to the shift tray
without stapling.
• When the number of copies for
one set is over the stapler capacity.
• When memory reaches 0 % during copying.
• When “Add Staple” is displayed during copying.
❒ When you select Staple, Sort mode
is automatically selected.
Reference
If you want to add staples, see ⇒
P.134 “d Adding Staples”.
When staple is jammed, see ⇒ P.139
“e Removing Jammed Staples”.
SORT/STACK/STAPLE
-Stapling position and original
setting
❖ 1000-sheet finisher
When your machine is equipped
with the 1000-sheet finisher, the
stapling position will be fixed to
‘Top 2’.
Exposure
glass
Document
Feeder
Exposure
glass
Stapling
position
K
L
2
L
Top2
K
L
K
Top3
Note
❒ Original images are not rotated.
❒ To staple in combination with
Combine: 2 pages → 1-sided or
4 pages → 2-sided, or with Double Copies, select L paper for
K originals, or select K paper
for L originals.
Document
Feeder
Stapling
position
K
L
K
Double
Top2
Original setting
Top1
Original setting
❖ 3000-sheet finisher
When your machine is equipped
with the 3000-sheet finisher, stapling positions when there is copy
paper that is identical in size and
direction as your original are as
follows:
L
èì
COPYING
Note
❒ You cannot change stapling positions during copying.
❒ When the original image is rotated, the stapling direction
turns by 90°.
❒ When you select 1 staple mode
(Top or Bottom), the paper of
which size is the same but the
direction is different from the
originals.
❒ The maximum original image
size that can be rotated is as follows:
2
Metric version
A4
Inch version
81/2" × 11"
A Press
the {Sorter} key until the
Sort (top) and Staple (center)
indicators are lit.
1-Sided
11
ND2C0105
Note
❒ When
your
machine
is
equipped with the 1000-sheet
finisher, this display is not
available. Go to Step E.
[Punch] key.
ND2C0101
Note
❒ If you do not wish to make
punch holes, go to Step D.
D Press the [OK] key.
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
tions.
C To make punch holes, press the
❒ The copy image can not be rotated if you select [Top 2] or
[Double].
❒ To staple at the Top 2 or Double
position in combination with
Combine: 2 pages → 1-sided or
4 pages → 2-sided, or with Double Copies, select L paper for
K originals, or select K paper
for L originals.
Sort
B Select one of four stapling posi-
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2C0104
ND2L0101
E Enter
the number of copy sets
with the {Number} keys.
F Set your originals.
èë
SORT/STACK/STAPLE
When setting a stack of originals
in the document feeder
A Set a stack of originals in the
document feeder, then press
the {Start} key.
After all the originals are
scanned, the copies are delivered to the tray.
To resume scanning
A Press the [No] key.
Scanning is resumed.
2
Note
❒ The last page should be on
the bottom.
When setting an original on the
exposure glass or in the
document feeder
Reference
See ⇒ P.33 “SADF mode”
A Set the original, then press the
{Start} key.
ND2C0103
Note
❒ Scanned images in memory
are not cleared.
To clear scanned images of the
originals
A Press the [Yes] key.
Scanning is stopped with the
images cleared.
Note
❒ Start with the first page to be
copied.
B Set the next original, then
press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ Set the original in the same
direction as the first one.
C After all originals are scanned,
press the {#} key.
The copies are delivered to the
tray.
To stop scanning
When you are using the Sort, Stack, or
Staple function, the originals are
scanned into memory.
A Press the {Clear/Stop} key.
ND2C0104
When memory reaches 0 %
Scanning will be stopped if the size of
scanned image data exceeds memory
capacity.
Note
❒ There is enough memory to store
approximate 50 originals of A4
size. (Type 1 requires the optional
8 MB copier memory unit.)
èê
COPYING
❒ See ⇒ P.187 “Copier Hard Disk (Image Enhance Kit)” for the number of
originals that can be stored with
the optional copier hard disk.
Reference
Scanning will stop when memory
reaches 0 % during sorted copying.
However, you can change this setting so that all the scanned pages
are copied and delivered to the
tray first, then the machine automatically continues scanning the
remaining originals. See “8.
Mem.full-AutoStrt” in ⇒ P.162 “3.
Input/Output 2/2”.
2
A Press the {Start} key.
The scanned pages are delivered to
the tray. Then, the image data in
memory is cleared.
B Remove the copies and continue
copying by following the instructions on the display.
èé
COPYING FROM THE BYPASS TRAY
COPYING FROM THE BYPASS TRAY
To use this function on Type 1, the optional bypass tray is required.
Use the bypass tray to copy onto OHP
transparencies, adhesive labels, translucent paper, post cards, and copy paper that cannot be set in the paper
tray.
B Open the bypass tray.
2
Limitation
❒ You cannot use the bypass tray for
the Duplex function.
Note
❒ The machine can automatically detect the following sizes as standard
size copy papers:
Metric version A3L, A4 L, A5L,
81/2" × 13"L
Inch version
A3L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2"
× 14"L, 81/2" × 11"L,
51/2" × 81/2"L
❒ If you do not use the standard size
copy paper, you should input vertical and horizontal dimensions.
The sizes that you can input are as
follows:
ND6H0300
C Adjust the guides to copy paper
size.
Important
❒ If the guides are not flush with
the copy paper, a skew image or
paper misfeeds might occur.
D Lightly insert the copy paper face
down until the beeper sounds.
The k indicator on the display is
automatically selected.
Metric version • Vertical: 100 – 297
mm
Inch version
1
• Horizontal: 148 –
432 mm
• Vertical: 4.0" – 11.7"
2
• Horizontal: 6.0" –
17.0"
3
4
ND6H04EE
Reference
For details about paper capacity of
the bypass tray, see ⇒ P.23 “Copy
Paper”.
A If Duplex mode is selected, press
1: Horizontal size
2: Vertical size
3: Extender
4: Paper guide
the {Duplex} key to cancel the
mode.
èè
COPYING
Note
❒ Do not stack paper over the limit mark; otherwise a skew image
or paper misfeeds might occur.
❒ If the beeper is turned off, lightly insert the copy paper until it
stops. See “Settings You Can
Change With The User Tools”
in the System Settings.
❒ When the platen cover is open,
set the direction of the copy paper to L.
❒ Swing out the extender to support larger size copy paper larger than A4L, 81/2" × 11"L.
❒ Fan paper to get air between the
sheets and avoid a multi-sheet
feed.
2
When copying onto non-standard
size copy paper
Important
❒ You should specify the size of
copy paper to avoid paper misfeeds.
A Make sure the k indicator is
selected.
D Press the [OK] key.
ND2C0104
E Enter the vertical size of the paper with the {Number} keys,
then press the {#} key.
Note
❒ To change the number entered, press the {Clear/Stop}
key and enter the new number.
F Enter the horizontal size of the
paper with the {Number} keys,
then press the [OK] key.
ND2C0104
Note
❒ To change the number entered, press the {Clear/Stop}
key and enter the new number.
❒ When you specify the paper
size, !appears on the display to indicate bypass tray
copying.
B Press the {#} key.
C Press the [Ppr. Size] key.
ND2C0101
èç
COPYING FROM THE BYPASS TRAY
E Select the desired size with the
<> keys, then press the [OK]
key.
G Press the [Exit] key.
2
ND2C0104
ND2C0109
When copying onto standard size
copy paper
A Make sure the k indicator is
selected.
ND2C0109
B Press the {#} key.
C Press the [Ppr. Size] key.
ND2C0109
F Press the [Exit] key.
ND2C0101
D Press the [↓
↓Next] key until your
desired size is displayed.
ND2C0104
E Set your originals, then press the
{Start} key.
ND2C0102
èæ
COPYING
When copying onto OHP
transparencies or thick paper
To make copies onto OHP transparencies or thick paper, you need to
specify the paper type.
2
❒ To avoid paper misfeeds, shuffle a stack of paper before setting it in the tray.
D Press the {#} key.
E Press the [Ppr. Type] key.
Note
❒ Select [Thick Paper] if the paper
weight is more than 91 g/m2 (20
lb).
A If Duplex mode is selected, press
the {Duplex} key to cancel the
mode.
B Open the bypass tray, and adjust
the guides to the paper size.
ND2C0102
F Select [OHP] or [Thick Paper] with
the <> keys. Then, press the
[OK] key.
Important
❒ If the guides are not flush with
the copy paper, a skew image or
paper misfeeds might occur.
C Lightly insert the OHP transpar-
encies or thick paper face down
until the beeper sounds.
The kindicator on the display is
automatically selected.
ND2C0109
G Press the [Exit] key.
ND2C0104
ND5H05EE
Note
❒ When you set a OHP transparencies, make sure that its front
and back faces are properly positioned.
èå
Reference
To go on to specify a paper size,
press the [Ppr. Size] key.
See ⇒ P.56 “When copying onto
non-standard size copy paperӕ
See ⇒ P.57 “When copying onto
standard size copy paper”.
COPYING FROM THE BYPASS TRAY
H Set your originals and press the
{Start} key.
Important
❒ When copying onto OHP transparencies, remove copied sheets
one by one.
2
èä
COPYING
PROGRAM—STORING YOUR COPY
SETTINGS IN MEMORY
You can store frequently used copy
job settings in machine memory, and
recall them for future use.
2
C Press the [Store] key.
❖ Storing Your Settings
You can store your settings you
frequently use.
❖ Deleting A Program
You can delete a stored program.
❖ Recalling A Program
You can recall a stored program.
Note
❒ You can store up to ten programs.
❒ Paper settings are stored based on
paper size. So if you place more
than one paper tray of a same size,
the paper tray prioritized with the
user tools will be selected first. See
“12. Pap.Tray Priority” of the System Settings.
❒ Programs are not cleared by turning the power off or by pressing
the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key.
They are canceled only when you
delete or overwrite them with another program.
Storing Your Settings
A Edit the copy settings so that all
functions you want to store in this
program are selected.
B Press the {Program} key.
Program
eed Dial
çí
Clear Modes /
Energy Saver
1
2
Interrupt
C
3
ND2R01EE
ND2C0101
D Select
the program number you
want to store these settings in
with the <> keys. Then, press
the [OK] key.
When the settings are successfully
stored, the m indicator appears.
ND2C0109
Note
❒ Program numbers with m already have settings in them.
❒ If this program number is already being used, the machine
will ask you if you wish to overwrite it - press the [Yes] or [No]
key.
PROGRAM—STORING YOUR COPY SETTINGS IN MEMORY
E To delete another program, repeat
Deleting A Program
steps C and D.
F Press the [Exit] key.
You can delete a stored program.
A Press the {Program} key.
Program
eed Dial
Clear Modes /
Energy Saver
1
2
Interrupt
C
3
2
ND2R01EE
B Press the [Delete] key.
ND2C0103
ND2C0102
C Select
the program number you
want to delete with the <> keys.
Then press the [OK] key.
ND2C0109
D Press the [Yes] key.
ND2C0103
Note
❒ To cancel the deletion, press the
[No] key.
çì
COPYING
Recalling A Program
You can recall a stored program.
A Press the {Program} key.
Program
2
eed Dial
Clear Modes /
Energy Saver
1
2
Interrupt
C
3
ND2R01EE
B Select
the program number you
want to recall with the <> keys.
Then, press the [OK] key.
The stored settings are displayed.
ND2C0109
Note
❒ Only programs with m contain
a program.
C Set your originals, then press the
{Start} key.
çë
OTHER FUNCTIONS
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Energy Saver Mode—Saving
Energy
If you do not operate the machine for
a certain period after copying, or
when you press and hold the {Clear
Modes/Energy Saver} key for more than
one second, the display disappears
and the machine enters Energy Saver
mode. When you press the {Clear
Modes/Energy Sever} key again, when
the originals are set in the document
feeder, or when the platen cover or
document feeder is opened, the machine returns to the ready condition.
In Energy Saver mode, the machine
uses less electricity.
The Energy Saver mode makes a twostep reduction in electricity: one for
the period up to the time set for Low
Power mode, the other for the period
after that time.
Note
❒ The period for which the machine
remains in Energy Saver mode (i.e.
the period until the mode is turned
off to return to the ready condition) varies with the effectiveness
of energy saving.
❒ If you press the {Clear Modes/Energy
Saver} key during the operation,
the current settings will be cleared.
Reference
See “8. Low Power Timer” of the
System Settings.
Interrupt—Temporarily
Stopping One Job To Copy
Something Else
2
You can make urgently needed copies
during a multi-copy run.
A Press the {Interrupt} key.
The key indicator lights.
B Remove
the originals currently
set for copying, and set your originals for interrupt copying. Make
your copies.
C After
interrupt copying, remove
the originals for interrupt copying and the copies.
D Press the {Interrupt} key again.
The key indicator goes off.
E Reset
the previous originals.
Then, press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ The previous copy settings are
recalled and the previous copy
job can be resumed by pressing
the {Start} key.
User Codes
If the machine is set to use the User
Code function, operators must input
their user codes before the machine
can be operated. The machine keeps
count of the number of copies made
under each user code.
Note
❒ When the machine is set for user
codes, the machine will prompt
çê
COPYING
you for your user codes after the
operation switch is on or the Auto
Reset comes into effect.
❒ To prevent others from making
copies using your user code, press
the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} and
{Clear/Stop} keys simultaneously
after copying.
2
Reference
For setting user codes, see ⇒ P.154
“1. General Features 4/4”.
Auto Start—Entering Copy
Job Settings During The
Warm-up Period
If you press the {Start} key during the
warm-up period, the {Start} key will
blink, and your copies will be made
as soon as warm-up finishes.
A Make
any adjustments to copy
settings during the warm-up period.
B Set your originals.
C Press the {Start} key.
The {Start} key indicator alternately flashes red and green.
Note
❒ To cancel Auto Start, press the
{Clear/Stop} key.
çé
Original Beeper
The beeper sounds and an error message is displayed when you leave
your originals on the exposure glass
for about two seconds after copying.
Note
❒ To cancel this function, see “06.
Original beeper” in ⇒ P.152 “1.
General Features 2/4”.
PRESET REDUCE/ENLARGE—REDUCING AND ENLARGING USING PRESET RATIOS
PRESET REDUCE/ENLARGE—REDUCING
AND ENLARGING USING PRESET RATIOS
You can select a preset ratio for copying.
❖ Metric version
Ratio (%)
Note
❒ You can select one of 12 present ratios (5 enlargement ratios, 7 reduction ratios).
❒ You can change the preset ratios to
other ratios you frequently use. See
“08. Reproduction Ratio” in⇒
P.152 “1. General Features 2/4”.
❒ You can select a ratio regardless of
the size of an original or copy paper. With some ratios, parts of the
image might not be copied or margins will appear on copies.
❒ Copies can be reduced or enlarged
as follows:
Original → Copy paper
size
400 (enlarge
area by 16)
--
200 (enlarge
area by 4)
A5→Α3
141 (enlarge
area by 2)
A4→Α3, Α5→Α4
122
F→Α3, Α4→Β4
115
B4→Α3
93
A little reduced.
87
A3→Β4
82
F→Α4, Β4→F
71 (reduce
area by 1/2)
A3→Α4, Α4→A5
65
A3→F
50 (reduce
area by 1/4)
A3→Α5, F→Α5
35 *1
--
25 *2
--
*1
*2
2
Type 3 only
Type 1 and Type 2 only
çè
COPYING
❖ Inch version
Ratio(%)
Original → Copy paper
size
400 (enlarge -area by 16)
2
200 (enlarge
area by 4)
51/2" × 81/2"→11" × 17"
155 (enlarge
area by 2)
51/2" × 81/2"→81/2" × 14"
129
81/2" × 11"→11" × 17"
121
81/2" × 14"→11" × 17"
93
A little reduced.
85
F→81/2" × 11"
78
81/2" × 14"→81/2" × 11"
73
11" × 14"→81/2" × 11"
65
11" × 17"→81/2" × 11"
50 (reduce
area by 1/4)
11" × 17"→51/2" × 81/2"
32 *1
--
*2
--
25
*1
*2
Type 3 only
Type 1 and Type 2 only
A Press the [Enlarge] or [Reduce] key
to select a ratio.
ND2C0110
Note
❒ Another preset ratio is displayed every time you press the
key.
çç
B Set your originals, then press the
{Start} key.
ZOOM—REDUCING AND ENLARGING IN 1 % STEPS
ZOOM—REDUCING AND ENLARGING IN 1
% STEPS
You can change the reproduction ratio in 1 % steps.
A Press the {Zoom} key.
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
2
Copy
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
Fax
ND2L0204
Note
❒ The following ratios can be selected:
• Type 1, Type 2
Metric version: 25 – 400 %
Inch version: 25 – 400 %
• Type 3
Metric version: 35 – 400 %
Inch version: 32 – 400 %
❒ You can select a ratio regardless of
the size of an original or copy paper. With some ratios, parts of the
image might not be copied or margins will appear on copies.
❒ You can select a preset ratio which
is near the desired ratio, then press
the {Zoom} key and adjust the ratio
with the [n] or [o] key.
B Enter the ratio.
When using the [n] or [o] key
A Enter the desired reproduction
ratios with the [o] or [n] key.
ND2C0100
Note
❒ To change the ratio in 1 %
steps, just press the [n] or
[o] key. To change the ratio
in 10 % steps, press and hold
down the [n] or[o] key.
When using the {Number} keys
A Enter the desired ratio with the
{Number} keys.
çæ
COPYING
Note
❒ To change the ratio entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key
and enter the new ratio.
C Set your originals, then press the
{Start} key.
2
çå
DIRECTIONAL SIZE MAGNIFICATION (INCH)—STRETCHING AND SQUEEZING THE
IMAGE INTO THE COPY AREA
DIRECTIONAL SIZE MAGNIFICATION
(INCH)—STRETCHING AND SQUEEZING THE
IMAGE INTO THE COPY AREA
The suitable reproduction ratios will
be automatically selected when you
enter the horizontal and vertical
lengths of the original and copy image you want.
Preparation
Specify the vertical and horizontal
sizes of the original and those of the
copy, as shown in the illustration.
1
of the image might not be copied
or blank margins will appear on
copies.
2
A Press the {Menu} key.
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
Copy
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
3
Fax
ND2L0203
2
4
B Press the [Select] key.
CP2M01EE
1: Horizontal original size
2: Vertical original size
3: Horizontal copy size
4: Vertical copy size
Note
❒ You can enter sizes within the following ranges:
Metric version
1 – 999 mm (in 1
mm steps)
Inch version
0.1" – 99.9" (in 0.1"
steps)
❒ If the calculated ratio is over the
maximum or under the minimum
ratio, it is corrected within the
range of the ratio automatically.
However, with some ratios, parts
ND2C0104
C Enter the vertical size of the origi-
nal with the {Number} keys. Then,
press the {#} or > key.
Note
❒ To change the value entered:
• If you have not pressed the
{#} key yet, press the {Clear/
Stop} key and enter the new
value.
çä
COPYING
• If you have already pressed
the {#} key, select the
[Orig.:Vrt.] with the <> keys
and enter the new value.
D Enter the vertical size of the copy
with the {Number} keys. Then,
press the {#} or >key.
2
E Enter
the horizontal size of the
original with the {Number} keys.
Then, press the {#} or >key.
F Enter
the horizontal size of the
copy with the {Number} keys.
Then, press the [OK] key.
G Set your originals, then press the
{Start} key.
æí
DIRECTIONAL MAGNIFICATION (%)—STRETCHING AND SQUEEZING THE IMAGE IN
1 % STEPS
DIRECTIONAL MAGNIFICATION (%)—
STRETCHING AND SQUEEZING THE IMAGE
IN 1 % STEPS
Copies can be reduced or enlarged at
different reproduction ratios horizontally and vertically.
A Press the {Menu} key.
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
2
Copy
a%
b%
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
Fax
ND2L0203
B Select the [Direct Mag. (%)] key with
CP2P01EE
< or > keys. Then, press the [Select] key.
1: Horizontal %
2: Vertical %
Note
❒ The following ratios can be selected:
• Type 1, Type 2
Metric version: 25 – 400 %
Inch version: 25 – 400 %
• Type 3
Metric version: 35 – 400 %
Inch version: 32 – 400 %
❒ You can select a ratio regardless of
the size of an original or copy paper. With some ratios, parts of the
image might not be copied or
blank margins will appear on copies.
ND2C0109
C Enter
the desired vertical ratio
with the {Number} keys. Then,
press the {#} key or the > key.
æì
COPYING
D Enter the desired horizontal ratio
with the {Number} keys. Then,
press the [OK] key.
2
ND2C0104
Note
❒ To change the number entered,
press the {#} key or the <>
keys, then enter the new number.
E Set your originals, then press the
{Start} key.
æë
MARGIN ADJUSTMENT—ADJUSTING THE MARGIN
MARGIN ADJUSTMENT—ADJUSTING THE
MARGIN
You can shift the image either left or
right to make a binding margin.
A Press the {Menu} key.
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
2
Copy
A
Menu
A
Zoom
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
Fax
ND2L0203
Limitation
❒ If you set too wide margin, areas
you do not want to delete might be
erased.
B Select the [Margin Adjust.] with the
<> keys. Then, press the [Select]
key.
Note
❒ You can change the width of the
binding margin as follows:
Metric version
0 – 30 mm (in 1
mm steps)
Inch version
0" – 1.0" (in 0.1"
steps)
❒ The margin width default is as follows. You can change this default
setting with the user tools. See “3.
Marg.Adjust.Front” in ⇒ P.155 “2.
Adjust Image 1/2”.
Metric version
C Select [Left] (left margin) or [Right]
(right margin) with the <> keys.
• Front: 5 mm
Left
• Back: 5 mm
Right
Inch version
ND2C0109
• Front: 0.2" Left
• Back: 0.2" Right
ND2C0105
D Enter
the desired margin width
with the {Number} keys.
Note
❒ To change the value entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key and
enter the new value.
æê
COPYING
E To specify a binding margin for
back pages, press the [Back] key.
2
ND2C0101
Note
❒ You can specify the back margin
only when the Duplex or the
Two-Sided copy with Combine
is selected.
❒ If you do not need to specify the
back margin, press the [OK] key
and go to Step Hï
F Select [Left] (left margin) or [Right]
(right margin) with the <> keys.
ND2C0105
G Enter
the desired margin width
the {Number} keys. Then, press
the [OK] key.
H Set your originals, then press the
{Start} key.
æé
ERASE CENTER/BORDER—ERASING THE CENTER AND THE BORDER
ERASE CENTER/BORDER—ERASING THE
CENTER AND THE BORDER
This function erases the center and/
or all four sides of the original image,
such as book originals.
B
A
10 mm
Inch version
0.4"
2
❒ The position of the margin to be
erased is determined according to
the original size and reproduction
ratio.
❖ Erase Center
A
Metric version
B
L copy paper
K copy paper
CenterEE
❖ Erase Border
A
B
A
B
1
3~50mm
1
BorderEE
There are two types in this function:
❖ Center
This mode erases the center margin of the original image.
1: Erased part
❒ You can use the Erase Center and
Erase Border functions together.
❖ Border
This mode erases the surrounding
area of the original image.
A Press the {Menu} key.
Note
❒ You can change the width of the
erased margin as follows:
Metric version
Inch version
3 – 50 mm (in 1
mm steps)
0.1" – 2.0" (in 0.1"
steps)
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
Copy
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
Fax
ND2L0203
❒ The default setting of the erased
margin is as follows. You can
change this settings with the user
tools. See “1. Erase Border” and “2.
Erase Center” in ⇒ P.155 “2. Adjust
Image 1/2”.
æè
COPYING
B Select the [Erase Ctr./Bdr.] with the
C Press the [Exit] key.
<> keys. Then, press the [Select]
key.
2
ND2C0104
ND2C0109
C Select the part to be erased.
Border
A Press the [Border] key.
Center
A Press the [Center] key.
ND2C0102
B Enter the border width with
the {Number} keys. Then press
the [OK] key.
ND2C0101
B Enter the center width with the
{Number} keys. Then press the
[OK] key.
ND2C0104
ND2C0104
Note
❒ To change the value entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key
and enter the new value.
æç
Note
❒ To change the value entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key
and enter the new value.
ERASE CENTER/BORDER—ERASING THE CENTER AND THE BORDER
C Press the [Exit] key.
2
ND2C0104
D Set your originals, then press the
{Start} key.
ææ
COPYING
COMBINE—COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO
ONE COPY
The optional document feeder is required to use this function.
You can make 1 sheet of copies from 2
or more one-sided originals.
2
❖ 16 pages→booklet
12
❖ 2 pages→1-sided
9 12 5
15
1 2
2
8
1
4 13 16 1
16
1
2 15 14 3
6 11 10 7
Combine1
2
Combine4
❖ 4 pages→1-sided, 4 pages→2-sided
12
3
4
1
2
3
4
1: Front
2: Back
There are five types in this function.
1
2
4
3
Combine2
❖ 8 pages→2-sided
12
7
8
1
2
5
3
4
7
1
6
8
2
Combine3
æå
❖ 2 pages→1-sided
This mode makes two facing pages
on one-sided copy.
❖ 4 pages→1-sided
4 one-sided pages are copied on to
1 one-sided sheet.
❖ 4 pages→2-sided (Type 1 requires the
optional 8 MB copier memory unit and
duplex unit.)
4 one-sided paper are copied onto
1 two-sided sheet, 2 original images on each side.
❖ 8 pages→2-sided (Type 1 requires the
optional 8 MB copier memory unit and
duplex unit.)
8 one-sided pages are copied on to
1 two-sided sheet, 4 original images on each side.
COMBINE—COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO ONE COPY
❖ 16 pages→booklet (Type 1 requires
the optional 8 MB copier memory unit
and duplex unit.)
This mode makes a booklet copy of
16 pages from 16 one-sided originals.
Setting Originals (Originals set in the
document feeder)
• Originals reading from left to right
1 2
3 4
1
2
3
4
Combine5
• Originals reading from top to bottom
2
1
4
3
4 3
2 1
Combine6
Limitation
❒ You cannot use this function in
Duplex mode.
❒ You cannot use the bypass tray
with this function.
❒ The machine cannot copy originals
different in size and direction.
Note
❒ The number of originals copied
(combined) can be 2, 4, 8, or 16.
❒ In this mode, the machine selects
the reproduction ratio automatically. This reproduction ratio depends on the copy paper sizes and
the number of originals.
❒ The machine uses ratios in the following range:
• Type 1, Type 2
Metric version: 25 – 400 %
Inch version: 25 – 400 %
• Type 3
Metric version: 35 – 400 %
Inch version: 32 – 400 %
❒ If the calculated ratio is under the
minimum ratio, it is corrected
within the range of the ratio automatically. However, with some ratios, parts of the image might not
be copied or blank margins appear
on copies.
❒ Separation line between originals
can be printed with the user tools.
See “6. Combine Copy” in⇒ P.157
“2. Adjust Image 2/2”.
❒ Even if the direction of originals is
different from that of the copy paper, the machine will automatically rotate the image by 90° to make
copies properly.
❒ You can make copies even if the
number of originals is less than the
number required in the selected
mode. You can also disable this
function with the user tools. See “2.
Comb. Auto Eject” in ⇒ P.160 “3.
Input/Output 1/2”.
❒ When the number of originals
placed is less than the number
specified for combining, the last
page (s) will be copied blank as
shown in the illustration.
12
3
1
2
2
3
æä
COPYING
❒ In the 4 pages→2-sided mode or 8
pages→2-sided mode, you can
specify the orientation of originals
([Top to Top][Top to Bottom]). See ⇒
P.88 “Specifying Orientation of
Bound Originals”.
E Select the desired combine modes
with the <> keys. Then, press
the [OK] key.
A If Duplex mode is selected, press
2
the {Duplex} key to cancel the
mode.
B Press the {Menu} key.
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
ND2C0109
F Press the [Exit] key.
G Press the [Paper] key or <> keys
Copy
to select the copy paper.
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
H Set your originals, then press the
Fax
{Start} key.
ND2L0203
C Press
the [↓
↓Next] key until the
[Combine] is displayed.
ND2C0102
D Press the [Select] key.
When setting an original on the
exposure glass or in the
document feeder
A Set the original, then press the
{Start} key.
Note
❒ Start with the first page to be
copied.
B Set the next original, then
press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ To finish copying, press the
{#} key to eject the copy.
When setting a stack of originals
in the document feeder
ND2C0104
A Set your originals, then press
the {Start} key.
Note
❒ The last page should be on
the bottom.
åí
COMBINE—COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO ONE COPY
- Making a booklet
If you want to make a booklet from 16
originals, fold copies as shown in the
illustration.
2
8
1
6
9
16
16
1
5
9
1
3
åì
COPYING
SERIES COPIES—MAKING ONE-SIDED
COPIES FROM VARIOUS ORIGINALS
You can make one-sided copies from
two facing pages of bound (book)
originals and from two-sided originals.
There are two types in this function:
2
Original
Copy paper
A3L
A4K × 2 sheets
B4L
B5K × 2 sheets
❖ Book → 1-Sided
You can make one-sided copies
from two facing pages of a bound
original (book).
A4L
A5K × 2 sheets
Original
Copy paper
❖ 2-Sided → 1-Sided (The optional document feeder is required.)
You can make one-sided copies
from two-sided originals.
11" × 17"L
81/2" × 11"K × 2
sheets
81/2" × 11"L
51/2" × 81/2"K × 2
sheets
Limitation
❒ You cannot use this function in
Duplex mode.
Book → 1-Sided—Making
One-sided Copies From Two
Facing Page Of A Bound
Original (Book)
1
2
1
2
Note
❒ Refer to the following table when
you select original and copy paper
sizes with 100 % ratio:
åë
❖ Metric version
❖ Inch version
A If Duplex mode is selected, press
the {Duplex} key to cancel the
mode.
B Press the {Menu} key.
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
Copy
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
Fax
ND2L0203
SERIES COPIES—MAKING ONE-SIDED COPIES FROM VARIOUS ORIGINALS
C Press the [↓↓Next] key until [Series]
is displayed.
Without the optional document
feeder
A Press the [OK] key.
2
ND2C0102
D Select [Series] with the <> keys.
Then, press the [Select] key.
ND2C0104
E Set your originals, then press the
{Start} key.
ND2C0109
With the optional document
feeder
A Select the [Book → 1-Sided] with
the <> keys. Then, press the
[OK] key.
ND2C0109
åê
COPYING
2-Sided→1-Sided—Making
One-sided Copies From Twosided Originals
D Select [Series] with the <> keys.
Then, press the [Select] key.
The optional document feeder is required
to use this function.
2
ND2C0109
E Press the [OK] key.
1
1
2
2
A If Duplex mode is selected, press
the {Duplex} key to cancel the
mode.
B Press the {Menu} key.
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
Copy
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
Fax
ND2L0203
C Press the [↓↓Next] key until [Series]
is displayed.
ND2C0102
åé
ND2C0104
F Set your originals, then press the
{Start} key.
DUPLEX—MAKING TWO-SIDED COPIES
DUPLEX—MAKING TWO-SIDED COPIES
Type 1 requires the optional duplex unit, interchange unit, and 8 MB copier memory
unit is required to use this function.
There are three ways in this function:
❖ 1-sided → 2-sided
This mode makes two-sided copies
from one-sided originals.
❖ Book → 2-sided
This mode makes two-sided copies
from facing pages of a bound original (book).
Inch version
Minimum
size
51/2" × 81/2"
Weight
20 – 28 lb
2
❒ When you make 2-sided copies on
B4, 81/2" × 14" or larger copy paper, open the right side cover. Also
open the bypass tray, if installed.
❖ 2-sided → 2-sided
This mode makes two-sided copies
from two-sided originals.
Limitation
❒ You cannot use the following copy
paper in this function:
• Paper smaller than A5, 51/2" ×
81/2"
• Translucent paper
• Adhesive labels
• OHP transparencies
• Post cards
❒ You cannot use the bypass tray
with this function.
❒ The optional copier hard disk is required to make enhanced-image
copies.
ND6H0200
Note
❒ The following paper limitations
apply:
Metric version
Minimum
size
A5
Weight
64 – 105 g/
m2
åè
Chapter2 Page 86 Tuesday, May 19, 1998 1:58 PM
COPYING
1-Sided → 2-Sided—Making
Two-sided Copies From Onesided Originals
2
1
2
-Originals and copy direction
You can select the orientation ([Top to
Top], [Top to Bottom]). See ⇒ P.88
“Specifying Orientation of Bound Originals”.
• Top to Top
1
2
Duplex1
• Top to Bottom
Note
❒ If you set an odd number of 1-sided originals in the document feeder (ADF), the reverse side of the
last page is left blank. You can disable this function to make the delivered last page not be blank. See
“1. Duplex Auto Eject” in ⇒ P.160
“3. Input/Output 1/2”.
❒ When original images are copied,
the images are shifted by a width
of binding margin. You can adjust
the binding margin or binding position. You can also change their
default values. See “4. Margin Adjust Back” in ⇒ P.155 “2. Adjust Image 1/2”.
86
Duplex2
DUPLEX—MAKING TWO-SIDED COPIES
*1
-Original direction and
completed copies
The resulting copy image will differ
according to the direction in which
you set your original (lengthwise K
or widthwise L).
Original
Orientation Result *1
• [Top to
Top]
The illustrations show the directions
of copied images on the front and
back, not the directions of delivery.
A Press the {Duplex} key until the 1-
Sided→2-Sided indicator (top)
is lit.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
2
2-Sided
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L0102
B Set your originals.
ABC
Duplex5
ABC
Duplex9
• [Top to
Bottom]
Reference
See ⇒ P.33 “SADF mode”
Duplex3
ABC
A Set the original, then press the
{Start} key.
Duplex6
Duplex10
• [Top to
Top]
A
B
Duplex11
Duplex7
A
When setting an original on the
exposure glass or in the
document feeder
B
• [Top to
Bottom]
Note
❒ Start with the first page to be
copied.
B Set the next original, then
press the {Start} key.
When setting a stack of originals
in the document feeder
A Set your originals, then press
the {Start} key.
Note
❒ The last page should be on
the bottom.
Duplex4
A
B
Duplex12
Duplex8
åæ
COPYING
D Select
the desired orientation
with the <>keys. Then, press
the [OK] key.
Specifying Orientation of Bound
Originals
You can specify the orientation of
bound originals (how you turn the
pages). The default setting is [Top to
Top].
2
A Press the {Menu} key.
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
ND2C0109
Copy
Menu
Zoom
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
Fax
ND2L0203
B Press the [↓↓Next] key until [Orientation] is displayed.
ND2C0102
C Select
the [Orientation] with the
<> keys. Then press the [Select]
key.
ND2C0109
åå
DUPLEX—MAKING TWO-SIDED COPIES
Book → 2-Sided—Making
Two-Sided Copies From
Facing Pages Of A Bound
Original (Book)
A Press
the {Duplex} key until the
Book→2-Sided indicator (center) is lit.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
2
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L0102
1
2
B Set your originals.
1
2
When setting an original on the
exposure glass or in the
document feeder
Note
❒ Refer to the following table when
you select original and copy paper
sizes with 100 % ratio:
❖ Metric version
Original
Copy paper
A3L
A4 (2-sided)
B4L
B5 (2-sided)
A4L
A5 (2-sided)
A Set the original, then press the
{Start} key.
Note
❒ Start with the first page to be
copied.
B Set the next original, then
press the {Start} key.
When setting a stack of originals
in the document feeder
A Set your originals, then press
the {Start} key.
❖ Inch version
Original
Copy paper
11" × 17"L
81/2" × 11" (2-sided)
81/2" × 11"L
51/2" × 81/2" (2-sided)
Note
❒ The last page should be on
the bottom.
åä
COPYING
2-Sided → 2-Sided—Making
Two-sided Copies From Twosided Originals
When setting a stack of originals
in the document feeder
A Set your originals, then press
the {Start} key.
Note
❒ The last page should be on
the bottom.
2
1
1
2
2
A Press the {Duplex} key until the 2-
Sided→2-Sided indicator (bottom) is lit.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L0102
B Set your originals.
When setting an original on the
exposure glass or in the
document feeder
A Set the original, then press the
{Start} key.
Note
❒ Start with the first page to be
copied.
B Set the next original, then
press the {Start} key.
äí
COVER/PAPER DESIGNATE—ADDING OR INSERTING SHEETS
COVER/PAPER DESIGNATE—ADDING OR
INSERTING SHEETS
In this function, you can add or insert
cover or paper designate.
There are three types in this function:
❖ Front Cover (Type 1 requires the optional bypass tray)
The first page of your originals is
copied on a specific paper sheets
for covers.
❖ Both Covers (Type 1 requires the optional bypass tray)
The first and last pages of your
originals are copied on specific paper sheets for covers.
❖ Paper Designate
Any specified page of your originals is copied on specific paper
sheets for slip sheet.
Front Cover—Copying Or
Adding A Front Cover
The first page of your originals is copied on a specific paper sheets for covers.
❖ Copy
1
2
3
1
2
3
❖ Blank
Note
❒ The cover or slip sheets should be
identical in size and direction with
the copy paper.
❒ If Blank Cover mode is selected,
the cover will not be counted as a
copy.
2
Type 1 requires the optional bypass tray
to use this function.
1
2
3
1
2
3
Note
❒ The optional 8 MB copier memory
unit is required to make 2 or more
sets of copies on Type 1.
❒ You can specify whether to make a
copy on a sheet for covers. If you
select [Copy], the first page will be
copied on the cover sheet. If you
select [Blank], a cover sheet will just
be inserted before the first copy.
äì
COPYING
A Press the {Menu} key.
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
E Specify whether to copy on a cover sheet with the <> keys. Then,
press the [OK] key.
Copy
2
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
Fax
ND2L0203
B Press the [↓↓Next] key until [Cover/
Ppr.Des.] is displayed.
ND2C0109
F Press the [Exit] key.
C Press the [Select] key.
ND2C0104
G Set
cover sheets on the bypass
tray.
H Set your originals, then press the
{Start} key.
ND2C0104
D Press the [Front] key.
ND2C0101
äë
COVER/PAPER DESIGNATE—ADDING OR INSERTING SHEETS
A Press the {Menu} key.
Both Covers—Copying Or
Adding Front And Back
Covers
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
Copy
Type 1 requires the optional bypass tray
to use this function.
The first and last pages of your originals are copied on specific paper
sheets for covers.
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
Fax
2
ND2L0203
B Press the [↓↓Next] key until [Cover/
❖ Copy
Ppr. Des.] is displayed.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
❖ Blank
ND2C0102
C Press the [Select] key.
1
2
3
1
2
3
Note
❒ You can specify whether to make a
copy on a cover sheet. If you select
[Copy], the first and last pages will
be copied on the cover sheets. If
you select [Blank], a cover sheet
will just be inserted before the first
copy and another sheet after the
last copy.
ND2C0104
D Press the [Both] key.
ND2C0102
äê
COPYING
E Specify whether to copy on a cov-
er sheet with the <> keys. Then,
press the [OK] key.
Paper Designate—Copying
Designated Pages Of Originals
Onto Slip Sheets
Any specified page of your originals
is copied on specific paper sheets for
slip sheet.
2
ND2C0109
F Press the [Exit] key.
10
10
5
5
1
ND2C0104
G Set
cover sheets on the bypass
tray.
H Set your originals, then press the
{Start} key.
1
Note
❒ You can specify up to 10 page
numbers.
❒ Before using this function, set the
special paper tray for slip sheets
using the user tools. See “09. Slip
Sheet Tray” in ⇒ P.153 “1. General
Features 3/4”.
A Press the {Menu} key.
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
Copy
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
Fax
ND2L0203
äé
COVER/PAPER DESIGNATE—ADDING OR INSERTING SHEETS
B Press the [↓↓Next] key until [Cover/
Ppr. Des.] is displayed.
Note
❒ To change the value entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key and
enter the new value.
F To specify another page number,
repeat Step E.
G When
ND2C0102
2
you finish specifying the
page number (s), press the [OK]
key.
C Press the [Select] key.
ND2C0104
ND2C0104
D Press the [Ppr. Des.] key.
Note
❒ To change the number entered,
select the desired item with the
<> keys, then enter the new
number.
H Press the [Exit] key.
ND2C0103
Note
❒ If your machine is not equipped
with the bypass tray, the display above does not appear. Go
to Step E.
E Enter the page number you want
ND2C0104
I Set your originals, then press the
{Start} key.
to copy onto a slip sheet with the
{Number} keys. Then, press the
{#} key.
äè
COPYING
OHP SLIP SHEET—COPYING OR INSERTING
SLIP SHEET
Type 1 requires the optional bypass tray.
Whenever a different original is copied in OHP Slip Sheet mode, a slip
sheet will be placed after each copy,
or a slip sheet will be fed and the
same original image is copied onto
this slip sheet.
2
A If Duplex mode is selected, press
the {Duplex} key to cancel the
mode.
B Press the {Menu} key.
❖ Copy
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
Copy
2
1
2
2
1
1
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
Fax
ND2L0203
C Press
❖ Blank
2
1
the [↓
↓Next] key until [OHP
Slip Sheet] is displayed.
12
Limitation
❒ You cannot use this function in
Duplex mode.
Note
❒ Set slip sheets of the same size and
in the same orientation as OHP
transparencies.
❒ You can specify whether to make
copies onto the inserted slip sheets.
❒ If you do not copy onto a slip sheet,
the sheet is excluded from the
number of copies counted.
äç
ND2C0102
D Select the [OHP Slip Sheet] with the
<> keys. Then, press the [Select]
key.
ND2C0109
OHP SLIP SHEET—COPYING OR INSERTING SLIP SHEET
E Specify whether to copy on a slip
sheet with the <> keys. Then,
press the [OK] key.
2
ND2C0109
F Set OHP transparencies in the bypass tray.
G Set
the slip sheets in the paper
tray, then select this tray pressing
the [Paper] key or the <> keys.
H Set your originals, then press the
{Start} key.
äæ
COPYING
POSITIVE/NEGATIVE—COPYING IN
COMPLEMENTALY COLORS
If you use a black and white original,
black and white areas of the original
are reversed.
2
C Press the [Select] key.
ND2C0104
D Set your originals, then press the
{Start} key.
A Press the {Menu} key.
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
Copy
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
Fax
ND2L0203
B Press the [↓↓Next] key until [Positive/Negative] is displayed.
ND2C0102
äå
IMAGE REPEAT—REPEATING AN IMAGE
IMAGE REPEAT—REPEATING AN IMAGE
You can copy the original image repeatedly, or make two copies of the
same image on one sheet.
There are two types in this function:
❖ Double Copies
The one original image is copied
twice on one copy.
❖ Image Repeat
The original image is copied repeatedly.
Double Copies—Copying The
Image Twice On One Page
The one original image is copied
twice on one copy as shown in the illustration.
❒ You cannot use the bypass tray for
the Double Copies function.
Note
❒ Two copy images appear vertically
on K paper for L originals, and
horizontally on L paper for K
originals.
❒ You can insert separate lines between repeated images. See “5.
Double Copy” in ⇒ P.157 “2. Adjust Image 2/2”.
❒ Refer to the following table when
you select original and copy paper
sizes with 100 % ratio:
2
❖ Metric version
Original size and
direction
Copy paper size
and direction
A5L
A4K
B6L
B5K
A4K
A3L
A5K
A4L
B6K
B5L
❖ Inch version
Limitation
❒ The following originals cannot be
detected properly on the exposure
glass. Be sure to select the copy paper manually or set the originals in
the optional document feeder.
Metric version
A5L, B6L
Inch version
51/2" × 81/2"L
Original size and
direction
Copy paper size
and direction
51/2" × 81/2"L
81/2" × 11"K
51/2" × 81/2"K
81/2" × 11"L
81/2" × 11"K
11" × 17"L
ää
COPYING
A Press the {Menu} key.
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
Image Repeat—Repeating An
Image Over The Entire Copy
Copy
2
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
The original image is copied repeatedly.
Fax
ND2L0203
B Press the [↓↓Next] key until [Image
Repeat] is displayed.
ND2C0102
C Select [Image Repeat] with the <>
keys. Then, press the [Select] key.
Note
❒ The number of repeated images
depends on the original size, copy
paper size, and reproduction ratio.
Refer to the following table.
❖ Original: 51/2" × 81/2"K/Copy
paper: 81/2" × 11"K or Original: 51/
1
1
2" × 8 /2"L/Copy paper 8 /2" ×
11"L
4 repeats (71 %)
16 repeats (35 %)
ND2C0109
D Press the [OK] key.
Repeat1
ND2C0104
E Set your originals, then press the
{Start} key.
ìíí
Repeat2
IMAGE REPEAT—REPEATING AN IMAGE
❖ Original: 51/2" × 81/2"K/Copy
paper: 81/2" × 11"L or Original: 51/
1
1
2" × 8 /2"L/Copy paper 8 /2" ×
11"K
2 repeats
(100 %)
8 repeats
(50 %)
C Press the [↓↓Next] key until [Image
Repeat] is displayed.
32 repeats
(25 %)
2
ND2C0102
D Select [Image Repeat] with the <>
keys. Then, press the [Select] key.
Repeat3
Repeat4
Repeat5
❒ Part of a repeated image might not
be copied depending on copy paper size, copy paper direction or
reproduction ratio.
❒ You can insert separate lines between repeated images. See “7. Image Repeat” in⇒ P.157 “2. Adjust
Image 2/2”.
ND2C0109
E Select [Image Repeat] with the <>
keys. Then, press the [OK] key.
A Select the size of the copy paper
and the reproduction ratio.
B Press the {Menu} key.
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
Copy
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
ND2C0109
F Set your original, then press the
Fax
{Start} key.
ND2L0203
ìíì
COPYING
ARCHIVE FILE—STORING THE IMAGES OF
YOUR ORIGINALS INTO MEMORY
The optional copier hard disk is required to use this function.
You can store images you frequently
use, and recall and copy them any
time.
There are four types in this function:
2
❖ Storing The Images
Stores image pages you frequently
use.
❖ Deleting The Stored Images
Deletes a set of image pages already stored.
❖ Printing A List Of The Stored Images
Makes a combined copy of each
first page of all the stored files (8
pages into one 1-sided, or 16 pages
into one 2-sided).
❖ Recalling The Stored Images
Recalls a set of stored image pages
and copies them onto the A4, 81/2"
× 11" copy paper.
Note
❒ The maximum capacity is 16 files
or 32 pages. If you store more than
two pages in one file, the maximum number of files might be less
than 16.
❒ Image pages to be stored should be
A4K, 81/2" × 11"Ksize.
❒ The functions that can be stored
are as follows:
• 1-sided copy or 2-sided copy
• Type of originals
• Image density
❒ Set your originals on the exposure
glass.
ìíë
❒ The stored images are not cleared
by turning the power off or by
pressing the {Clear Modes/Energy
Saver} key. They are canceled only
when you delete or overwrite
them.
ARCHIVE FILE—STORING THE IMAGES OF YOUR ORIGINALS INTO MEMORY
D Press the [Store] key.
Storing The Images
You can store images you frequently
use.
A Press the {Menu} key.
Enhanced
Image
2
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
ND2C0101
Copy
Menu
E Select the file number you want
Zoom
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
to store the images in with the
<> keys. Then, press the [OK]
key.
Fax
ND2L0203
B Press the [↓↓Next] key until [Archive
File] is displayed.
ND2C0109
Note
❒ File numbers with m already
have images in them.
ND2C0102
C Select [Archive File] with the <>
keys. Then, press the [Select] key.
To overwrite images already
stored
A Check the stored content, and
select whether to overwrite it.
ND2C0109
Note
❒ You can check the stored
content by printing a list of
the stored images. See ⇒
P.106 “Printing A List Of The
Stored Images”.
B Press the [Yes] key to overwrite
the images, or press the [No]
key not to overwrite them.
ìíê
COPYING
Note
❒ When you overwrite with another images, the previously
stored images will be lost.
H Press the [OK] key.
F Select the type of originals with
the <> keys. Then, press the
[OK] key.
2
ND2C0104
ND2C0109
Note
❒ If you are using Type 1 without
the duplex unit installed, the
display above does not appear.
Go to Step G.
G Set your originals on the exposure
glass, then press the {Start} key.
The images will be scanned.
Note
❒ If you have more than one original pages, repeat the steps
above.
❒ Start with the first page of your
originals.
1
CP138BEE
1: Reference position
ìíé
ARCHIVE FILE—STORING THE IMAGES OF YOUR ORIGINALS INTO MEMORY
Deleting The Stored Images
D Press the [Delete] key.
You can delete images already stored.
Note
❒ Images are deleted on a file basis.
A Press the {Menu} key.
2
ND2C0102
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
E Select the file number you want
Copy
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
to delete the images in with the
<> keys. Then, press the [OK]
key.
Fax
ND2L0203
B Press the [↓↓Next] key until [Archive
File] is displayed.
ND2C0109
F Press the [Yes] key.
ND2C0102
C Select [Archive File] with the <>
keys. Then, press the [Select] key.
ND2C0103
Note
❒ To cancel deletion, press the
[No] key.
G Press the [Exit] key.
ND2C0109
ND2C0103
ìíè
COPYING
Printing A List Of The Stored
Images
D Press the [List] key.
You can make a combined copy of
each first page of all the stored files (8
pages into one 1-sided, or 16 pages
into one 2-sided).
2
Note
❒ If any file number has nothing
stored, its page will be copied in
blank with no image or number.
A Press the {Menu} key.
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
ND2C0103
E Select
the [8pages→1sided] or
[16pages→2sided] with the <>
keys.
Copy
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
Fax
ND2C0105
ND2L0203
B Press the [↓↓Next] key until [Archive
File] is displayed.
ND2C0102
C Select [Archive File] with the <>
keys. Then, press the [Select] key.
ND2C0109
ìíç
Note
❒ [16pages→2sided] is not available, if your machine is Type 1
without the duplex unit.
F Press the {Start} key.
ARCHIVE FILE—STORING THE IMAGES OF YOUR ORIGINALS INTO MEMORY
Recalling The Stored Images
D Select
the desired file number
with the <> keys.
You can recall stored images to copy
them onto A4, 81/2" × 11" paper.
Note
❒ Copies are made on a file basis.
2
A Press the {Menu} key.
ND2C0105
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
Note
❒ Only files with m contain images.
Copy
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
Fax
E Enter the number of copies with
the {Number} keys.
ND2L0203
B Press the [↓↓Next] key until the [Archive File] is displayed.
Note
❒ The maximum number of copies is 99.
F Press the {Start} key.
ND2C0102
C Select
the [Archive File] with the
<> keys. Then, press the [Select]
key.
ND2C0109
ìíæ
COPYING
COMBINATION CHART
The combination chart given below shows which modes can be used together.
When you read the chart, please refer to the following table.
2
✩
means that these modes can be used together.
→
means that these modes cannot be used together. The mode
after you select will be the mode you're working in.
×
means that these modes cannot be used together. The mode
before you select will be the mode you're working in.
The following shows the combinations of functions.
ìíå
Image Repeat
Cover/Page Designate
Duplex
Series Copies
Combine
Directional Magnification (%)
Directional Size Magnification (inch)
Preset Reduce/Enlarge
Copying From The Bypass Tray
Rotate Sort/Rotate Stack
Enhanced Image Copy
--
→ → ×
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Shift Sort/
Shift Stack
✩ ✩ ✩
*
1
→ →
Staple
✩ ✩ ✩
*
1
→ → →
Copying From The
Bypass Tray
✩ → → ✩ → → → →
Preset Reduce/
Enlarge
✩ ✩ → ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Zoom
✩ ✩ → ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ →
Directional Size
Magnification (inch)
✩ ✩ → ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → →
Directional Magnification (%)
✩ ✩ → ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → → →
Margin Adjustment
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Erase Centre/
Border
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
--
*
2
Image Repeat
→
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → → ✩
Double Copies
*
1
Positive/Negative
✩ ✩ ✩
OHP Slip Sheet
Rotate Sort/
Rotate Stack
2-sided → 2-sided
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Book → 2-sided
→ → → ×
1-sided → 2-sided
--
2-sided → 1-sided
*
1
*
2
Book → 1-sided
✩ ✩ ✩
*
1
*
2
16 pages → booklet
Sort
*
1
*
2
8 pages → 2-sided
*
1
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ×
*
2
4 pages → 2-sided
*
1
--
*
2
4 pages → 1-sided
--
→ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
2 pages → 1-sided
✩ ✩ ✩
Erase Center/Border
✩ ×
Enhanced Image
Copy
Margin Adjustment
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Zoom
--
Staple
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
✩
Shift Sort/Shift Stack
--
Auto Paper Select
Sort
Auto Paper Select
Selecting
Copy Paper
Auto Reduce/Enlarge
Selecting Copy Paper
Mode before you select
Mode before you select
Mode before you select
Mode after you Select
→
→ → → → ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ →
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
✩ ✩
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
3
×
✩
*
1
*
1
→ ×
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
×
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
--
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → → → → → ✩ ✩ → → → → → ✩ → ✩
--
--
→ → → ✩ ✩
*
2
*
2
*
2
*
2
*
2
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
*
2
✩
→ → ✩ ✩
*
2
*
2
*
2
*
2
*
2
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
*
2
✩
→ ✩ ✩
*
2
*
2
*
2
*
2
*
2
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
*
2
✩
✩ ✩
*
2
*
2
*
2
*
2
*
2
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
*
2
✩
--
--
--
--
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
--
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
COMBINATION CHART
Image Repeat
1-sided → 2-sided
Book → 2-sided
2-sided → 2-sided
Cover/Page Designate
OHP Slip Sheet
Positive/Negative
Double Copies
Image Repeat
Duplex
Series Copies
2-sided → 1-sided
×
✩ ×
×
→ → → ×
×
×
×
×
×
×
✩ ×
×
→ → ×
×
×
×
×
×
×
✩ ×
×
→ ×
×
×
×
×
×
×
✩ ×
×
--
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
✩ ×
×
×
×
--
→ ×
×
×
×
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
×
×
×
→
--
×
×
×
×
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
×
×
×
×
×
×
--
→ → ✩ ×
✩ ✩ ✩
×
×
×
×
×
×
→
--
→ ✩ ×
✩ ✩ ✩
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ×
×
×
×
×
×
×
→ →
✩ ×
✩ ✩ ✩
✩ ✩ ×
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ×
×
×
×
×
×
×
✩ ✩ ✩
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ×
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ×
×
×
×
×
✩ ✩ ×
Shift Sort/Shift Stack
Book → 1-sided
Combine
Directional Magnification (%)
Directional Size Magnification (inch)
Preset Reduce/Enlarge
Copying From The Bypass Tray
Rotate Sort/Rotate Stack
×
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ×
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → →
✩
*
1
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ×
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → → →
16 pages →
booklet
✩ ×
✩
*
1
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ×
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → → → →
Book → 1-sided
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ×
×
×
2-sided → 1sided
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ×
×
1-sided → 2sided
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ×
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ×
Book →
2-sided
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ×
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ×
2-sided → 2sided
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ×
Cover/
Page Designate
✩ ×
✩
OHP Slip Sheet
✩ ×
✩ ×
Positive/Negative
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
*
3
✩ ×
--
16 pages → booklet
✩
✩ ×
--
8 pages → 2-sided
✩ ×
8 pages → 2sided
--
4 pages → 2-sided
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ →
--
4 pages → 1-sided
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ×
*
1
2 pages → 1-sided
*
1
Erase Center/Border
✩
Margin Adjustment
✩ ×
4 pages → 2sided
Zoom
4 pages → 1sided
Staple
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Sort
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ×
Combine
Auto Reduce/Enlarge
Enhanced Image Copy
×
*
1
Series Copies
Mode before you select
×
✩
Duplex
*3
×
✩ ×
Image Repeat
Mode before you select
*2
×
2 pages → 1sided
×
--
×
--
×
✩ ×
×
×
--
✩ ×
×
--
✩ ✩
--
Double
Copies
✩ ✩ ✩
*
1
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ×
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ×
×
×
×
×
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ×
✩
Image Repeat
✩ ×
*
1
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ×
×
×
×
×
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ×
✩ →
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
✩ ✩
Interrupt
*1
→ → → → ×
Auto Paper Select
Selecting Copy Paper
Mode after you Select
✩
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
✩ ✩ ✩
*
1
2
→
--
*
1
Available if the optional copier hard disk is installed.
When you select the mode after you select, the machine returns to Auto Reduce/Enlarge mode. However, you can select the mode before you select again.
The Paper Designate function is available. The optional copier hard disk is required
to use the Cover function.
ìíä
COPYING
2
ììí
3. WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING
GOES WRONG
IF YOUR MACHINE DOES NOT OPERATE AS
YOU WANT
Message
Machine's Condition
Problem/Cause
Action
The machine instructs you
to wait.
The machine is warming
up.
Wait for the machine to
warm-up.
Reference
You can use Auto Start
mode during warm-up
period. See ⇒ P.64 “Auto Start—Entering Copy
Job Settings During The
Warm-up Period”
The machine cannot detect Improper original is set.
the original size.
See ⇒ P.21 “Sizes Difficult
To Detect”.
Set non-standard size original on the exposure glass.
Input the both horizontal
and vertical sizes of the
non-standard original. See
⇒ P.31 “Setting Originals
On The Exposure Glass”.
Select paper manually, not
in Auto Paper Select mode.
Do not use Auto Reduce/
Enlarge mode.
Original is not set.
Set your originals.
The machine instructs you
to check the original direction.
There is no copy paper that Set the original in the same
is the same direction as the direction as the copy paper.
originals.
The machine instructs you
to check paper size.
Improper original size is
set.
Select the proper paper
size.
The machine cannot staple
this size paper.
--
Select the proper paper size
that can be used in Staple
mode. See ⇒ P.49 “Staple”
111
WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG
3
Machine's Condition
Problem/Cause
Action
You cannot enter the desired copy set number.
The number of copies exceeds the maximum copy
quantity.
You can change the maximum copy quantity that
you can make at a time. See
“05. Maximum copy quantity” in ⇒ P.152 “1. General
Features 2/4”
The machine instructs you
to set the duplex tray.
--
Reset the duplex tray correctly. See ⇒ P.2 “Guide To
Components”.
The machine instructs you The right cover of the duto open the right side cover plex unit is not open.
of the duplex unit.
When you make 2-sided
copies on B4, 81/2" × 14" or
larger copy paper, open the
right cover of the duplex
unit. See ⇒ P.85 “Duplex—
Making Two-Sided Copies”.
Display
Problem
Cause
Action
The panel display is off.
The machine is in Energy
Saver mode.
Press the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key to cancel Energy Saver mode.
The operation switch is
turned off.
Turn on the operation
switch.
Nothing happens when the The main power switch is
operation switch is turned turned off.
on.
112
Turn on the main power
switch. See ⇒ P.2 “Guide To
Components”
IF YOU CANNOT MAKE CLEAR COPIES
IF YOU CANNOT MAKE CLEAR COPIES
Problem
Cause
Action
Copies appear dirty.
The image density is too
dark.
Adjust the image density.
⇒ P.37 “Adjusting Copy Image Density”.
Auto Image Density is not
selected.
Select Auto Image Density.
The reverse side of an orig- The image density is too
inal image is copied.
dark.
Auto Image Density is not
selected.
A shadow appears on cop- The image density is too
ies if you use the pasted
dark.
originals.
Adjust the image density.
⇒ P.37 “Adjusting Copy Image Density”.
3
Select Auto Image Density.
Adjust the image density.
⇒ P.37 “Adjusting Copy Image Density”.
Change the direction of the
original.
Put mending tape on the
pasted part.
The same copy area is dirty The exposure glass, platen
whenever making copies. cover, or document feeder
belt is dirty.
Clean them. ⇒ P.169 “Maintaining Your Machine”.
Copies are too light.
The image density is too
light.
Adjust the image density.
⇒ P.37 “Adjusting Copy Image Density”.
Damp or rough grain paper is used.
Use dry paper without
rough grain.
Toner cartridge is almost
empty.
Add toner. ⇒ P.121 “D
Adding Toner”.
The original is not set correctly.
Set originals correctly. ⇒
P.31 “Setting Originals”.
An improper paper size is
selected.
Select the proper paper
size.
The original is not set correctly.
Set originals correctly. ⇒
P.31 “Setting Originals”.
Parts of the image are not
copied.
Copies are blank.
113
WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG
Problem
Cause
Action
A moire pattern is produced on copies.
Your original has dot pattern image or many lines.
Place the original on the exposure glass at a slight angle.
R
3
114
y,
,yy,y,y,y,y,y,
y,y,y,y,y,
IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU WANT
IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU
WANT
Problem
Cause
Action
Copies are not stapled.
There are jammed staples
in the stapler.
Remove jammed staples.
See ⇒ P.139 “e Removing
Jammed Staples”.
Note
❒ After removing jammed
staples, staples might
not be ejected the first
few times you try to use
the stapler.
The number of copies exceeds the capacity of the
stapler.
Check the stapler capacity.
See ⇒ P.49 “Staple”.
Staples are wrongly positioned.
Originals are not set correctly.
Set originals correctly. See
⇒ P.49 “Staple”.
Misfeeds occur frequently.
Copy paper size setting is
not correct.
Set the proper paper size.
See ⇒ P.132 “Changing The
Paper Size”.
You cannot combine sever- Selected functions cannot
al functions.
be used together.
Refer to the combination
chart. See ⇒ P.108 “Combination Chart”.
3
115
WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG
Adjust Image
Problem
Cause
Action
In Double Copies mode,
parts of the original image
are not copied.
Combination of original
and copy paper is not correct.
Select the proper original
and copy paper. See ⇒ P.20
“Originals”.
In Center/Border mode,
parts of the original image
are not copied.
You set the wide erased
margin.
Set the narrow margin with
the user tools. See “1. Erase
Border” in ⇒ P.155 “2. Adjust Image 1/2”. See “2. Erase
Center” in ⇒ P.155 “2. Adjust Image 1/2”.
3
In Margin Adjustment
mode, parts of the original
image are not copied.
Your original has narrow
margins on four sides.
You set the wide erased
margin.
In Image Repeat mode, the You selected the same size
original image is not copcopy paper as originals,
ied repeatedly.
and did not select the proper reproduction ratio.
Set the narrow margin with
the user tools. See “3.
Marg.Adj.Front” in ⇒
P.155 “2. Adjust Image 1/2”.
See “4. Margin Adjust
Back” in ⇒ P.155 “2. Adjust
Image 1/2”.
Select copy paper larger
than the originals. See ⇒
P.99 “Image Repeat—Repeating An Image”.
Select the proper reproduction ratio. See ⇒ P.99 “Image Repeat—Repeating An
Image”.
116
IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU WANT
Combine
Problem
Cause
Action
You cannot make a booklet Combine Original Booklet
from 16 originals by foldFormat is not correct.
ing copies.
Change the setting.⇒ P.78
“Combine—Combining
Originals Into One Copy”
Parts of the image are not
copied.
When you specify a reproduction ratio using Manual
Paper Select mode, make
sure the ratio matches your
originals and the copy paper.
You specified an improper
reproduction ratio that
does not meet the sizes of
your originals and copy paper.
3
Note
❒ Select the correct reproduction ratio before using Combine mode.
Your originals are not iden- Use originals that are identical in size and direction. tical in size and direction.
Order of copies is not correct.
You set originals in the incorrect order.
When setting a stack of
original in the document
feeder, the last page should
be on the bottom.
If you set an original on the
exposure glass, start with
the first page to be copied.
117
WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG
Duplex
Problem
Cause
Action
Order of copies is not correct.
You set originals in the incorrect order.
When setting a stack of
originals in the document
feeder, the last page should
be on the bottom.
If you set an original on the
exposure glass, start with
the first page to be copied.
3
Orientation of copies (Top You set originals in an into Top, or Top to Bottom) is correct direction or the orinot correct.
entation Setting is
incorrect.
Select the correct orientation, or set originals correctly. ⇒ P.85 “Duplex—
Making Two-Sided Copies”
Note
❒ If you set A3, 11" × 17"
or B4, 81/2" × 14" originals as shown below, for
example, take one of the
two actions described
below the illustration.
❒ Select [Top to Bottom] to
make copies in “Top to
Top” orientation. Select
[Top to Top] to make copies in “Top to Bottom”
orientation.
❒ Alternate the originals
as shown below when
setting them.
118
B LOADING PAPER
B LOADING PAPER
Note
❒ If you want to change the paper
size, see ⇒ P.132 “Changing The Paper Size”.
Reference
Regarding paper types and sizes
that can be set, see ⇒ P.23 “Copy
Paper”.
A Pull
out the paper tray until it
stops.
Note
❒ Shuffle the paper before setting
it in the tray.
❒ Make sure that the leading corners of the paper are under the
corners.
D Reinstall the back fence.
E Push the paper tray in
3
until it
stops.
B Remove the back fence.
ND5T0802
C Square the paper and set it in the
tray.
ND5T0801
Important
❒ Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
119
WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG
Loading Paper In The Large
Capacity Tray
C Place the paper in the tray along
the edge on the left.
A Press the {Down} key if it is not lit.
The key blinks while the bottom
plate is moving down.
1
3
ND6L0600
Note
❒ The Tray contains up to 1,500
sheets.
ND6L04EE
1: Down key
B When the key stops blinking and
lights up, open the top cover.
ND6L0500
Note
❒ Make sure no paper sheet is involved in the feeding part of the
Large Capacity Tray. Remove
the sheet, if any.
120
D Close the top cover.
D ADDING TONER
D ADDING TONER
When D is displayed, it is time to supply toner.
R WARNING:
• Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust
might ignite when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of the
used toner containers according to local regulations for
plastics.
R CAUTION:
• Do not eat or swallow toner.
3
• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of reach of
children.
R CAUTION:
• This machine has been tested for safety using this supplier's
parts and consumables. We recommend you only use these
specified supplies.
Important
❒ If you use toner other than that recommended, a fault might occur.
❒ When adding toner, do not turn off the operation switch. If you do, your settings are cleared.
❒ Always add toner after the machine instructs you to add toner.
❒ Do not use used toner. This will damage the machine.
Note
❒ You can still make about 50 copies after the D appears, but replace the toner
early to prevent poor copy quality.
Reference
Regarding toner storage, see ⇒ P.27 “Toner Storage”.
• 1: Open the front cover of the machine.
• 2: Lift the green holder.
Toner1
121
WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG
• 3: Push the green lever, and gently pull
out the holder.
2
1
Toner2
3
• 4: Press the toner bottle backward to
raise its head, then gently pull out the
bottle.
2
1
Toner3
• 5: Hold a new bottle horizontally and
shake it 5 or 6 times.
1
5 6
2
Note
❒ Do not remove the black cap when
shaking.
• 6: Remove the black cap.
Toner4
122
Note
❒ Do not remove the inner cap.
D ADDING TONER
• 7: Put the toner bottle on the holder,
then press its head forward.
1
2
Toner5
3
• 8: Push the holder until it clicks.
• 9: Push down the green holder.
• 10: Close the front cover of the machine.
Toner6
123
Chapter3 Page 124 Tuesday, May 19, 1998 1:59 PM
WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG
x CLEARING MISFEEDS
P
R
3
E
D C
B
A
Y
Z
U
ND4X0200
R CAUTION:
• When removing misfed paper, do not touch the fusing section be-
cause it could be very hot.
Important
❒ When clearing misfeeds, do not turn off the operation switch. If you do, your
copy settings are cleared.
❒ To prevent misfeeds, do not leave any torn scraps of paper within the machine.
❒ If paper misfeeds occur repeatedly, contact your service representative.
Note
❒ More than one misfed areas may be indicated. In this case, check every applicable area. Refer to the following charts: A, B, C, D, E, R, P, U, Y, Z.
❒ You can find a sticker explaining how to remove misfed paper inside of the
front cover, upper side of the finisher.
❒ When the machine instructs you to reset originals, reset your originals to the
feeding position.
The display will indicate the number of originals you should return.
124
x CLEARING MISFEEDS
3
125
WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG
When D is lit
1. Open the right cover of
the interchange unit to
the left.
2. Remove misfed paper.
3. Close the cover.
4. If you cannot remove
misfed paper, open the
bottom covers of the
interchange unit.
5. Remove misfed paper.
6. Close the covers.
3
When B is lit
2
2
2
1
1
1
1. Open the duplex unit.
2. Push up the lever and
open the cover.
B
3. Open the front cover of
the main frame.
4. Turn knob B
counterclockwise and
remove misfed paper.
When A is lit
1
2
A2
2
2
1
1
1. Open the duplex unit.
126
2. Push up the lever and
open the cover.
3. Push handle A2 to the
left and remove misfed
paper.
x CLEARING MISFEEDS
When E is lit
2. Remove misfed paper.
1. Open the cover.
3
When C is lit
2
2
2
1
1
1
1. Open the duplex unit.
2. Push up the lever and
open the cover.
C
3. Open the front cover of
the main frame.
4. Turn knob C clockwise
and remove misfed
paper.
P
R
E
D C
B
A
Y
Z
U
1
A1
A2
2
4. If you cannot remove misfed paper, open
the cover.
If your machine is equipped with the large
capacity tray, slide it to the right.
5. Turn knob A1 downward.
6. Push handle A2 to the
left and remove misfed
paper.
7. Open the bypass tray
and remove misfed
paper.
You can make an enlarged copy of this page and stick it on wall.
ND4X0302
127
WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG
When R is lit
3000-sheet finisher
When R1, R2, or R3 is lit
R1
1
1
R3
R2
2
1
2
2
3
1. Open the front cover of
the finisher.
2. Hold up handle R1 and
remove misfed paper.
3. If you cannot remove
misfed paper, hold down
handle R2 and remove
misfed paper.
4. Hold up handle R3 and
remove misfed paper.
When R4, R5, or R6 is lit
2
2
2
R6
R4
R5
1
1. Open the front cover of
the finisher.
2. Push handle R4 to the
left and remove misfed
paper.
128
1
3. If you cannot remove
misfed paper, hold up
handle R5 and remove
misfed paper.
1
4. Hold handle R6 and pull
out the staple unit, then
remove misfed paper.
x CLEARING MISFEEDS
1000-sheet finisher
2
1
2. If you cannot remove
misfed paper, open the
top cover.
1. Remove misfed paper.
3. Remove misfed paper.
4. If you cannot remove
misfed paper, pull out
the front cover and
remove misfed paper.
3
P
R
E
D C
B
A
Y
Z
U
You can make an enlarged copy of this page and stick it on wall.
ND4X0402
129
WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG
When P is lit
1
1
2
2
2
1. Open the right cover of
the document feeder,
remove misfed originals.
2. Open the left cover of
the document feeder,
remove misfed originals.
3. If the misfed original
does not come out, turn
the lever and remove it.
3
When Y is lit
1. Open the right cover of the paper tray unit.
If your machine is equipped with the large
capacity tray, slide it to the right and open
the right cover of the paper tray unit.
2. Remove misfed paper.
When U is lit
1. Slide the large capacity
tray to the right.
130
2. Open the top cover of
the large capacity tray.
3. Remove misfed paper.
4. If you cannot remove
misfed paper, remove
misfed paper from the
left side of the large
capacity tray.
x CLEARING MISFEEDS
When Z is lit
2
2
Z1
1
2
Z2
1
1
1. Open the duplex unit.
2. Open cover Z1 and
remove misfed paper.
3. If you cannot find misfed
paper, open cover Z2 and
remove misfed paper.
3
P
R
E
D C
B
A
Y
Z
U
You can make an enlarged copy of this page and stick it on wall.
ND4X0502
131
Chapter3 Page 132 Tuesday, May 19, 1998 2:00 PM
WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG
CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE
Important
❒ Make sure to select paper size with
the user tools. Otherwise, misfeeds
might occur.
Reference
For paper sizes, weight, and capacity that can be set in each tray, see
⇒ P.23 “Copy Paper”.
3
Note
❒ A screwdriver is contained in
the front area of the top tray.
D Re-position the side fences to the
paper size you want to use.
A Make sure that the paper tray is
not being used.
B Pull the paper tray, then lift and
remove it.
ND5T1100
E Fasten the fences with screws.
ND5T0900
Note
❒ Remove any remaining copy
paper.
C Remove the screws fastening the
side fences using the screwdriver.
ND5T1001
F Adjust the back fence to the new
paper size.
A
ND5T1200
1
ND5T10EE
1: Screwdriver
132
CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE
Note
❒ For 11" × 17" paper, put the back
fence inside A.
G
Square the paper and set it in the
tray.
Reference
For details, see “User Tools
(System Settings)” in the System Settings .
3
ND5T0801
Important
❒ Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
Note
❒ Shuffle the paper before setting
it in the tray.
❒ Make sure the leading corners
of the paper are under the corners.
H Push
the paper tray in until it
stops.
I Select the paper size with the user
tools.
To adjust the paper size
A Press the {User Tools/Counter}
key.
B Enter “1” with the {Number}
key.
C Press the [↓
↓Next] key twice.
D Enter “1” and “1” with the
{Number} key.
E Select your desired size. Then,
press the [OK] key.
133
WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG
d ADDING STAPLES
R CAUTION:
• This machine has been tested for safety using this supplier's
parts and consumables. We recommend you only use these
specified supplies.
Important
❒ If you use a staple cartridge other than that recommended, staple failure or
staple jams might occur.
3
1000-Sheet Finisher
• 1: Open the front cover.
fin101EE
• 2: Remove the cartridge.
fin102EE
• 3: Take out the empty refill in the arrow direction.
fin103EE
134
d ADDING STAPLES
• 4: Push in the new refill until it clicks.
fin104EE
3
• 5: Pull out the ribbon.
fin105EE
• 6: Reinstall the cartridge.
fin106EE
• 7: Close the front cover.
fin107EE
135
WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG
3000-Sheet Finisher
• 1: Open the front cover of the finisher.
R6
3
• 2: Pull out the staple unit.
fin301EE
• 3: Lift the cartridge until it clicks.
fin302EE
• 4: Pull out the cartridge gently.
fin303EE
136
d ADDING STAPLES
• 5: Take out the empty refill in the direction of the arrow.
fin304EE
3
• 6: Align the arrows on the new refill
and the cartridge, then push in the refill until it clicks.
fin305EE
• 7: Pull out the ribbon.
fin306EE
137
WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG
• 8: Reinstall the cartridge.
fin307EE
3
• 9: Press down the cartridge until it
clicks.
fin308EE
• 10: Bring the staple unit back into
place.
• 11: Close the front cover of the finisher.
fin309EE
138
e REMOVING JAMMED STAPLES
e REMOVING JAMMED STAPLES
Note
❒ Staples might be jammed because of curled copies. In this case, try turning the
copy paper over in the tray. If there is no improvement, change the copy paper with less curls.
❒ After removing jammed staples, staples might not be ejected the first few
times you try to use the stapler.
3
1000-Sheet Finisher
• 1: Open the front cover.
fin108EE
• 2: Remove the cartridge.
fin109EE
• 3: Open the face plate.
fin110EE
139
WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG
• 4: Remove the jammed staples.
fin111EE
3
• 5: Reinstall the cartridge.
fin112EE
• 6: Close the front cover.
fin113EE
140
e REMOVING JAMMED STAPLES
3000-Sheet Finisher
• 1: Open the front cover of the finisher.
R6
• 2: Pull out the staple unit.
3
fin310EE
• 3: Lift the cartridge until it clicks.
fin311EE
• 4: Pull out the cartridge gently.
fin312EE
• 5: Open the face plate by pressing the
lock on the right.
fin313EE
141
WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG
• 6: Remove the jammed staples.
fin314EE
3
• 7: Close the face plate by pressing it until it clicks.
fin315EE
• 8: Reinstall the cartridge.
fin316EE
• 9: Press down the cartridge until it
clicks.
fin317EE
142
e REMOVING JAMMED STAPLES
• 10: Bring the staple unit back into
place.
• 11: Close the front cover of the finisher.
fin318EE
3
143
WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG
y REMOVING PUNCH WASTE
Note
❒ While the y indicator is lit, you
cannot use the punch function.
A Open the front cover of the 3000sheet finisher.
3
ND7B2600
B Pull out the punch waste box and
remove punch waste.
ND7B2700
C Reinstall the punch waste box.
ND7B2701
144
D Close the front cover of the finisher.
The y indicator goes off.
Note
❒ If the indicator is still lit, reinstall the punch waste box .
4. USER TOOLS (COPY
FEATURES)
ACCESSING THE USER TOOLS (COPY
FEATURES)
This section is for the key operators in
change of this machine. You can
change or set the machine's default
settings.
C Enter the number of the desired
User Tools menu with the {Number} keys.
Preparation
After using the user tools, be sure
to exit from user tools.
Reference
Regarding about the user tools for
system setting, see “Accessing The
User Tools (System Settings)” in
the System Settings.
Regarding the user tools for the fax
mode, see each Operating Instructions.
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
D Search
for the desired setting
with the [↓
↓Next ] key. Enter its
number with the {Number} keys.
Note
❒ [↓
↓Next ]: Press to go to the next
page.
❒ [↑
↑Prev.]: Press to go back to the
previous page.
2
2
2
Enhanced
Note
❒ To return to the previous menu,
press the [Menu] key.
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L0103
B Enter {2} with the {Number} key.
Reference
See ⇒ P.145 “USER TOOLS
(COPY FEATURES)”.
E Change the settings by following
the instructions on the panel display. Then, press the [OK] key.
Reference
See ⇒ P.150 “Settings You Can
Change With The User Tools”.
Note
❒ [OK] key: Press to set the new
settings and return to the previous menu.
ìéè
USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)
❒ [Cancel] key: Press to return to
the previous menu without
changing any data.
Exiting From User Tools
A After changing the user tools settings, press
Counter} key.
Sort
the
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
4
2
2
2
Enhanced
{User Tools/
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L0103
Note
❒ The settings are not canceled
even if the operation switch is
turned off or the {Clear Modes/
Energy Saver} key is pressed.
ìéç
ACCESSING THE USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)
4
ìéæ
USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)
USER TOOLS MENU (COPY FEATURES)
1 General Features 1/4
4
1 General Features 2/4
1 General Features 3/4
1 General Features 4/4
ìéå
USER TOOLS MENU (COPY FEATURES)
2 Adjust Image 1/2
4
2 Adjust Image 2/2
3 Input / Output 1/3
4 Shortcut Keys
3 Input / Output 2/3
3 Input / Output 3/3
ND0X0301
ìéä
USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)
SETTINGS YOU CAN CHANGE WITH THE
USER TOOLS
Reference
For how to access the user tools, see ⇒ P.145 “Accessing The User Tools (Copy
Features)”.
1. General Features 1/4
4
Menu
Description
01. APS Priority
As a default setting, Auto Paper Select is selected. You can
cancel this setting.
Note
❒ Default: Yes
02. AID Priority
In each mode of Text, Text·Photo, Photo, Copied Original,
and Low Density Original, you can specify whether to select
Auto Image Density.
Note
❒ Default:
• Text: Yes
• Text·Photo: No
• Photo: No
• Copied Original: Yes
• Low Density Original: Yes
03. Original Priority
As a default setting, Text is selected as original Type. You
can change it to Text·Photo, Photo, Copied Original, or Low
Density Original.
Note
❒ Default: Text
ìèí
SETTINGS YOU CAN CHANGE WITH THE USER TOOLS
Menu
Description
04. Show All Keys
You can specify whether all the keys are displayed. If you
change the default setting to [No], the display shows as follows:
Note
❒ Default: Yes
4
ìèì
USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)
1. General Features 2/4
Menu
Description
05. Max. Copy Q'ty
The maximum copy quantity can be set between 1 and 999.
Note
❒ Default: 999
06. Original Beeper
The beeper (key tone) sounds when you forgot to remove
originals after copying.
Note
❒ Default: On
❒ If the Panel beeper setting is set to Off, (see “System Settings”), the beeper does not sound irrespective of the setting (On or Off) of this Original Beeper function.
4
07. Photo Mode
You can select the image quality when you select Photo
mode with the {Original Type} key or Enhanced Image Copy
mode.
Note
❒ Default:
• Enhanced image: OFF: Coarse
• Enhanced image: ON: Normal
08. Reproduction Ratio
ìèë
Up to 2 reproduction ratios which you frequently use can be
registered.
SETTINGS YOU CAN CHANGE WITH THE USER TOOLS
1. General Features 3/4
Menu
Description
09. Slip Sheet Tray
You can select a special tray for slip sheets.
Note
❒ Default:
• Machine with bypass tray: Bypass
• Machine without bypass tray: None
10. Duplex Priority
You can select the type of the Duplex function to be effective
when the machine is turned on, Energy Saver mode is off, or
Auto Reset is on.
4
Note
❒ Default: 1-Sided → 2-Sided
11. Auto Reset
The machine returns to its initial condition automatically after your job is finished. The time can be set from 10 to 180
seconds.
Note
❒ Default: 60 seconds
12. Density Pattern
You can change density levels.
ìèê
USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)
1. General Features 4/4
Menu
Description
13. Initial Mode Set
You can select the initial mode or Program No. 10 as the
mode to be effective when modes are cleared.
Note
❒ Default: Initial
14. Management Setting
You can change settings for user access limitation for copier functions.
Counter Reset
4
You can check the number of copies made under each user
code. You can also reset each user code's counter to 0.
Note
❒ If more than one user code is registered, you can view all
the counters using the [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next ] key.
Clear Code/Counter
You can delete all user codes or reset all counters to 0.
Reg. User Code
You can register user codes.
Note
❒ Up to 50 user codes (8 digits or less) can be registered.
Chg/Del User Code
You can change or delete user codes.
Note
❒ The number of copies made under the old code is added
to that made under the new user code.
❒ The number of copies made under the deleted code is
also deleted.
Counter List Print
You can print a list of counters shown by user code.
Note
❒ To stop the printing, press the [Cancel] key.
ìèé
SETTINGS YOU CAN CHANGE WITH THE USER TOOLS
2. Adjust Image 1/2
Menu
Description
1. Erase Border
The default setting of the width of the erased margins in the
Erase Border mode can be changed as follows:
• Metric version: 3 – 50 mm in 1 mm steps
• Inch version: 0.1 – 2.0" in 0.1" steps
Note
❒ Default:
• Metric version: 10 mm
• Inch version: 0.4"
2. Erase Center
4
The default setting of the width of the erased margins in the
Erase Center mode can be changed as follows:
• Metric version: 3 – 50 mm in 1 mm steps
• Inch version: 0.1 – 2.0" in 0.1" steps
Note
❒ Default:
• Metric version: 10 mm
• Inch version: 0.4"
3. Marg. Adj. Front
You can adjust the margin width on the front side of copies
in Margin Adjust mode. You can change this setting as follows:
• Metric version: 0 – 30 mm in 1 mm steps
• Inch version: 0 – 1.0" in 0.1" steps
Note
❒ Default:
• Metric version: 5 mm
• Inch version: 0.2"
ìèè
USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)
Menu
Description
4. Margin Adjust Back
You can specify a binding margin on the back side of copies
for the following modes: 1-Sided → 2-Sided, Book → 2-Sided, and 2-Sided → 2-sided.
You can change this setting as follows:
• Metric version: 0 – 30 mm in 1 mm steps
• Inch version: 0 – 1.0" in 0.1" steps
Limitation
❒ Type 1 requires the optional duplex unit.
Note
❒ Default:
4
• Metric version: 5 mm
• Inch version: 0.2"
ìèç
SETTINGS YOU CAN CHANGE WITH THE USER TOOLS
2. Adjust Image 2/2
Menu
Description
5. Double Copy
You can select a separation line in Double Copy mode from
no line, Solid line, Broken line, or Crop marks.
• None
• Solid
4
• Broken Line
• Crop Marks
Note
❒ Default: None (no line)
ìèæ
USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)
Menu
Description
6. Combine Copy
You can select a separation line in Combine mode from no
line, Solid line, Broken line 1, Broken line 2, or Crop marks.
• None
• Solid
• Broken Line 1
4
• Broken Line 2
• Crop Marks
Note
❒ Default: None (no line)
ìèå
SETTINGS YOU CAN CHANGE WITH THE USER TOOLS
Menu
Description
7. Image Repeat
You can select a separation line in Image Repeat mode from
no line, Solid line, Broken line 1, Broken line 2, or Crop
marks.
• None
• Solid
• Broken Line 1
4
• Broken Line 2
• Crop Marks
Note
❒ Default: None (no line)
8. Booklet: Original
You can select type of originals for “16 pages → booklet”.
See ⇒ P.78 “Combine—Combining Originals Into One Copy”.
Limitation
❒ Type 1 requires the optional 8MB copier memory unit
and duplex unit.
Note
❒ Default: Portrait
ìèä
USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)
3. Input/Output 1/2
Menu
Description
1. Duplex Auto Eject
When making two-sided copies from one-sided originals, if
the last original is an odd page, the last copy will be automatically delivered with the reverse side blank. You can
cancel this setting. ⇒ P.85 “Duplex—Making Two-Sided Copies”
Limitation
❒ Type 1 requires the optional duplex unit.
Note
❒ When you set one original at a time in the document
feeder or set an original on the exposure glass, this function does not come effect.
4
❒ Default: Yes
2. Comb. Auto Eject
As a default setting, even if the number of originals in the
optional document feeder is less than the number required
in the selected Combine mode, the lacking number of copies
are automatically made in blank. You can cancel this setting.⇒ P.78 “Combine—Combining Originals Into One Copy”
Limitation
❒ When you set one original at a time in the document
feeder or set an original on the exposure glass, this function does not come effect.
Note
❒ Default: Yes
3. Original Count
As a default setting, the display shows the copy quantity
you specified and the number of copies made. You can cancel this setting, and instead view the number of originals to
be fed in the document feeder and the number of copies
made.
Note
❒ Default: No
ìçí
SETTINGS YOU CAN CHANGE WITH THE USER TOOLS
Menu
Description
4. SADF Auto Reset
When you set one original at a time in the optional document feeder, the Auto Feed indicator lights for a selected
time after an original is fed to show that the document feeder is ready for another original. You can adjust this time
from 3 seconds to 99 seconds in 1 second steps.
Limitation
❒ The optional document feeder (ADF) is required.
Note
❒ Default: 5 seconds
4
ìçì
USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)
3. Input/Output 2/2
Menu
Description
5. Rotate Sort
If you select [No] when the paper tray in use runs out of paper, the machine stops allowing you to add paper to the
tray. So you can have all the copies rotate-sorted.
Note
❒ Default: No
6. Sort
You can select a Sort function. ⇒ P.45 “Sort—Sorting Into
Sets (123, 123, 123)”
Limitation
❒ The optional finisher is required to use the Shift Sort
function.
4
Note
❒ Default:
• Machine with finisher: Shift Sort
• Machine without finisher: Sort
7. Stack
You can select a Stack function. ⇒ P.47 “Stack—Stacking Together All Copies Of A Page (111, 222, 333)”
Limitation
❒ The optional finisher is required to use the Shift Stack
function.
Note
❒ Default:
• Machine with finisher: Shift Stack
• Machine without finisher: Rotate Stack
ìçë
SETTINGS YOU CAN CHANGE WITH THE USER TOOLS
Menu
Description
8. Mem.full-AutoStrt
When the memory becomes full while scanning originals,
the machine can make copies of the scanned originals first,
then automatically proceeds to scanning the remaining originals.
You can enable or disable this function.
• If you select [No]
When the memory becomes full, the machine stops its
operation allowing you to remove the copy pages delivered on the output tray.
• If you select [Yes]
You can leave the machine unattended to make all the
copies, but the resulting sorted pages will not be sequential.
4
Note
❒ Default: No
9. Auto Sort Mode
You can specify whether Sort mode is selected when the machine is turned on or the mode is cleared.
Note
❒ Default: No
ìçê
USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)
4. Shortcut Keys 1/1
Menu
Description
Shortcut Keys
You can register up to four frequently used functions with
shortcut keys.
Note
❒ First press the desired shortcut key, then select the function you want to assign to the key.
4
ìçé
5. REMARKS
DO'S AND DON'TS
R CAUTION:
• When you move the machine, unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet to avoid fire or electric shock.
• When the machine will not be used for a long time, unplug the
power cord.
Important
❒ Make sure the remaining memory space is 100 %, before you unplug the power cord.
❒ While the machine is unplugged, you can neither send nor receive a fax.
Reference
For details, see the Facsimile Reference.
• Do not touch areas on or around the fusing unit. These areas get hot.
• After making copies continuously, you may feel the exposure glass is heated.
But this is not a malfunction.
• You may feel warm around the ventilation hole. This is caused by exhaust air,
and not a malfunction.
• Do not turn off the operation switch while copying or printing. When turning
off the operation switch, make sure that copying or printing is completed.
• The machine might fail to produce good copy images if there should occur
condensation inside caused by temperature change.
• Do not open the covers of machine while copying or printing. If you do, misfeeds might occur.
• Do not move the machine while copying or printing.
• If you operate the machine improperly or a failure occurs on the machine,
your machine settings might be lost. Be sure to take a note of your machine
settings.
• Supplier shall not be liable for any loss or damages resulting from a failure on
the machine, loss of machine settings, and use of the machine.
165
REMARKS
WHERE TO PUT YOUR MACHINE
Machine Environment
Your machine's location should be carefully chosen because environmental conditions greatly affect its performance.
Optimum environmental conditions
R CAUTION:
• Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. A fire or an elec-
tric shock might occur.
• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it topples over, it could cause injury.
5
R CAUTION:
• If you use the machine in a confined space, make sure there is a
continuous air turnover.
•
•
•
•
Temperature: 10 – 32°C (50 – 89.6°F)(humidity to be 50 % at 32°C, 89.6°F)
Humidity: 15 – 80 % (temperature to be 27°C, 80.6°F at 80 %)
A strong and level base.
The machine must be level within 5 mm, 0.2" both front to rear and left to
right.
• To avoid possible build-up of ozone, make sure to locate this machine in a
large well ventilated room that has an air turnover of more than 30 m3/hr/
person.
Environments to avoid
• Locations exposed to direct sunlight or strong light (more than 1,500 lux).
• Locations directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner or heated air
from a heater. (Sudden temperature changes might cause condensation within the machine.)
• Places where the machine might be subjected to frequent strong vibration.
• Dusty areas.
• Areas with corrosive gases.
166
WHERE TO PUT YOUR MACHINE
Power Connection
R WARNING:
• Only connect the machine to the power source described on
the inside front cover of this manual.
R WARNING:
• Avoid multi-wiring.
• Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power cord. Do not place heavy objects on it, pull it hard or bend
it more than necessary. These actions could cause an electric shock or fire.
• Do not plug or unplug the power cord with your hands wet.
Otherwise, an electric shock might occur.
5
R WARNING:
• Make sure the wall outlet is near the machine and freely ac-
cessible so that in event of an emergency it can be unplugged easily.
R CAUTION:
• When you move the machine, unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet to avoid fire or electric shock.
• When the machine will not be used for a long time, unplug the
power cord.
R CAUTION:
• When you pull out the plug from the socket, grip the plug to avoid
damaging the cord and causing fire or electric shock.
• When the main switch is in the Stand-by positions, the optional anti-condensation heaters are on. In case of emergency, unplug the machine's power cord.
• When you unplug the power cord, the anti-condensation heaters turn off.
• Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
• Voltage must not fluctuate more than 10 %.
167
REMARKS
Access To Machine
Place the machine near the power source, providing clearance as shown.
1
2
4
3
CP999EE
1. Rear: more than 10 cm (4.0")
2. Right: more than 10 cm (4.0")
5
3. Front: more than 75 cm (29.6")
4. Left: more than 10 cm (4.0")
Note
❒ For the required space when options are installed, please contact your service
representative.
168
MAINTAINING YOUR MACHINE
MAINTAINING YOUR MACHINE
If the exposure glass, platen covers or
document feeder belt is dirty, you
might not be able to make copies as
you want. Clean them if you find
them dirty.
Cleaning The Platen Cover
❖ Cleaning the machine
Wipe the machine with a soft,
damp cloth. Then, wipe it with a
dry cloth to remove the water.
Important
❒ Do not use chemical cleaner or organic solvent, such as thinner or
benzene. If they get into the machine or melt plastic parts, a failure
might occur.
❒ Do not clean parts other than those
specified in this manual. Such
parts should be cleaned by your
service representative.
AM1P0100
5
Cleaning The Document
Feeder
Cleaning The Exposure Glass
ND1D0300
ND1C0200
169
REMARKS
5
170
6. SPECIFICATION
MAINFRAME
❖ Configuration:
Desktop
❖ Photosensitivity type:
OPC drum (Φ60)
❖ Original scanning:
One-dimensional solid scanning system through CCD
❖ Copy process:
Dry electrostatic transfer system
❖ Development:
Dry two-component magnetic brush development system
❖ Fusing:
Heating roll system
❖ Resolution:
400 dpi
❖ Exposure glass:
Stationary original exposure type
❖ Original reference position:
Rear left corner
❖ Warm-up time:
• Type 1, 2: Less than 85 seconds (20°C)
• Type 3: Less than 100 seconds (20°C)
❖ Originals:
Sheet/book/objects
❖ Maximum original size:
A3L, 11" × 17"L
❖ Copy paper size:
• Trays: A3L – A5L, 11" × 17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"L
• Bypass: A3L – A6L, 11" × 17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"L
171
SPECIFICATION
• Bypass (non-standard size):
Vertical: 100 – 297 mm, 4.0” – 11.7”
Horizontal: 148 – 432 mm, 6.0” – 17.0”
• Duplex: A3L – A5K, 11" × 17"L – 81/2" × 11"K
• LCT: A4K, 81/2" × 11"K
❖ Copy paper weight:
• Paper tray: 64 – 105 g/m2 (20 – 28 lb)
• Bypass tray: 52 – 157 g/m2 (16 – 42 lb)
• Duplex unit: 64 – 105 g/m2 (20 – 28 lb)
❖ Non-reproduction area:
• Leading edge: 3 ± 2 mm
• Trailing edge: 2 ± 2 mm
• Left edge: 2 ± 1.5 mm
• Right edge: 2 + 2.5/-1.5 mm
❖ First copy time:
6
A4K
81/2" × 11"K
Type 1, 2
3.9 seconds or less
4.0 seconds or less
Type 3
3.2 seconds or less
3.3 seconds or less
(100 %, feeding from 1st or 2nd paper tray, Text·Photo mode, Auto Image
Density)
❖ Copying speed: (Type 1 and Type 2)
• 19 copies/minute (A3L, 11" × 17"L)
• 35 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K)
❖ Copying speed: (Type 3)
• 22 copies/minute (A3L, 11" × 17"L)
• 45 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K)
172
MAINFRAME
❖ Reproduction ratio:
Preset reproduction ratios:
Enlargement
Full Size
Reduction
Metric version
Inch version
400 %
400 %
200 %
200 %
141 %
155 %
122 %
129 %
115 %
121 %
100 %
100 %
93 %
93 %
87 %
85 %
82 %
78 %
71 %
73 %
65 %
65 %
50 %
50 %
35 % (Type 3 only)
32 % (Type 3 only)
25 % (Type 1 and Type 2 only)
25 % (Type 1 and Type 2 only)
6
Zoom:
• Type 1, 2
Metric version: 25 – 400 %
Inch version: 25 – 400 %
• Type 3
Metric version: 35 – 400 %
Inch version: 32 – 400 %
❖ Continuous copying count:
1 – 999 copies
❖ Copy paper capacity:
• 1st and 2nd paper trays: 500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
• Bypass tray: 50 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
173
SPECIFICATION
❖ Power consumption:
• Mainframe only
Type 1, 2
Type 3
Warm up
About 1.05 kW
About 1.15 kW
Stand-by
About 200 Wh
About 220 Wh
Copying
About 1.15 kW
About 1.3 kW
Maximum
Less than 1.44 kW
Less than 1.44 kW
Type 1, 2 *1
Type 3 *2
Warm up
About 1.05 kW
About 1.15 kW
Stand-by
About 220 Wh
About 260 Wh
Copying
About 1.2 kW
About 1.35 kW
Maximum
Less than 1.44 kW
Less than 1.44 kW
• System
*1
6
*2
Mainframe with the document feeder, bridge unit, paper tray unit, large capacity tray, copier hard disk, and 1000-sheet finisher.
Mainframe with the document feeder, bridge unit, paper tray unit, large capacity tray, copier hard disk, and 3000-sheet finisher.
❖ Dimensions (W × D × H up to exposure glass):
• Type 1: 600 × 640 × 720 mm, 23.7" × 25.2" × 28.4"
• Type 2, 3: 670 × 640 × 720 mm, 26.4" × 25.2" × 28.4"
❖ Space for main frame (W × D):
• With duplex unit:
630 × 640 mm, 24.9" × 25.2" (Unit closed)
900 × 640 mm, 35.5" × 25.2" (Unit opened)
• With bypass tray unit:
670 × 640 mm, 26.4" × 25.2" (Unit closed)
850 × 640 mm, 33.5" × 25.2" (Unit opened)
980 × 640 mm, 38.6" × 25.2" (Bypass tray extender is used for large size paper)
174
MAINFRAME
❖ Noise Emission:
Sound pressure level: The measurement are made according to ISO7779.
Stand-by
Copying
*1
*2
Mainframe only
System *1
Type 1, 2
27 dB (A) or less
28 dB (A) or less
Type 3
27 dB (A) or less
28 dB (A) or less
*2
Type 1, 2
52 dB (A) or less
60 dB (A) or less
Type 3
56 dB (A) or less
62 dB (A) or less
for Type 1, 2: Mainframe with the document feeder, 1000-sheet finisher, bridge
unit, paper tray unit, large capacity tray, and copier hard disk.
for Type 3: Mainframe with the document feeder, 3000-sheet finisher, bridge unit,
paper tray unit, large capacity tray, and copier hard disk.
❖ Noise Emission:
Sound power level: The measurement are made according to ISO7779.
Mainframe only
Stand-by
Copying
*1
*2
System *1
*2
Type 1, 2
42 dB (A) or less
44 dB (A) or less
Type 3
42 dB (A) or less
44 dB (A) or less
Type 1, 2
69 dB (A) or less
73 dB (A) or less
Type 3
70 dB (A) or less
74 dB (A) or less
6
for Type 1, 2: Mainframe with the document feeder, 1000-sheet finisher, bridge
unit, paper tray unit, large capacity tray, and copier hard disk.
for Type 3: Mainframe with the document feeder, 3000-sheet finisher, bridge unit,
paper tray unit, large capacity tray, and copier hard disk.
❖ Weight:
• Type 1: Approx. 67 kg, 147.8 lb
• Type 2, 3: Approx. 75 kg, 165.4 lb
Note
❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.
175
SPECIFICATION
DOCUMENT FEEDER (OPTION)
❖ Mode:
ADF mode, SADF mode
❖ Original size:
• A3L – A5KL
• 11" × 17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"KL
❖ Original weight:
• 1-sided originals: 52 – 128 g/m2 (14 – 34 lb)
• 2-sided originals: 52 – 105 g/m2 (14 – 28 lb) (Duplex)
• Thin paper mode: 41 – 128 g/m2 (11 – 34 lb)
❖ Number of originals to be set:
50 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
❖ Maximum power consumption:
50 W (power is supplied from the main frame.)
6
❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):
600 × 580 × 150 mm, 23.7" × 22.9" × 5.9"
❖ Weight:
Approx. 12 kg, 26.5 lb
Note
❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.
176
PAPER TRAY UNIT (OPTION)
PAPER TRAY UNIT (OPTION)
❖ Copy paper weight:
64 – 105 g/m2 (20 – 28 lb)
❖ Available paper size:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" ×
11"KL, 5 1/2" × 8 1/2"L, 7 1/4" × 10 1/2"L, 8" × 13"L, 81/2" × 13"L, 81/4" ×
13"L
❖ Maximum power consumption:
50 W (power is supplied from the main frame.)
❖ Paper capacity:
500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb) × 2 trays
❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):
540 × 600 × 270 mm, 21.3" × 23.7" × 10.7"
❖ Weight:
Approx. 25 kg, 55.2 lb
6
Note
❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.
177
SPECIFICATION
INTERNAL TRAY 2 (1 BIN TRAY) (OPTION)
❖ Number of bins:
1
❖ Available paper size:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5L, 11" × 17"L, 8 1/2" × 14"L, 8 1/2" ×
11"KL, 5 1/2 × "8 1/2"L
❖ Paper capacity:
125 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Note
❒ The paper capacity might be less than 125 sheets when copy paper is considerably curled.
❖ Copy paper weight:
60 – 105 g/m2 (16 – 28 lb)
❖ Maximum power consumption:
15 W (power is supplied from the main frame.)
6
❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):
470 × 550 × 110 mm, 18.6" × 21.7" × 4.4"
❖ Weight:
Approx. 4 kg, 8.9 lb
Note
❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.
178
1000-SHEET FINISHER (OPTION)
1000-SHEET FINISHER (OPTION)
❖ Paper size:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, B6L, A6L, 11" × 17"L, 8 1/2" × 14"L,
8 1/2" × 11"KL, 5 1/2" × 8 1/2"L
❖ Paper weight:
52 – 157 g/m2, 14 – 42 lb
❖ Stack capacity:
• 1,000 sheets (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K or smaller) (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
• 500 sheets (B4, 81/2" × 14" or larger) (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
❖ Staple capacity:
• 30 sheets (A4, 81/2" × 11" or smaller) (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
• 20 sheets (B4, 81/2" × 14" or larger) (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
❖ Staple paper size:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5K, 11" × 17"L, 8 1/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL
6
❖ Staple paper weight:
64 – 80 g/m2, 17 – 20 lb
❖ Staple position:
1 position (upper left)
❖ Power consumption:
48 W (power is supplied from the main frame.)
❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):
568 × 520 × 625 mm, 22.4" × 20.5" × 24.6"
❖ Weight:
Approx. 21 kg, 46.3 lb
179
SPECIFICATION
3000-SHEET FINISHER (OPTION)
Note
❒ Optional unit for Type 3.
Shift Tray:
❖ Paper size:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, 11" × 17"L, 8 1/2" × 14"L, 8 1/2" × 11"KL
❖ Paper weight:
52 – 157 g/m2, 14 – 42 lb
❖ Stack capacity:
without punch:
• 3,000 sheets (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K) (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
• 1,500 sheets (A3L, B4L, A4L, B5KL, 11" × 17"L) (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
with punch (the optional punch kit is required):
• 2,500 sheets (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K) (80 g/m2,20 lb)
• 1,500 sheets (A3L, B4L, A4L, B5KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 8 1/2" ×
11"L) (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Proof Tray:
6
❖ Paper size:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, B6L, A6L, 11" × 17"L, 8 1/2" × 14"L,
8 1/2" × 11"KL, 8 1/2" × 5 1/2"KL
❖ Paper weight:
52 – 157 g/m2, 14 – 42 lb
❖ Stack capacity:
without punch:
• 250 sheets (A4, 81/2" × 11" or smaller) (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
• 50 sheets (B4, 81/2" × 14" or larger) (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
with punch (the optional punch kit is required):
• 200 sheets (A4, 81/2" × 11" or smaller) (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
• 50 sheets (B4, 81/2" × 14" or larger) (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Staple:
❖ Staple capacity:
without punch:
• 50 sheets (A4, 81/2" × 11" or smaller) (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
• 30 sheets (B4, 81/2" × 14" or larger) (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
with punch (the optional punch kit is required):
• 40 sheets (A4, 81/2" × 11" or smaller) (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
• 25 sheets (B4, 81/2" × 14" or larger) (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
180
3000-SHEET FINISHER (OPTION)
❖ Staple paper size:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, 11" × 17"L, 8 1/2" × 11"KL
❖ Staple paper weight:
64 – 80 g/m2, 17 – 21 lb
❖ Staple position:
• 1 staple – 3 positions
• 2 staples – 1 position
❖ Power consumption:
48 W (power is supplied from the main frame.)
❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):
625 × 545 × 960 mm, 24.7" × 21.5" × 37.8"
❖ Weight:
Approx. 45 kg, 99.3 lb
6
181
SPECIFICATION
PUNCH KIT (OPTION)
Note
❒ Optional unit for the 3000-sheet finisher.
❖ Paper size (2 holes version):
• L: A3 – A5, 11" × 17" – 81/2" × 11"
• K: A4 – A5, 81/2" × 11"
❖ Paper size (3 holes version):
• L: A3, B4, 11" × 17"
• K: A4, B5, 81/2" × 11"
❖ Paper weight:
• 2 holes version: 52 g/m2 – 128 g/m2, 14 – 34 lb
• 3 holes version: 52 g/m2 – 105 g/m2, 14 – 28 lb
❖ Power consumption:
33.6 W (power is supplied from the 3000-sheet finisher.)
6
❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):
92 × 463 × 100 mm, 3.7" × 18.3" × 4.0"
❖ Weight:
2.4 kg, 5.3 lb
182
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY (LCT) (OPTION)
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY (LCT) (OPTION)
❖ Paper size:
A4K, 81/2" × 11"K
❖ Paper weight:
64 – 105 g/m2, 20 – 28 lb
❖ Paper capacity:
1,500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
❖ Power consumption
Approx. 40 W (power is supplied from the main frame.)
❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):
390 × 500 × 390 mm, 15.4" × 19.7" × 15.4"
❖ Weight:
Approx. 17 kg, 37.5 lb
6
183
SPECIFICATION
DUPLEX UNIT (OPTION)
Note
❒ Optional unit for Type 1.
❖ Paper size:
A3L – A5L, 11" × 17"L – 51/2" × 81/2" L
❖ Paper weight:
64 – 105 g/m2, 20 – 28 lb
❖ Power consumption (Max):
35 W
❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):
90 × 520 × 400 mm, 3.6" × 20.5" × 15.8"
❖ Weight
Approx. 6 kg, 13.3 lb
6
184
BYPASS TRAY (OPTION)
BYPASS TRAY (OPTION)
This is option for Type 1.
❖ Available paper size:
• Standard size (metric version): A3L, A4L, A5L, 8 1/2" × 13"L
• Standard size (inch version): A3L, 11" × 17"L, 8 1/2" × 14"L, 8 1/2" × 11"L,
5 1/2" × 81/2"L
• Non-standard size: Vertical (100 – 297 mm, 4.0” – 11.7”), Horizontal (148 –
432 mm, 6.0” – 17.0”)
❖ Copy paper weight:
52 – 157 g/m2,16 – 42 lb
❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):
310 × 550 × 75 mm, 12.3” × 21.7” × 3.0"
❖ Paper capacity:
• 52 – 90 g/m2, 16 – 20 lb: 50 sheets
• 91 – 157 g/m2, 20 – 42 lb: 25 sheets
6
❖ Weight:
Approx. 3 kg, 6.7 lb
185
SPECIFICATION
8 MB COPIER MEMORY UNIT (ELECTRIC
SORT KIT) (OPTION)
This is option for Type 1.
❖ Memory capacity:
8 MB
❖ Additional functions:
Image rotate, Sort, 2-sided copy
6
186
COPIER HARD DISK (IMAGE ENHANCE KIT)
COPIER HARD DISK (IMAGE ENHANCE KIT)
❖ Originals scanned:
100 pages (A4) min.
❖ Originals stored for Archive File function:
32 pages (A4) max.
❖ Additional function:
Archive file, and sort in enhanced image copy mode
6
187
INDEX
Numerics
1 bin tray, æ, å, ìæå
1000-sheet finisher, æ, å,
ìæä
Cursor keys,
éê, ìêé, ìêä,
D
Deleting A Program, çì
Deleting The Stored Images, ìíè
Directional Magnification (%), æì
Directional Size Magnification (inch), çä
Do’s and Don’ts, ìçè
Document feeder (ADF), ë, æ, å, êë, ìçä,
3000-sheet finisher, å, éê, ìêç, ìéì, ìåí
8 MB copier memory unit, æ, ìåç
A
Access To Machine, ìçå
Adding Staples, ìêé
Adding Toner, ìëì
ADF external tray, ë, êë
ADF tray, êë
Adjusting Copy Image Density,
Archive File, ìíë
Auto Image Density, êæ
Auto Image Density key, ìê
Auto Off, êí
Auto Paper Select, éì
Auto Reduce/Enlarge, éë
Auto Reduce/Enlarge key, ìê
Auto Reset, êí
Auto Start, çé
ìæç
Double Copies, ää
Duplex, åè
Duplex key, ìë
Duplex unit, ë, æ, ìåé
êæ
E
Electric sort kit, æ, ìåç
Energy Saver, çê
Enhanced Image Copy, êå
Enhanced Image key, ìê
Enlarging, çè
Erase Border, æè
Erase Center, æè
Exposure glass, ë, ëí, ëë, êì, ìçä
External tray, æ, å
B
Basic Functions, êæ
Both Covers, äê
Bridge unit, æ, å
Bypass tray, é, æ, èè, ìåè
F
Fax key, ìä
Front Cover, äì
Front cover, ê
Function keys, ìê
C
Changing The Paper Size, ìêë
Clear key, ìê
Clear Modes/Energy Saver key,
Clearing Misfeeds, ìëé
Combination Chart, ìíå
Combine, æå
copier hard disk, æ, å, ìåæ
copy initial display, ìé
Copy Paper, ëê
Copying From The Bypass Tray,
Cover, äì
ìåå
ìê
G
Guide,
ìë
è
I
èè
Image enhance kit, æ, å, ìåæ
Image Repeat, ää, ìíí
Indicators, ìë
Interchange unit, æ
Internal tray, ë
Internal tray 2, æ, å, ìæå
Interrupt, çê
Interrupt key,
Platen cover, ë, æ, å, ìçä
Positive/Negative, äå
Power Connection, ìçæ
Preset Reduce/Enlarge, çè
Printing A List Of The Stored Images,
ìë
J
Jammed Staples,
ìêä
ìíç
L
Large Capacity Tray (LCT),
ìåê
Lighter and Darker keys,
Loading Paper, ììä
Lower right cover, é
ìê
R
M
Machine Environment, ìçç
Main Power indicator, ë, ìë
Main power switch, ë, ìæ
Mainframe, ìæì
Maintaining, ìçä
Manual Image Density, êå
Margin Adjustment, æê
Menu key, ìê
Message, ììì
Mixed sizes mode, êé
N
Number keys,
æ, å, ìëí,
Program, çí
Program key, ìë
Proof tray, å
Punch kit, å, ìåë
Punch Waste, ìéé
Punching, éé
ìê
O
OHP Slip Sheet, äç
On indicator, ë, ìë
Operation panel, ë, ìë
Operation switch, ë, ìê, ìæ
Options, æ
Original Beeper, çé
Original type, êä
Original Type key, ìê
Originals, ëí, êì
P
Panel display, ìë, ìé
Paper Designate, äé
Paper tray, ê
Paper tray unit, ê, æ, å, ìææ
Recalling A Program, çë
Recalling The Stored Images,
Reducing, çè
Remarks, ìçè
Right side cover, é
Rotate Sort, éè
Rotate Stack, éæ
ìíæ
S
SADF mode, êê
Safety Information, L
Selecting Copy Paper, éí
Selecting Original Type Setting,
Selection keys, ìê
Series Copies, åë
Shift Sort, éè
Shift Stack, éæ
Shift tray, å
Shortcut key, ìê
Sort, éè
Sorter key, ìë
SPECIFICATION, ìæì
Stack, éæ
Staple, éä
Start key, ìê
Stop, ìê
Storing The Images, ìíê
Storing Your Settings, çí
êä
T
Thin paper mode,
êè
ìåä
Toner,
ëæ
U
Unit for two-sided copies,
User Codes, çê
User Tools, ìéè
User Tools/Counter key,
V
Ventilation hole,
Z
Zoom, çæ
Zoom key,
ìäí
ìê
é
ë
ìë
USA (This information is for facsimile option users only.)
❖ FCC Requirements
1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the cover of this equipment is a label that
contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number
(REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company.
2. This equipment uses the following USOC jack: RJ11C
3. The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line.
Excessive REN's on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the REN's should not exceed five (5.0). Contact the
telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
4. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical,
the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your
right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
5. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures
that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide
advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted
service.
6. In the event of operation problems (document jam, copy jam, communication error indication), refer
to the solving problems section in this manual.
7. If you cannot correct the problem, please contact the RICOH CORP. CUSTOMER SUPPORT DEPT.
at 1-800-FASTFIX for repair and warranty information. If it is causing harm to the telephone network,
the telephone company may request you to disconnect the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.
8. This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to Party
Line Service is subject to state tariffs.
❖ WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS TO EMERGENCY NUMBERS:
1. Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up.
2. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning hours or late evenings.
CANADA (This information is for facsimile option users only.)
The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets
telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The department does not guarantee the
equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of
the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method
of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent
degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any
repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may
be particularly important in rural areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate
electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface
may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.
In accordance with ISO Standard 7001, this machine uses the followingsymbols for the main power switch:
a means POWER ON.
c means STAND BY.
Copyright © 1998 Ricoh Co., Ltd.
ERRATA
A mistake is found on the inside front cover of this
operating instructions and should be corrected as
follows:
Incorrect
Power Source:
120 V, 60 Hz, 10 A or more
Correct
Power Source:
120 V, 60 Hz, 12 A or more
Printed in China
A2328650
RICOH COMPANY, LTD.
15-5, 1 chome, Minami-Aoyama,
Minato-ku, Tokyo
Telephone: Tokyo 3479-3111
U.S.A.
RICOH CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006
(TEL) 973-882-2000
Spain
RICOH ESPAÑA S.A.
Guitard, 45
08014 Barcelona
(TEL) 490-09-60
Netherlands
RICOH EUROPE B.V.
Groenelaan 3 P.O. Box 114
1180 AC - Amstelveen Holland
(TEL) 020-5474111
Italy
RICOH ITALIA S.p.A.
Via della Metallurgia, 12
(zona Basson) - 37139 VERONA
(TEL) 045-851 00 44
United Kingdom
RICOH U.K. LTD.
Ricoh House
1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham,
Middlesex, TW13 7HG
(TEL) 181-261-4000
Hong Kong
RICOH HONG KONG LTD.
23/F., China Overseas Building,
139, Hennessy Road,
Wan Chai, Hong Kong
(TEL) 2862-2888
Germany
RICOH DEUTSCHLAND GMBH
Mergenthalerallee 38-40,
65760 Eschborn
(TEL) (06196) 906-0
France
RICOH FRANCE S.A.
383 Avenue du Général de Gaulle,
B.P. 307, 92143 Clamart Cedex
(TEL) 01-4094-3838
Singapore
RICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
#15-01/02 The Heeren,
260 Orchard Road,
Singapore 238855
(TEL) 65-830-5888
Printed in China
UE USA A2318607
340/350/450 Operating Instructions
Overseas Affiliates
FAX Option Type 450
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
FACSIMILE REFERENCE (option)
ND0A0101
Read this manual carefully before you use this manual and keep it handy for future
reference. For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.
Available Options
•
Stamp Unit (FAX Stamp Type 450)
•
Fax Feature Expander (FAX Feature Expander Type 450)
•
130MB Hard Disk (FAX Feature Expander Type 460)
•
400 dpi Option (FAX 400dpi Option Type 450)
•
ISDN Unit (ISDN Option Type 450)
•
Handset (Handset Type 450)
Supplies
•
Marker Ink (Maker Type 30 is recommended for the best performance.)
NOTICE
R CAUTION:
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Shielded interconnect cables must be employed with this equipment to ensure
compliance with the pertinent RF emission limits governing this device.
Although this equipment can use either loop disconnect or DTMF signalling,
only the performance of the DTMF signalling is subject to regulatory requirements for correct operation. It is therefore strongly recommended that the equipment is set to use DTMF signalling for access to public or private emergency
services. DTMF signalling also provides faster call set up.
Direct (or indirect reflected eye contact with the laser beam may cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and interlock mechanisms have been designed to prevent any
possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
Note
❒ Some illustrations may be slightly different from your machine.
❒ Certain options may not be available in some countries. For details, please
contact your local dealer.
- Notice about the Telephone Consumer Protection Act (Valid in USA
only).
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 among other things makes it
unlawful for any person to send any message via a telephone fax machine unless
such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and
an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the
message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business,
other entity or individual. This information is transmitted with your document
by the TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification) feature. The telephone number
provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission charges. In order for you to meet the requirement, your machine must be programmed by following the instructions in
the accompanying Operation Manual. In particular, please refer to the chapter
of Installation. Also refer to the TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification) programming procedure to enter the business identification and telephone number of the
terminal or business. Do not forget to set the date and time.
Thank you.
i
- ENERGY SAVING INFORMATION
As an Energy Star Partner, we have determined that this fax model meets Energy Star guidelines for energy efficiency. This product was designed to reduce the
environmental impact associated with fax equipment. This is accomplished by
means of energy saving features such as Low Power mode. Please see applicable
sections of operating instructions for details.
M001
Note to users in the United States of America
- Notice:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help.
ii
- Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
iii
FUNCTION MAP
[ Mode ]
01
09
02
10
Delete
03
11
Print
04
12
Check
1
05
06
07
08
iv
2
[ Info. ]
09
1
Select the file
10
Delete
11
Print
12
Check
1
3
7
4
8
5
2
3
6
2
ND0X01E7
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FUNCTION MAP
1. Getting Started
GUIDE TO COMPONENTS ........................................................................ 1
Front View ..................................................................................................... 1
Rear View...................................................................................................... 2
OPERATION PANEL .................................................................................. 4
STARTING THE MACHINE ........................................................................ 7
Turning On The Power.................................................................................. 7
Turning Off The Power.................................................................................. 8
SWITCHING BETWEEN COPY MODE AND FAX MODE ......................... 9
READING THE DISPLAY ......................................................................... 10
Standby Display .......................................................................................... 10
Communication Display .............................................................................. 10
Display Prompts .......................................................................................... 11
USEFUL FUNCTIONS .............................................................................. 12
Automatic Power Reception Function ......................................................... 12
Dual Access ................................................................................................ 12
Personal Code Access ................................................................................ 12
Transmission With Image Rotation ............................................................. 12
ACCEPTABLE TYPES OF ORIGINALS .................................................. 14
Acceptable Original Sizes ........................................................................... 14
Original Sizes Difficult to Detect .................................................................. 15
Paper Size and Scanned Area.................................................................... 16
HOW TO SET AN ORIGINAL ................................................................... 18
Setting a Single Original on the Exposure Glass ........................................ 19
Setting Originals in the Document Feeder (ADF)........................................ 20
WHERE INCOMING MESSAGE ARE DELIVERED—OUTPUT TRAY ... 22
When the Selected Output Tray Becomes Full ........................................... 22
When the Finisher is Installed ..................................................................... 22
2. Sending a Fax Message
OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................
Overview .....................................................................................................
MEMORY TRANSMISSION......................................................................
Memory Storage Report..............................................................................
Transmission Result Report (Memory Transmission) .................................
Communication Failure Report ...................................................................
CANCELING A MEMORY TRANSMISSION............................................
Canceling a Transmission While the Original Is Being Scanned in ............
Canceling a Transmission While the Message is Being Sent .....................
vi
23
23
24
28
29
29
30
30
30
IMMEDIATE TRANSMISSION..................................................................
Transmission Result Report (Immediate Transmission) .............................
On-hook Dial ...............................................................................................
Manual Dial .................................................................................................
CANCELING AN IMMEDIATE TRANSMISSION .....................................
Canceling a Transmission Before You Have Pressed Start........................
Canceling a Transmission After You Have Pressed the Start Key .............
SCAN SETTINGS .....................................................................................
Resolution ...................................................................................................
Original Type...............................................................................................
Image Density (Contrast) ............................................................................
Mixing Scan Settings in a Multiple Page Original........................................
CHANGING LINE TYPE ...........................................................................
DIALING....................................................................................................
Number Keys ..............................................................................................
Quick Dials ..................................................................................................
Speed Dials .................................................................................................
Groups ........................................................................................................
Optional Group Dial ....................................................................................
Redial ..........................................................................................................
TRANSMISSION FEATURES...................................................................
Stamp..........................................................................................................
ID Transmission ..........................................................................................
F Code (SUB)..............................................................................................
F Code (PWD).............................................................................................
JBIG Transmission ......................................................................................
32
33
34
35
36
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
41
43
43
46
47
48
49
50
52
52
52
53
54
54
3. Receiving a Fax Message
IMMEDIATE RECEPTION ........................................................................
MEMORY RECEPTION ............................................................................
Substitute Reception...............................................................................
Screening messages from anonymous senders .........................................
SELECTING THE RECEPTION MODE ....................................................
Fax Mode (Auto Reception Mode) ..............................................................
Telephone Mode .........................................................................................
RECEPTION FUNCTIONS........................................................................
Transfer Station...........................................................................................
Transfer Result Report................................................................................
ID Reception ...............................................................................................
F Code (SEP)..............................................................................................
F Code (PWD).............................................................................................
JBIG Reception ...........................................................................................
PRINTING FUNCTIONS ...........................................................................
Print Completion Beep ................................................................................
55
56
57
57
59
59
59
60
60
61
61
61
63
63
64
64
vii
Checkered Mark .......................................................................................... 64
Center Mark ................................................................................................ 64
Reception Time ........................................................................................... 64
Multi-copy Reception................................................................................... 65
2-Sided Printing........................................................................................... 65
180 Degree Rotation Printing...................................................................... 66
Image Rotation............................................................................................ 67
Two In One.................................................................................................. 67
Page Separation and Length Reduction (not available in some countries) 67
Reverse Order Printing ............................................................................... 68
Page Reduction........................................................................................... 68
TSI Print ...................................................................................................... 69
CIL/TID Print ............................................................................................... 69
When There is No Paper of the Correct Size.............................................. 69
Having Incoming Messages Printed on Paper From the Bypass Tray........ 72
4. Advanced Transmission Features
OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 73
Overview ..................................................................................................... 73
SEND LATER............................................................................................ 74
CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION ........................................................... 76
PERSONAL CODE TRANSMISSION....................................................... 78
SENDING AN AUTO DOCUMENT ........................................................... 80
2-SIDED TRANSMISSION (DOUBLE-SIDED TRANSMISSION) ............ 82
BOOK FAX................................................................................................ 84
Bound Original Page Order......................................................................... 85
CHOOSING THE AREA TO BE SCANNED YOURSELF (IRREGULAR
SCAN AREA) ............................................................................................ 86
TRANSMISSION DEADLINE (TRD)......................................................... 88
POLLING TRANSMISSION ...................................................................... 90
Polling Transmission Clear Report.............................................................. 92
POLLING RECEPTION............................................................................. 94
Polling Reserve Report ............................................................................... 95
Polling Result Report .................................................................................. 95
TRANSFER REQUEST............................................................................. 96
Specifying an End Receiver ........................................................................ 98
TRANSMISSION OPTIONS...................................................................... 99
Selecting Transmission Options for a Single Transmission ...................... 100
5. Communication Information
CHECKING AND CANCELING TRANSMISSION FILES ...................... 103
Canceling a Transmission......................................................................... 103
viii
Printing a File ............................................................................................ 104
Checking and Editing a File ...................................................................... 105
PRINTING A LIST OF FILES IN MEMORY (PRINT TX FILE LIST).......
CHECKING THE TRANSMISSION RESULT (TX STATUS)..................
CHECKING THE RECEPTION RESULT (RX STATUS) ........................
PRINTING A CONFIDENTIAL MESSAGE .............................................
Confidential File Report.............................................................................
PRINTING A FILE RECEIVED WITH MEMORY LOCK .........................
PRINTING THE TCR...............................................................................
DISPLAYING THE MEMORY STATUS..................................................
109
110
111
112
113
114
116
117
6. Troubleshooting
WHEN TONER RUNS OUT ....................................................................
ERROR MESSAGES AND THEIR MEANINGS .....................................
SOLVING PROBLEMS ...........................................................................
INDICATORS ..........................................................................................
When the Receive File Indicator is Lit or Flashing ..................................
When the Confidential File Indicator is Lit...............................................
} key is Lit in Red...............................................................
When the {Fax}
WHEN AN ERROR REPORT IS PRINTED ............................................
WHEN POWER IS TURNED OFF OR FAILS.........................................
119
120
121
123
123
124
124
125
126
7. Facsimile User Tools
ACCESSING THE USER TOOLS...........................................................
Exiting User Tool mode.............................................................................
REGISTER/DELETE MENU ...................................................................
Registering Quick Dials .............................................................................
Deleting Quick Dials ..................................................................................
Quick Dial Key and Function Key Label (Dial label)..................................
Registering Groups ...................................................................................
Deleting Groups ........................................................................................
Registering Optional Groups .....................................................................
Deleting Optional Groups ..........................................................................
Registering Speed Dials............................................................................
Deleting Speed Dials.................................................................................
Storing Keystroke Programs .....................................................................
Deleting a Keystroke Program ..................................................................
Registering Auto Documents ....................................................................
Deleting an Auto Document ......................................................................
Registering Irregular Area .........................................................................
Deleting an Irregular Area .........................................................................
REPORTS/LISTS ....................................................................................
127
128
129
129
131
132
135
137
139
142
143
145
147
150
151
153
154
156
158
ix
INITIAL SETUP TX .................................................................................
INITIAL SETUP RX .................................................................................
To set the Bypass Paper Size...................................................................
ASSIGNING USER FUNCTION KEYS ...................................................
Storing/Editing the Contents of a User Function Key ................................
Using a User Function...............................................................................
KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS.................................................................
Personal Codes.........................................................................................
ECM ..........................................................................................................
Memory Lock.............................................................................................
Multistep Transfer .....................................................................................
Forwarding ................................................................................................
Special Senders to Treat Differently (Special RX Nos.)............................
Authorized Reception................................................................................
Monitor Volume .........................................................................................
RTI/TTI ......................................................................................................
Registering The Economy Transmission Time ........................................
ID Code .....................................................................................................
G3 Analog Line .........................................................................................
G3 Digital Line...........................................................................................
G4 Digital Line...........................................................................................
Changing the User Parameters.................................................................
Date/Time..................................................................................................
Summer Time............................................................................................
Counters....................................................................................................
Auto Reset ................................................................................................
Paper Feed Selection................................................................................
RDS (Remote Diagnostic System)............................................................
159
161
162
164
164
165
166
166
171
172
173
175
182
188
192
193
195
196
198
199
200
203
208
209
209
210
211
211
8. Entering Text
ENTERING AND MODIFYING TEXT......................................................
Available Characters .................................................................................
Keys ..........................................................................................................
How To Enter Text ....................................................................................
213
213
213
214
9. Maintaining Your Machine
CONNECTING THE MACHINE TO A TELEPHONE LINE AND TELEPHONE... 217
Connecting The Telephone Line ............................................................... 217
Connecting The Machine To The ISDN .................................................... 218
Connecting The Optional External Telephone .......................................... 218
Selecting The Line Type ........................................................................... 219
REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE ............................................... 220
Stamp Cover Layout ................................................................................. 221
x
10.Appendix
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT........................................................................
Fax Feature Expander and Hard Disk.......................................................
400 dpi High Resolution Option (FAX 400dpi Option Type 450)...............
ISDN Unit (ISDN Option Type 450)...........................................................
Stamp (FAX STAMP TYPE 450)...............................................................
Duplex Unit (AD340) .................................................................................
SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................
FUNCTION LIST .....................................................................................
Advanced Transmission Features.............................................................
Communication Information ......................................................................
User Tools.................................................................................................
223
223
224
224
224
224
225
226
226
228
229
INDEX...................................................................................................... 234
xi
This page is intentionally blank.
xii
1. Getting Started
GUIDE TO COMPONENTS
Front View
6
7
1
2
Main
Power
On
3
8
4
5
ND0A02E4
1. Document Feeder (ADF) / Platen
Cover
This holds up to 50 sheets which are fed
at a time. Place the document face up
here. Close this platen cover when you
set a document on the Exposure Glass.
3. Internal Tray
Usually received fax messages are printed to the Internal Tray. Other tray can
also be selected for other prints or copies.
See “Changing the Machine's Settings” of
the System Settings.
2. Exposure Glass
Place the original aligning its upper left
corner with the reference mark at the upper left corner of the exposure glass.
1
GETTING STARTED
4. ISDN Line connector⇒ P.218
6. Optional Handset
“Connecting The Machine To The ISDN”
This permits voice communication.
5. Main Power Switch
1
Do not touch this switch. This switch is
used only by a service representative.
Note
❒ If the Operation switch is on and there
is still no power, turn on the Main
Power switch.
❒ If you leave the Main Power off for
more than about an hour, all files in
memory are lost.
7. Operation Switch
Press this switch to turn the power on
(the On indicator lights up). To turn the
power off, press this switch again (the On
indicator goes off).⇒ P.7 “Turning On The
Power”, P.12 “Automatic Power Reception
Function”,P.126 “WHEN POWER IS
TURNED OFF OR FAILS”
8. Optional Upper Tray
This tray can also be selected for other
prints or copies.
Rear View
2
3
1
ND8A01E4
1. Bypass Tray
Select this tray to use non-standard size
paper.
2
See P.18 “HOW TO SET AN ORIGINAL”
in the Copy Reference.
GUIDE TO COMPONENTS
2. Analog Line Connector
3. Optional Handset/External Telephone connector
1
3
GETTING STARTED
OPERATION PANEL
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Sort
1-Sided
11
Communicating
Start
Manual RX
F1
TX File
Status
F2
Standard
Confidential
File
TEL
Mode
F3
Detail
Super Fine
F4
Immediate
Trans.
Memory
Trans.
02
03
04
05
06
07
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
08
01
10
11
12
13
14
N
H
I
J
K
L
M
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
23
W
24
25
26
X
Y
Z
27
28
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
User Tools / Counter
2
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
Copy
Lights during transmission or reception.
2. Receive File Indicator
Lights to tell you a message has been received into memory. Blinks when a
Memory Lock file has been stored in
memory. Note that this indicator does
not inform you of a Confidential reception.
3. Confidential File Indicator
Lights when a message has been received
into memory with Confidential Reception. ⇒ P.112 “PRINTING A CONFIDENTIAL MESSAGE”
4. User Function keys
Each of these can be programmed for
rapid access to frequently used features.
Fax
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
15
1. Communicating Indicator
4
9
F5
01
22
14
Receive
File
8
7
*
Text . Photo
Photo
Special Orig.
Lighter
17
16
❖ Features Programmed by Default
Key
Standard
With ISDN or
stamp options
F1
Start Manual
RX
←
F2
Transmission ←
Result Display
F3
TEL Mode
←
F4
-
ISDN selection
F5
-
Stamp
Darker
18
Auto Image Density
19 20 21
OPERATION PANEL
9 10 11
Program
12
Clear Modes /
Energy Saver
C
1
13
Interrupt
Main
Power
On
Speed Dial
On Hook Dial
Pause /
Redial
1
2
3
ABC
DEF
4
5
6
GHI
JKL
MNO
7
8
9
PRS
TUV
Clear / Stop
C
Start
WXY
Enter
Auto Image Density
0
Tone
OPER
19 20 21 22
23
24 25
ND2A10E2
5. Resolution key
9. {Speed Dial}} key
Press to switch between Standard, Detail
and Super Fine (optional 400dpi Option
required).
Press to select a Speed Dial.
6. Transmission Mode key
Press the key to toggle between Memory
Transmission (Memory Trans.) and Immediate
Transmission
(Immediate
Trans.) modes.
7. {User Tools/Counter}} key
Press to enter User Tools mode. These
tools allow you to customize the default
settings.
8. LCD display
This guides you through tasks and informs you of the machine status. Messages appear here.
10. {On Hook Dial}} key
Use for making a phone call from the
keypad. You do not have to lift the handset.
11. {Program}} key
This key is used in Copier mode.
12. {Clear Modes/Energy Saver}} key
Energy saver:
Hold down for more than a second to enter energy saving mode.
Clear Modes:
Cancels the current setting and returns to
standby with a single keystroke.
5
GETTING STARTED
1
13. {Interrupt}} key
23. Number keys
Interrupts the current fax operation to
start copying.
Use to dial fax numbers or enter the number of copies.
14. Quick Dial Flip Plate
24. {Start}} key
Flip this plate down to access Quick Dial
keys 01 through 28, flip up to access keys
29 through 56.
Press to start all tasks.
15. Quick Dial keys
Use to dial numbers at a single touch or
to enter letters and symbols. Also use for
Group Dial, Keystroke and Program features.
16. {Fax}} key
Press to switch to fax mode. It lights in
red if the optional Facsimile unit has
problem, there is a communication error
or there is no paper in the cassette .⇒
P.124 “When the {Fax} key is Lit in Red”
17. {Original Type}} key
Use when sending a halftone image such
as a photograph or a color original.
18. {Lighter}} and {Darker}} keys and
{Auto Image Density}
} key
Press this key to adjust the density.
19. {Selection}} keys
Press the key under the item you wish to
select.
20. < > keys
Press to move the cursor or select functions
21. {Pause/Redial}} key
Pause:
Inserts a pause when you are dialing or
storing a fax number. A pause cannot be
inserted as the first digit.
Redial:
Press to redial one of the last ten numbers.
22. {Tone}} key
Press to send tonal signals down a pulse
dialing line.
6
25. {Clear/Stop}} key
Clear:
Deletes one character or digit
Stop:
Interrupts the current operation (transmission, scanning, copying or printing).
STARTING THE MACHINE
STARTING THE MACHINE
To start the machine, turn on the operation switch.
Note
❒ This machine automatically enters
Energy Saver mode or turns itself
off if you do not use the machine
for a while. See “09. Energy Saver
Mode”, “10. Auto Off Timer” of
the System Settings.
B Turn on the operation switch to
1
make the On indicator light up.
The panel display will come on.
Main
Power
On
top
- Power switches
This machine has two power switches: See P.1 “GUIDE TO COMPONENTS”
❖ Operation switch
Turn on this switch to activate the
machine. When the machine has
warmed up, you can make copies
or send faxes.
❖ Main power switch
Do not touch the main power
switch. It should be used only by a
service representative when the
optional fax unit is installed.
Important
❒ If you leave the main power switch
off for more than one hour, all files
in memory are lost. See “Turning
Off The Power” below.
ND1M01E0
Note
❒ If nothing happens when you
turn on the operation switch,
check if the main power switch
is turned on.
❒ During the warm-up period,
you can use the Auto Start function. See “10. Auto Start” of the
Copy Reference.
❒ Warming-up time is as follows.
• 35 copy per minute model :
less than 85 seconds
• 45 copy per minute model :
less than 100 seconds
Turning On The Power
A Make sure that the power cord is
plugged into the wall outlet firmly and Main Power Switch is on.
7
GETTING STARTED
Turning Off The Power
A Turn off the operation switch to
1
make the On indicator go off.
Main
Power
On
top
ND1M01E0
Important
❒ Before you unplug the power
cord, make sure that the remaining memory space indicates 100 % on the display for
facsimile mode.
❒ Files stored in memory will be
lost an hour after you turn the
main power switch off or you
unplug the power cord. ⇒ P.126
“WHEN POWER IS TURNED
OFF OR FAILS”
8
SWITCHING BETWEEN COPY MODE AND FAX MODE
SWITCHING BETWEEN COPY MODE AND
FAX MODE
1
You can use this machine both as a fax machine and a copier. Ordinarily when
you turn on the power switch, the Copy screen is shown and you are ready to
make copies. When you wish to use fax functions, press the {Fax}
} key on the left
of the operation panel.
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
Copy Mode
Copy
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
Fax
Facsimile Mode
ND0X02E0
Limitation
❒ You cannot switch modes under the following circumstances:
•
•
•
•
•
While scanning in a fax
During Immediate Transmission
While editing the System Settings
During Interrupt Copying
While using On-hook Dial
9
GETTING STARTED
READING THE DISPLAY
The display tells you the machine status and guides you through operations.
1
Note
❒ Functions that have been selected
are hilighted as shown ( 11 17 ).
Keys that you can not select are
shown with a dashed outline
(
).
❒ All procedures in this manual assume you are in Fax mode. By default, when you turn the machine
on it is in Copy mode. Press the
{Fax}
} key change to Fax mode.
You can have the machine start in
Fax mode. See “Changing the Machine's Settings” of the System Settings.
Standby Display
While the machine is in the standby
mode (immediately after it is turned
on or after the {Clear Modes/Energy Sav} key is pressed), the following diser}
play is shown.
❖ Memory Transmission
❖ Immediate Transmission
Note
❒ To return the machine to standby
mode, perform one of the following:
• If you have set an original and
are in the sending process, remove the original.
• If you have not set an original
and are in the sending process,
press the {Clear modes/Energy
} key.
saver}
• If you are in User Tools mode,
press the {User Tools}
} key.
Communication Display
While the machine is communicating
the status is displayed.
❖ Display during Memory Transmission
or Memory Reception:
Note
❒ Even when the machine is sending
or receiving a fax message from/
10
READING THE DISPLAY
into memory, you can still scan the
next original into memory. ⇒ P.12
“Dual Access”
❖ Immediate Transmission:
1
Display Prompts
Depending on the situation, the machine will show various prompts on
the display.
❖ Instructions and Requests
❖ Questions
❖ Selections
❖ Status
11
GETTING STARTED
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
Automatic Power Reception
Function
1
This machine can be set to shut down
automatically if nobody has used the
machine for a while. In these situations even through the operation
switch is off, the machine can still receive incoming messages as long as
the Main Power switch is on.
Important
❒ Reception is not possible if both
the operation switch and Main
Power switch are turned off.
Note
❒ By default, messages are printed as
soon as they are received (Immediate Reception). To change this, see
P.203 “Changing the User Parameters”
Dual Access
The machine can scan other messages
into memory even while sending a
fax message from memory, receiving
a message into memory , or automatically printing a report. Since the machine starts sending the second
message immediately after the current transmission terminates, the line
will be used efficiently.
Note that during Immediate Transmission or when in User Tools mode,
the machine cannot scan an original.
Personal Code Access
The machine can be set up so that nobody can use it without entering a
12
personal code. This prevents unauthorized people from sending fax
messages and can be used to track Fax
machine use by giving a personal
code to each user.
Note
❒ Register personal codes and turn
Personal Code Access on. The default setting is off. ⇒ P.166 “Registering Personal Codes”, P.169
“Personal Code Access”
❒ Even if Restricted Access is enabled, the machine can receive and
print a fax message.
A If Personal Code Access is turned
on, the display is shown as following:
B Enter
a personal code (4-digit
number) using the number keys.
Note
❒ If a user enters a personal code
that is not registered, the machine returns to step 1.
Transmission With Image
Rotation
For most purposes, set A4/LT originals in the lengthwise direction (L).
If you set an A4/LT original in the
sideways direction (K), the image
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
will be sent rotated by 90°. Providing
the receiver has A4/LT lengthwise
paper (L), the message will be printed the same size as the original.
1
Limitation
❒ The Quick Memory Transmission
feature is not available when using
this feature.
❒ When Image Rotation is used, all
messages are sent by normal Memory Transmission.
13
GETTING STARTED
ACCEPTABLE TYPES OF ORIGINALS
Make sure your originals are completely dry before setting them in the machine.
Originals containing wet ink or correcting fluid will mark the exposure glass and
resulting image will be affected.
1
Acceptable Original Sizes
Where original is
set
Acceptable original size Maximum
number of
sheets
Paper thickness
Exposure glass
Maximum A3 (297 × 420 1
mm), 11" × 17" (279 × 432
mm)
----
Document Feeder
(ADF) Single Sided
Document
Fax transmission: A5 L 50
to A3 L (up to 432mm
long) 8" × 51/2" L to 11"
× 17" (DLT) L
52 - 128 g/m2 (14 - 34lb
in inch version)
Document Feeder
(ADF) Double-Sided Document
Fax transmission: A5 L 50
to A3 L (up to 432mm
long) 8" × 51/2" L to 11"
× 17" (DLT) L
52 - 105 g/m2 (14 - 28lb
in inch version)
Limitation
❒ When using 2–sided transmission, A5K and HLTK cannot be available.
Originals Unsuitable for the Document Feeder (ADF)
Do not set the following types of originals in the Document Feeder (ADF) because they may be damaged. Place them on the exposure glass instead.
• Originals of sizes other than those specified in the previous table
• Originals containing staples or clips
• Perforated or torn originals
• Curled, folded, or creased originals
• Pasted originals
• Originals with any kind of coating, such as thermosensitive paper, art paper,
aluminum foil, carbon paper, or conductive paper
• Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts
• Sticky originals such as translucent paper
• Thin and soft originals
• Originals of inappropriate weight (see table above)
14
ACCEPTABLE TYPES OF ORIGINALS
• Originals in bound form, such as books
• Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper
Original Sizes Difficult to Detect
1
The machine finds it difficult to detect the size of the following kinds of originals. If this happens, the receiving machine may not select print paper of the correct size. ⇒ P.17 “If the Machine Cannot Detect the Size of Your Original”
• Document size other than the following (set on the exposure glass).
• Originals with indexes, tags, or projecting parts
• Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper
• Dark originals with many characters or drawings
• Originals which partially contain solid printing
• Originals which have solid printing at their edges
The following paper sizes are automatically detected in Fax mode.
❖ Inch Version
Paper size
Exposure glass
Document Feeder (ADF)
Where original is placed
11" × 17" L
Ο
Ο
8 1/2" × 14"L
Ο
Ο
8 1/2" × 11" K L
Ο
Ο
5 1/2" × 8 1/2" K L
×
Ο
10" × 14" L
Ο
Ο
8 1/2" × 13" L
Ο
Ο
8 × 10" K
Ο
Ο
Limitation
❒ A5 and HLT sizes are not available for 2-sided Transmission.
15
GETTING STARTED
Paper Size and Scanned Area
❖ Exposure glass
1
Reference
position
A3
Horizontal size
Vertical size
Maximum Scanning area
A3
(297x420mm)
11"x17"
(279x432mm)
A4 A3
CP01AEE0
❖ Document Feeder (ADF)
Horizontal size
Vertical size
Maximum Scanning area
(297x432mm)
A4 A3
CP02AEE1
Limitation
❒ There may be a difference in the size of the image when it is printed at the destination.
❒ If you set an original larger than DLT/A3 on the exposure glass, only the
DLT/A3 area is scanned.
Note
❒ Even if an original is correctly placed on the exposure glass or in the Document Feeder (ADF), a margin of 3 mm around each edge of the original may
not be sent.
❒ If the receiver uses paper narrower than the original, the image will be reduced to fit the paper width. ⇒ P.99 “Auto Reduction”
❒ The machine detects paper sizes in the following ways.
• When you set an original in the Document Feeder (ADF), an original wider
than about 7.48” is scanned as LT/LG size wide. An original wider than
about 10.37” is scanned as DLT size. Originals narrower than 9.05” will be
sent as LT/LG size. You can scan in originals of up to 17” in length.
16
ACCEPTABLE TYPES OF ORIGINALS
• When you set an original on the exposure glass, an original narrower than
about 9.25” is scanned as LT/LG size wide. An original wider than 10.83”
is scanned as DLT size wide. Normally, lengths up to a maximum of 17”
can be scanned (this figure varies slightly depending on the type of original). If you select Irregular Scan Area, lengths up to 17” are possible.
1
Length
∼"9.80
"9.80∼"10.79
"10.79∼"12.44
"12.44∼
∼"9.57
not detected
LTL
LTL
LGL
"10.55∼
LTK
DLTL
DLTL
DLTL
width
- Maximum Scan Area
Memory Transmission/Immediate Transmission
• From the Document Feeder (ADF): 297 × 432 mm (W × L)
• From the exposure glass : 297 × 432 mm (W × L)
If the Machine Cannot Detect the Size of Your Original
If the machine cannot detect the original size, the following display is shown:
If this happens, carry out the following steps.
A Remove the original and replace it on the exposure glass. Press the {Start}}
key to scan the original again. If the machine still cannot detect the original
size, the following display is shown:
B Press the < and > keys to switch the scan size and press the {Start}}
key
again.
17
GETTING STARTED
HOW TO SET AN ORIGINAL
In this manual an original can mean a single or multiple page document. You
can set your originals either in the Document Feeder (ADF) or on the exposure
glass. Some types of originals are unsuitable for the Document Feeder (ADF) so
they must be set on the exposure glass. ⇒ P.14 “ACCEPTABLE TYPES OF ORIGINALS”
Which way you place your original depends on its size and whether you are using the Document Feeder (ADF) or the exposure glass.
1
Limitation
❒ If you set A5 size documents on the exposure glass, they will not be detected.
Note
❒ When sending a fax, the image output at the other end depends on the size
and direction of paper used in the receiver's terminal. If the receiver does not
use paper of the same size and direction as that of the original, the fax image
may be output reduced, trimmed at the both edges, or divided into two or
more sheets. When sending an important original, we recommend you to ask
the receiver about the size and direction of the paper used in their terminal.
❒ When sending an original of an irregular (i.e. non-standard) size or part of a
large original, you can specify the scan area precisely. ⇒ P.86 “CHOOSING
THE AREA TO BE SCANNED YOURSELF (IRREGULAR SCAN AREA)”
❒ You can scan non-standard sized documents as standard sized documents
with the Irregular Scan Area feature. When you turn on this feature, the area
scanned will be in the specified range regardless of the actual document size.
A blank margin will appear or the image will be truncated at the receiving
end.
❒ Make sure that all ink, correcting fluid etc., has completely dried before setting your original. If it is still wet, the contact glass will be marked and those
marks will appear on the received image.
❒ If you set an A4 size original in the sideways direction, the machine rotates
the image by 90 degrees before sending it. ⇒ P.12 “Transmission With Image
Rotation”
18
HOW TO SET AN ORIGINAL
- How to set A4, B4, A3, LT, LG and DLT size originals
Original
Where original is set
Exposure glass
Document Feeder(ADF)
1
ND0X01E2
- How to set A4, A5 and B5 size originals
Original
Where original is set
Exposure glass
Document Feeder(ADF)
ND0X01E1
Limitation
❒ A5 size on the exposure glass is not detected.
Setting a Single Original on
the Exposure Glass
1
Set originals that cannot be placed in
the Document Feeder (ADF) such as a
book on the exposure glass one page
at a time.
A Lift the Document Feeder (ADF)
by at least 30 degrees. Place the
original face down and align its
upper left corner with the reference mark at the upper left corner
of the exposure glass.
2
ND1C01E0
1. Reference mark
2. Scale
19
GETTING STARTED
Note
❒ If you do not raise the Document Feeder (ADF) by at least
30 degrees, the original size will
not be detected.
1
B Close
the
Document
Feeder
(ADF).
Note
❒ When sending a bound original,
the received image may contain
some black areas. To reduce this
effect, hold down the original to
prevent its bound part from rising.
- Bound Original Page Order
When sending bound originals
(books, magazines, etc.), you can
choose to have either the left page or
right page sent first.
Note
❒ The default setting is Send Left
Page First. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the
User Parameters”
Setting Originals in the
Document Feeder (ADF)
Use the Document Feeder (ADF) to
scan in a stack of originals in one operation. The Document Feeder (ADF)
can handle both single-sided and
double-sided originals.
Limitation
❒ Place all the originals to be sent in
a single stack.
❒ You cannot set originals in the
Document Feeder (ADF) one page
at a time or in sheaves.
20
❒ Do not open the Document Feeder
(ADF) while it is scanning the originals. Otherwise, document will be
jammed.
❒ You cannot scan the original using
the Document Feeder (ADF), Scanning is not possible if there are any
documents left on the exposure
glass. Remove any remaining documents from the exposure glass
before you begin.
Original is on exposure glass.
Remove original.
OK
ND0X04E1
Note
❒ If an original jams, press the {Clear/
} key then remove the original
Stop}
carefully.
❒ If your original is bent or folded,
flatten it before you set it.
❒ Set thin originals on the exposure
glass.
Reference
For information about the sizes
and number of originals that can
be placed in the Document Feeder
(ADF), see P.14 “ACCEPTABLE
TYPES OF ORIGINALS”.
HOW TO SET AN ORIGINAL
A Adjust
the original guide to
match the size of your originals.
Align the edge of your originals
and stack them in the Document
Feeder (ADF) face up.
Feeder (ADF) with this function
turned off, a paper jam may occur.
1
- Destination Tray for Originals
Scanned From the Document
Feeder (ADF)
1
You can have originals scanned in
from the Document Feeder (ADF) either delivered to the Document Feeder Tray, or the External Tray.
2
1
2
ND1X02E5
1. Limit mark
2. Document guide
ND1D04E0
- Scanning In Mixed Sized
Originals
1. ADF tray
2. ADF external tray
If you wish to scan in stacks of originals containing mixed paper sizes
from Document Feeder (ADF), you
can have the machine automatically
detect the size of each original.
Note
❒ If you select the ADF external tray,
you cannot use the Stamp feature.
Note
❒ By default this feature is turned
off. To turn it on, adjust the User
Parameters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the
User Parameters”
❒ To choose which tray is used, edit
the Output Tray setting in the System Settings. See “USER TOOLS”
of the System Settings.
❒ Scanning may take slightly longer
when this function is turned on.
❒ Small originals may be sent at a
slight slant if they are not stacked
flush against the Document Feeder
(ADF) document guides.
❒ If you try and set a stack of mixed
size originals in the Document
21
GETTING STARTED
WHERE INCOMING MESSAGE ARE
DELIVERED—OUTPUT TRAY
1
To change where incoming messages
are delivered, adjust the Output Tray
setting in the System Settings.
When the Selected Output
Tray Becomes Full
If you install the optional Finisher, the
machine automatically detects when
the selected Output Tray becomes
full. When this happens, a warning
will appear on the display and the
message will be received using Substitute Reception. Messages received
this way will be automatically printed as soon as you empty the Output
Tray.
When the Finisher is Installed
You can use the Finisher for large capacity paper delivery and sort delivery.
Limitation
❒ When the optional 3000-sheet Finisher is installed and you set the
Output Tray to Internal Tray, received messages longer than 12.9”
(330mm) are delivered to the Finisher Proof Tray. For example, if
the first page sent is 8.5" × 11" L/
A4L and the following pages are
11" × 17" L/A3L, the first page
will be delivered to the Internal
Tray and the following pages to
the Finisher Proof Tray.
❒ If you have selected the optional
1000-sheet Finisher as the Output
Tray and a copy document longer
than 13.3” (340mm) is left in the
22
Finisher, incoming messages are
automatically delivered to the Internal Tray.
Note
❒ If you receive messages larger than
12.9” (330mm) on a regular basis,
we recommend that you choose an
Output Tray setting other than Internal Tray.
2. Sending a Fax Message
OVERVIEW
Overview
The basic procedure to send a fax message is:
A Make sure the Fax indicator is lit
B Set your original
C Dial the number
D Press {Start}
}
The rest of this section describes these steps and the various features that are
available in more detail.
There are two ways to send a fax message:
• Memory Transmission
• Immediate Transmission
Check the indicators on the operation panel to check which mode is currently active and press the Transmission Mode key to toggle between them.
23
SENDING A FAX MESSAGE
MEMORY TRANSMISSION
In Memory Transmission mode, after
you press the {Start}
} key, the machine
doesn't dial the destination until all
pages of your fax message have
scanned into memory (in contrast
with Immediate Transmission, where
the number is dialed first and pages
are scanned and sent one by one).
Memory Transmission is useful because:
• You can take your original away
from the machine without having
to wait too long
• While your message is being sent,
other people can operate the machine
• You can send the same message to
more than one place in a single operation (Broadcasting)
2
Important
❒ If there is a power failure (main
power switch is off) or the plug is
pulled out for more than 1 hour, all
the files stored in memory are deleted. As soon as power is restored,
the Power Failure Report is printed to help you identify deleted
files . If you turn just the operation
switch off, files are not deleted. ⇒
P.126
“WHEN
POWER
IS
TURNED OFF OR FAILS”
Limitation
❒ If memory is full (0% appears on
the display), Memory Transmission is disabled. Use Immediate
Transmission instead.
Note
❒ Maximum number of Memory
Transmission files: 200
24
❒ Maximum number of destinations
per Memory Transmission: 200
❒ Combined total number of destinations that can be stored: 500
❒ The number of pages that you can
store in memory depends on the
original images and the scan settings. You can store up to 160 standard pages (ITU-T No.1 chart,
Resolution: Standard, photo mode:
OFF).
❒ As default, the machine will return
to the default transmission mode
(Memory Transmission) after every transmission. You can change
this so that the current mode is
maintained. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the
User Parameters”
❒ You can expand the amount of
memory available for storing documents by installing either of the
following options:
• With optional Fax Feature Expander: Up to about 480 pages
• With optional Fax Feature Expander and the Hard Disk: Up
to about 3000 pages
A Make
sure that the Memory
Transmission indicator is lit.
Communicating
Start
Manual RX
F1
Receive
File
F2
Standard
Confidential
File
TEL
Mode
TX File
Status
F3
Detail
Super Fine
F4
Immediate
Trans.
Memory
Trans.
F5
ND2L03E1
If it isn't, press the {Transmission
Mode}
} key.
B Set the original.
Limitation
❒ You can send the first pages
from the exposure glass then
MEMORY TRANSMISSION
the remaining pages from the
Document Feeder (ADF). After
you place the last page on the
exposure glass, you have 60 seconds to insert the remaining
pages in the Document Feeder
(ADF).
❒ Note that you cannot set pages
on the exposure glass after you
have started using the Document Feeder (ADF).
❒ Do not open the Document
Feeder (ADF) while it is scanning in originals.
Note
❒ Place the original you want to
store in memory on the exposure glass or the Document
Feeder (ADF). To store multiple
page originals from the exposure glass, set them page by
page.
❒ You can scan half the pages of
your original from the exposure
glass and the remainder from
the Document Feeder (ADF).
When you have finished scanning from the exposure glass,
place the rest of the pages in the
Document Feeder (ADF) and
press{
{Start}
}.
❒ The original can be placed at
any time up until you press the
{Start}
} key.
Reference
P.18 “HOW TO SET AN ORIGINAL”
C Select
any scan settings you require. ⇒ P.37 “SCAN SETTINGS”
er destination. Repeat this step
for all destinations.
If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear/Stop}
} key and enter the correct number again.
2
Note
❒ When dialing with the number
keys or using Chain Dial (P.46
“Chain Dial”), you can select the
line type (G3 or G4) before
pressing [Add] in step 4.
❒ If you do not set an original
within 30 seconds of entering a
destination fax number, the
transmission is cancelled.
Reference
P.43 “DIALING”
E Press the {Start}} key.
d Dial
ook Dial
e/
al
1
2
3
ABC
DEF
4
5
6
GHI
JKL
MNO
7
8
9
PRS
TUV
WXY
Clear / Stop
C
Start
Enter
0
OPER
ND2R02E1
The machine starts scanning the
original.
The machine calls the destination.
The name or fax number which is
programmed as the RTI or CSI in
D Dial. If you wish to send the same
message to more than one destination, press [Add] and dial anoth-
25
SENDING A FAX MESSAGE
the other end is shown on the display.
Reference
P.193 “RTI/TTI”
2
After transmission, the machine
will return to standby mode.
- Sending a Fax Message
Immediately
To send a fax message immediately,
use Immediate Transmission. If you
have just set up an original for broadcasting, Immediate Transmission will
interrupt the current communication.
If there are files queued in addition to
the file being currently sent, your
original is not be sent until the
queued files have been sent.
- Automatic Redial
- Checking the Transmission
Result
• Turn the Transmission Result Report on if you want a report to be
printed after every successful
transmission. ⇒ P.24 “MEMORY
TRANSMISSION”
If you leave the Transmission Result Report off, the report will not
be printed after every transmission. However, should a transmission fail, a Communication Failure
Report will be printed instead.
• If you turn the Transmission Result Report (Memory Transmission) off, the Error Report will be
printed when the communication
on fails.
• You can also check the transmission result by examining the TCR.
⇒ P.116 “PRINTING THE TCR”
You can either print or scroll
through the TCR on the display. ⇒
P.110 “CHECKING THE TRANSMISSION RESULT (TX STATUS)”
26
If a fax message could not be transmitted because the line was busy or
an error occurred during transmission, redialing is done 4 times at 5
minutes intervals (these figures vary
according to which country you are
in).
If redialing fails after four redials, the
machine cancels the transmission and
prints the Transmission Result Report
or Communication Failure Report. ⇒
P.29 “Transmission Result Report
(Memory Transmission)”, P.29 “Communication Failure Report”, P.126
“WHEN POWER IS TURNED OFF
OR FAILS”
- Broadcasting Sequence
If you dial several destinations for the
same message (Broadcasting) the
messages are sent in the order in
which they were dialed. If the fax
message could not be transmitted, the
machine redials that destination after
the last destination specified for
Broadcasting. For example, if you
MEMORY TRANSMISSION
specify four destinations A through D
for broadcasting, and if the lines to
destinations A and C are busy, the
machine dials the destinations in the
following order: A, B, C, D, A, and C.
- Broadcasting: Checking
Progress
To check which destinations the fax
message has been sent to so far, print
the TX file list. ⇒ P.109 “PRINTING A
LIST OF FILES IN MEMORY (PRINT
TX FILE LIST)”
- If Memory Runs Out While
Storing an Original
If you run out of memory while storing an original (free space reaches
0%), “Memory full” is displayed.
Press Exit to transmit the stored pages
only.
- Batch Transmission
If you send a fax message by Memory
Transmission and there is another fax
message waiting in memory to be
sent to the same destination, that
message is sent along with your original. Several fax messages can be sent
with a single call, thus eliminating the
need for several separate calls. This
helps save communication costs and
reduce transmission time.
Fax messages for which the transmission time has been set in advance are
sent by batch transmission when that
time is reached.
2
Note
❒ By default Batch Transmission is
switched on. You can switch it on
or off with the User Parameters. ⇒
P.203 “Changing the User Parameters”
- ECM (Error Correction Mode)
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ By default, successfully scanned
pages are sent. If you wish to
change this setting, please contact
your service representative.
This feature automatically resends
data that wasn't transmitted successfully using a system that complies
with international standards.
ECM requires that the destination
machine has the same feature.
Note
❒ By default ECM is switched on.
You can change this with the Key
Operator Settings. ⇒ P.166 “KEY
OPERATOR SETTINGS”
27
SENDING A FAX MESSAGE
- Parallel Memory Transmission
This function dials while the original
is being scanned. Standard Memory
Transmission stores the original in
memory, then dials the destination.
Parallel Memory Transmission allows you to quickly determine
whether a connection was made. In
addition, this function scans the original faster than Immediate Transmission and is useful when you are in a
hurry and need to use the original for
another purpose.
2
Note
❒ By default this feature is turned on.
You can change this with the User
Parameters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the
User Parameters”
Limitation
❒ Standard Memory Transmission is
used instead of Parallel Memory
Transmission in the following cases.
• When the line is busy and could
not be connected to
• With Send Later
• With Transfer Request
• With 2-Sided Transmission
• When you store an original for
Memory Transmission while
another communication is in
progress
• When two or more destinations
are specified
• When you send just an Auto
Document
• When the original is set on the
exposure glass
• With the image rotation
28
❒ If you press the {Clear/Stop}
} key,
the original jams, or memory becomes full during Parallel Memory
Transmission, the machine stops
transmitting and prints the Transmission Result Report (Memory
Transmission). The file is erased.
❒ Total stored page numbers are not
printed in the Parallel Memory
Transmission. Only the page numbers are printed, such as P.1, P,2
not 1/2, 2/2
Note
❒ If you run out of memory, normal
Memory Transmission takes place.
When and if this happens varies
depending on the various options
you have installed.
Memory Storage Report
This report is printed after an original
is stored in memory. It helps you review the contents and the destinations of stored originals. Even if the
machine is set up not to print this report, it is still printed if an original
could not be stored.
Note
❒ You can turn this report on and off.
By default it is not printed. ⇒ P.203
“Changing the User Parameters”
❒ You can choose whether to include
part of the original image on the report (part of the image is printed
by default). ⇒ P.203 “Changing the
User Parameters”
MEMORY TRANSMISSION
Transmission Result Report
(Memory Transmission)
This report is printed when a Memory Transmission is completed so you
can check the result of the transmission. If two or more destinations are
specified, this report is printed after
the fax message has been sent to all
the destinations. If the machine is set
up not to print this report and the fax
message could not be successfully
transmitted, the Communication Failure Report is printed. ⇒ P.29 “Communication Failure Report”
2
Note
❒ By default this function is turned
on so you need to turn it off. ⇒
P.203 “Changing the User Parameters”
❒ You can choose whether to include
part of the original image on the report (by default, part of the image
is printed).⇒ P.203 “Changing the
User Parameters”
Communication Failure Report
This report is only printed if the
Transmission Result Report is turned
off and a message could not be successfully transmitted with Memory
Transmission. Use it to keep a record
of failed transmissions so you can
send them again.
Note
❒ You can choose whether to include
part of the original image on the report (by default, part of the image
is printed). ⇒ P.203 “Changing the
User Parameters”
29
SENDING A FAX MESSAGE
CANCELING A MEMORY TRANSMISSION
A Press [Info.].
Canceling a Transmission
While the Original Is Being
Scanned in
2
A Press the {Clear/Stop}} key.
d Dial
ook Dial
e/
al
1
2
3
ABC
DEF
4
5
6
GHI
JKL
MNO
7
8
9
PRS
TUV
WXY
Clear / Stop
ND1X03E0
C
The Information menu is shown.
Start
B Enter
the “Check/Cancel TX
Files” function number with the
number keys.
Enter
0
OPER
ND2R02E2
The machine will stop storing the
original and the data will not be
sent.
Canceling a Transmission
While the Message is Being
Sent
Use this procedure to cancel a transmission after the original has been
scanned in.
Note
❒ If “Check/Cancel TX Files” is
not shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
C Press the < or > key until the
file you want to delete is shown
and press [Delete].
Limitation
❒ If transmission finishes while you
are caring out this procedure, it
will not be canceled.
Note
❒ If you cancel a file while it is being
sent, transmission is halted as soon
as you finish this procedure. However, some pages of your message
may have already been sent and
will be received at the other end.
30
ND1X02E7
CANCELING A MEMORY TRANSMISSION
D Press [Yes].
2
ND1X03E0
The file is erased.
E Press [Exit].
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ To delete another file, repeat
steps 3 and 4.
F Press [Exit].
ND1X03E0
31
SENDING A FAX MESSAGE
IMMEDIATE TRANSMISSION
With Immediate Transmission, when
you press the {Start}
} key, the fax
number is dialed straight away (i.e.
immediately). The message is
scanned and transmitted page by
page without being stored in memory. This contrasts with Memory
Transmission which scans in all pages
into memory before dialing the destination.
Immediate Transmission is useful if
you want immediate confirmation
that the message is being sent to the
correct destination (just check the other terminal's RTI or CSI on the operation panel during transmission).
2
Note
❒ You cannot send the same message
to multiple destinations (Broadcasting). Use Memory Transmission for this purpose.
❒ Place the original on the exposure
glass or in the Document Feeder
(ADF). To send two or more pages
from the exposure glass, set them
one page at a time.
❒ You can scan some pages of your
original from the exposure glass
and the remainder from the Document Feeder (ADF). When you
have finished scanning from the
exposure glass, place the remainder of the pages in the Document
Feeder
(ADF)
and
press
{Start}
}within ten seconds.
❒ By default, the transmission mode
selected when the machine is
turned on or when modes are
cleared (transmission mode home
setting) is Memory Transmission.
You can change this with the User
32
Parameters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the
User Parameters”
A Check that the Immediate Transmission indicator is lit.
Communicating
Start
Manual RX
F1
Receive
File
F2
Standard
Confidential
File
TEL
Mode
TX File
Status
F3
Detail
Super Fine
F4
Immediate
Trans.
Memory
Trans.
F5
ND2L03E1
If it is not lit, press the {Transmis} key.
sion mode.}
B Set your original.
Limitation
❒ Do not open the Document
Feeder (ADF) while it is scanning the originals. Otherwise,
document will be jammed.
Note
❒ You can set the original any
time up until you press the
{Start}
} key.
Reference
How to Set an Original ⇒ P.18
“HOW TO SET AN ORIGINAL”
C Select
any scan settings you require. ⇒ P.37 “SCAN SETTINGS”
D Dial.
If you make a mistake, press the
} key and enter the cor{Clear/Stop}
rect number again.
Note
❒ If you are dialing with the number keys or Chain Dial (P.46
IMMEDIATE TRANSMISSION
“Chain Dial”), you can select the
type of line you want (G3 or
G4).
Reference
P.43 “DIALING”
P.41 “CHANGING LINE TYPE”
E Press the {Start}} key.
d Dial
1
ook Dial
e/
al
2
3
ABC
DEF
4
5
6
GHI
JKL
MNO
7
8
9
PRS
TUV
WXY
- If the Connection Could Not Be
Made
If it was not possible to make a connection with the number you dialed
(e.g., the line was busy or there is a
line problem), the following display
will appear.
2
Clear / Stop
C
Start
Enter
0
OPER
ND2R02E1
The machine calls the destination.
While it is dialing, the number or
name which is programmed as the
RTI or CSI in the machine of the
other party is shown on the display. When connected, the machine starts scanning the original.
Reference
P.193 “RTI/TTI”
After transmission the machine
will return to standby mode.
You have two options:
• To have the machine redial and try
and send the message by Memory
Transmission, press [Memory TX].
All originals will be scanned into
memory then redialing will begin.
• To cancel this transmission, press
[Cancel] then [OK].
- ECM (Error Correction Mode)
This feature automatically sends data
that wasn't transmitted successfully
again using a technique called ECM,
an internationally recognized protocol (requires that the destination machine has the same feature).
Note
❒ By default, ECM is on. You can
turn it off. ⇒ P.171 “ECM”
Transmission Result Report
(Immediate Transmission)
If you turn this report on, a report will
be printed after every Immediate
Transmission so you have a record of
whether the transmission was suc-
33
SENDING A FAX MESSAGE
cessful or not. If the machine is set up
not to print this report and the fax
message could not be successfully
transmitted, the Error report is printed instead.
Note
❒ You can switch this report on or off
with the User Parameters. ⇒ P.203
“Changing the User Parameters”
2
B Press the {On Hook Dial}} key.
Speed Dial
On Hook Dial
Pause /
Redial
Limitation
❒ This feature is not available in
some countries.
❒ On-hook Dial does not work with
ISDN lines.
Reference
P.192 “Monitor Volume”
A Set your original and select any
scan settings you require.
2
3
ABC
DEF
4
5
6
GHI
JKL
MNO
7
8
9
PRS
TUV
WXY
Clear / Stop
C
Start
Enter
Tone
0
OPER
On-hook Dial
This is just like using the external telephone, except you do not have to pick
up the external telephone before dialing. Just press the On Hook Dial key
and dial the number. If you hear a
voice, you can pick up the external
telephone and speak with the other
party.
1
ND2R03E2
You will hear a low tone from the
internal speaker. If you wish to
cancel this operation, press the {On
} key again.
Hook Dial}
C Dial.
The machine immediately dials the
destination. If you make a mistake,
press the {On hook dial}
} or {Clear
} key and return
Modes/Energy Saver}
to step 2.
D When the line is connected and
you hear a high-pitched tone,
press the {Start}
} key.
Reference
P.18 “HOW TO SET AN ORIGINAL”
P.37 “SCAN SETTINGS”
34
• If you hear a voice, pick up the
external telephone before you
press the {Start}
} key and notify
the destination that you want to
send a fax message (ask them to
switch to Fax mode).
IMMEDIATE TRANSMISSION
• After transmission the machine
will return to standby mode.
Manual Dial
The external telephone is required to use
this function.
Pick up the handset of the external
telephone and dial. When the line is
connected and you hear a highpitched tone, press the {Start}
} key to
send your fax message. If, on the other hand, you hear a voice at the other
end, continue your conversation as
you would normally over the telephone.
Limitation
❒ Manual Dial does not work with
ISDN lines.
C Dial.
If you make a mistake, replace the
external telephone and try again
from step 2.
2
D When the line is connected and
you hear a high-pitched tone,
press the {Start}
} key to send your
fax message.
E Replace the handset of the external telephone.
After transmission the machine
will return to standby mode.
❒ The result of the transmission with
manual dial is not mentioned in
the Transmission Result Report
(Immediate Transmission).
❒ In energy saving mode, you may
hear no sound for a few seconds after picking up the external telephone. You can operate after you
can hear the tone.
A Set your original and select any
scan settings you require.
Reference
P.18 “HOW TO SET AN ORIGINAL”
P.37 “SCAN SETTINGS”
B Pick up the external telephone.
You will hear a tone.
35
SENDING A FAX MESSAGE
CANCELING AN IMMEDIATE
TRANSMISSION
Canceling a Transmission
Before You Have Pressed Start
2
Use this procedure to cancel a transmission before you have pressed the
} key.
{Start}
A Press the {Clear Modes/Energy Sav} key.
er}
Program
eed Dial
Interrupt
Clear Modes /
Energy Saver
1
2
C
3
ND2R01E0
Note
❒ When you have already set the
original, you can also cancel an
Immediate Transmission by removing the original from the
machine.
Canceling a Transmission
After You Have Pressed the
Start Key
A Press the {Clear/Stop}} key then remove the original.
d Dial
ook Dial
e/
al
1
2
3
ABC
DEF
4
5
6
GHI
JKL
MNO
7
8
9
PRS
TUV
WXY
Clear / Stop
C
Start
Enter
0
OPER
ND2R02E2
36
Note
❒ If the transmission finishes
while you are carrying out this
procedure, it will not be canceled.
SCAN SETTINGS
SCAN SETTINGS
You may wish to send many different
types of fax message. Some of these
may be difficult to reproduce at the
other end. However, your machine
has three settings that you can adjust
to help you transmit your document
with the best possible image quality.
❖ Resolution:
Standard, Detail, Super Fine (option)
❖ Image density:
Auto Image Density, Manual Image Density (5 levels)
❖ Original type:
Text, Text·Photo, Photo
Resolution
Images and text are scanned into the
machine by converting them to sequences of dots. The frequency of
dots determines the quality of the image and how long it takes to transmit.
Therefore, images scanned at high
resolution (Super Fine) have high
quality but transmission takes longer.
Conversely, low resolution (Standard) scanning results in less quality
but your original is sent more quickly. Choose the setting that matches
your needs based upon this trade off
between speed and image clarity.
❖ Standard (8 × 3.85 lines/mm, 200 ×100
dpi)
Select for originals containing normal sized characters.
❖ Detail (8 × 7.7 lines/mm, 200 × 200 dpi)
Select for originals containing
small characters or when you re-
quire greater clarity. This resolution is twice as fine as Standard.
❖ Super Fine (Optional 400dpi card is
×15.4 lines/mm, 400×
×400
required: 16×
dpi)
Select for originals with very fine
details or when you require the
best possible image clarity. This
resolution is eight times as fine as
Standard.
2
Limitation
❒ If the other party's machine does
not support the resolution at
which you are sending, this machine automatically switches to a
resolution which is supported.
❒ Sending with Super Fine resolution requires that your machine
has the optional 400dpi option and
the other party's machine has the
capability to receive fax messages
at Super Fine resolution. Note that
even if the option is installed on
your machine, transmission and
reception may take place using
Detail resolution if the other party's machine does not support this
feature.
Note
❒ When the machine is turned on or
modes are cleared, the resolution is
set to Standard by default. You can
change this with the User Parameters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the User
Parameters”
❒ By default, the resolution returns
to the home setting after every
transmission. You change this with
the User Parameters. ⇒ P.203
“Changing the User Parameters”
37
SENDING A FAX MESSAGE
A Press
the Resolution key to
switch between resolutions. The
indicators above the key show the
current selection.
Communicating
Start
Manual RX
F1
Receive
File
F2
Standard
Confidential
File
TEL
Mode
TX File
Status
F3
2
Detail
Super Fine
F4
Immediate
Trans.
Memory
Trans.
F5
ND2L03E2
Original Type
If your original contains photographs, illustrations or diagrams with
complex shading patterns or grays,
select the appropriate Original Type
to optimize image clarity.
❖ Text (Default Setting)
Text is selected when the Photo
and Text·Photo indicators are not
lit. Select Text to send an original
containing a high-contrast blackand-white image. Use this setting
even if your original contains text
and photographs if you only want
to send clearer text.
❖ Text·Photo
Text·Photo is selected when the
Text·Photo indicator is lit. Select
Text·Photo to send an original containing both a high-contrast blackand-white image, such as text, and
a halftone image such as a photograph.
❖ Photo
Photo is selected when the Photo
indicator is lit.
Select Photo to send an original
containing a halftone image such
as a photograph or a color original.
Limitation
❒ If you select Text·Photo or Photo,
the Resolution is automatically set
to Detail. Even if you select Stan-
38
dard again, the image density will
not return to Standard.
Note
❒ If you select Text·Photo or Photo,
the transmission will take longer
than when Text is selected.
❒ If you send a fax message with
Text·Photo or Photo and the background of the received image is
dirty, reduce the density setting
and re-send the fax.
❒ When the machine is turned on or
modes are cleared, Original Type
is set to Text. You can change this
with the User Parameters. ⇒ P.203
“Changing the User Parameters”
❒ By default, the machine returns to
the Original Type home setting after every transmission. You can
change this with the User Parameters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the User
Parameters”
A Press the {Original Type}}
key repeatedly until the indicator
matching the type you require is
lit.
Text . Photo
Photo
Special Orig.
Lighter
Darker
Auto Image Density
ND2C02E3
When both indicators are not lit,
the Original Type is Text.
Image Density (Contrast)
The text and diagrams in your original should stand out clearly from the
paper they are written on. If your
original has a darker background
than normal (for example, a newspaper clipping), or if the writing is faint,
adjust the image density.
SCAN SETTINGS
By default, this machine will automatically select a density setting appropriate to the original (Auto Image
Density). If you wish to set the density yourself, use Manual Image Density.
Auto Image Density
The machine automatically selects an
image density which is the most appropriate for the original.
By default, Auto Image Density is selected when the machine is turned on
or modes are cleared. You can change
this with the User Parameters. ⇒
P.203 “Changing the User Parameters”
A If the Auto Image Density indica-
tor is not lit, press the l key to
turn it on.
Text . Photo
Photo
Special Orig.
Lighter
Darker
2
When Setting Originals on the Exposure
Glass
While the machine is bleeping, you
have about 60 seconds (10 for Immediate Transmission) to select density,
resolution and original type. The remaining time is shown on the display.
the pages you wish to
change the setting.
B Remove the previous page and set
Manual Image Density
the next page.
Use the Image Density keys to vary
the image density within 5 levels.
A Make
sure that the Auto Image
Density indicator is not lit. If it is
lit press the l key to turn it off.
Lighter
When sending an original consisting
of several pages, you can select different Image Density, Resolution and
Original Types for each page.
Set your original, select the scan settings for the first page, dial and press
{Start}
} as you would normally. Then
follow one of the following two procedures.
A Check
Auto Image Density
ND2C02E1
Text . Photo
Photo
Special Orig.
Mixing Scan Settings in a
Multiple Page Original
Darker
C Select the Image Density, Resolution and Original type.
Communicating
Start
Manual RX
F1
Receive
File
F2
F3
Detail
Super Fine
F4
Immediate
Trans.
Memory
Trans.
F5
ND2L03E0
Text . Photo
Photo
Special Orig.
Auto Image Density
Standard
Confidential
File
TEL
Mode
TX File
Status
Lighter
Darker
Auto Image Density
ND2C02E1
ND2C02E0
B Press the i or j key to change
the density. The indicators above
the keys show the level.
Text . Photo
Photo
Special Orig.
Lighter
Darker
Auto Image Density
Note
❒ You adjust settings for each
page before you press the
{Start}
} key.
ND2C02E2
39
SENDING A FAX MESSAGE
When Setting Originals in the Document
Feeder (ADF)
A Check
the pages you wish to
change the setting.
B Select the Image Density, Resolu-
2
tion and Original Type before the
next page is scanned.
Communicating
Start
Manual RX
F1
Receive
File
F2
Standard
Confidential
File
TEL
Mode
TX File
Status
F3
Detail
Super Fine
F4
Immediate
Trans.
Memory
Trans.
F5
ND2L03E0
Text . Photo
Photo
Special Orig.
Lighter
Darker
Auto Image Density
ND2C02E0
40
CHANGING LINE TYPE
CHANGING LINE TYPE
The optional ISDN unit is required to use this function.
This machine comes with a single Analog (PSTN) line connection for G3
communication as standard. If you
install the ISDN Unit option, an extra
digital (ISDN) line connection for
both G3 and G4 communication becomes available.
When you use G4, press the {F4}
} key
to lit the lamp.
G4 is selected when this key is lit, G3
is selected when it is not lit.
Press the key once to switch between
G3 and G4.
Limitation
❒ Under the operation procedure for
transmission, you can select the
line type if dialing with the number keys or Chain Dial.
- To Switch to G3
If the {F4}
} key is lit, press it once to
switch to G3.
nicating
Start
Manual RX
File
File
TEL
Mode
TX File
Status
De
Su
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
01
02
03
04
05
06
ND2L04E1
- To Switch to G4
2
If the {F4}
} key is not lit, press it once
to switch to G4.
nicating
Start
Manual RX
File
File
TEL
Mode
TX File
Status
De
Su
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
01
02
03
04
05
06
ND2L04E1
Limitation
❒ If you select G4 mode, JBIG compression is not available.
- Which line is used for G3
transmissions?
ISDN lines can be used for G3 communication as well as G4 communications, so this machine is set by default
to use the ISDN line for both G3 and
G4 transmissions. If you wish to use
the Analog (PSTN) line for G3 transmissions, please contact your service
representative.
Note
❒ When you use G3 with ISDN, you
can set the subaddress.
41
SENDING A FAX MESSAGE
- Auto Identification
This feature used when G4 is selected.
The machine first tries a G4 communication and if it cannot connect because the receiver is not a G4
terminal, it automatically switches to
G3 and redials.
2
Note
❒ If the G3 line at the destination is
connected to the ISDN via a TA
(Terminal adapter) or a PBX, since
the called number is on ISDN, it is
regarded as G4 and the Auto Identification feature may not automatically switch this machine to G3.
42
DIALING
DIALING
There are three main ways to dial a
number:
A Set your original and select any
❖ Number keys:
Enter numbers directly using the
key pad on the right side of the operation panel.
Reference
P.18 “HOW TO SET AN ORIGINAL”
❖ Quick Dials:
When you have stored a destination's number in a Quick Dial key,
you can dial the number by just
pressing that key. Additionally,
you can store a name that will appear on the display whenever you
press that Quick Dial.
❖ Speed Dials:
If you store a number in a Speed
Dial, when you want to dial it, just
press the Speed Dial key followed
by a 2 or 3 digit code. Like Quick
Dials, you can store a name along
with the number.
This section covers these features and
others in more detail.
scan settings you require.
2
P.37 “SCAN SETTINGS”
B Enter
the fax number with the
number keys.
d Dial
ook Dial
e/
al
1
2
3
ABC
DEF
4
5
6
GHI
JKL
MNO
7
8
9
PRS
TUV
WXY
Clear / Stop
C
Start
Enter
0
OPER
ND2R02E0
The digits appear on the display as
you enter them.
Number Keys
Enter numbers directly using the key
pad on the right side of the operation
panel.
Note
❒ Maximum length of a fax number:
254 digits.
❒ You can insert pauses and tones in
a fax number. ⇒ P.44 “Pause”, P.45
“Tone”
❒ If the ISDN unit is installed, you
may need to enter a subaddress. ⇒
P.45 “Subaddress (ISDN option required)”
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
} key to erase the
{Clear/Stop}
wrong digits and try again.
❒ If you wish to send this message
to more than one destination,
press [Add], then enter the next
destination.
❒ If the optional ISDN unit is installed, select G3 or G4 before
you go to the next step. ⇒ P.41
“CHANGING LINE TYPE”
C Press the {Start}} key.
43
SENDING A FAX MESSAGE
- Restrictions When Dialing with
the Number Keys
Fax numbers entered with the number keys are stored in internal memory (separate from memory for storing
original data). Therefore, you cannot
program more than 99 numbers with
the number Keys for the following:
• Destinations specified in a Memory Transmission (including Confidential Transmission and Polling
Reception)
• Transfer Stations and End Receivers specified in a Transfer Request
• Destinations and Transfer Stations
specified in a Group
For example, when 90 destinations
are registered in a Group with the
number keys, only 9 destinations can
be dialed for Memory Transmission
from thenumber keys.
2
99. That is because the fax numbers
have been dialed from the number
keys for some of the waiting files.
When the waiting files have been
sent and their fax numbers are deleted from memory, additional fax
numbers can be dialed.
❒ The display shows the percentage
of free space in memory for storing
originals. Since fax numbers are
stored in separate memory, dialing
fax numbers from the number keys
does not change the percentage on
the display.
Pause
Press the {Pause/Redial}
} key when dialing or storing a number to insert
about a two-second pause.
Speed Dial
On Hook Dial
Note
❒ When this machine is requested to
transfer a call (i.e. becomes a
Transfer Station), 2 fax numbers
are automatically stored. Therefore, the number of destinations
that can be dialed from the number
keys decreases by two whenever
this machine is requested to transfer a call.
❒ When a total of 99 fax numbers is
stored, only Immediate Transmission is allowed.
❒ If a Group is defined when there
are files queued for transmission,
the message “Memory is full
and you cannot enter with
number keys” may be shown on
the display and no additional fax
numbers can be stored even if the
number of destinations specified
from the number keys is less than
44
Pause /
Redial
1
2
3
ABC
DEF
4
5
6
GHI
JKL
MNO
7
8
PRS
TUV
Clear / Stop
C
Start
9
WXY
Enter
Tone
0
OPER
ND2R03E1
Limitation
❒ You cannot insert a pause before
the first digit of a fax number.
Note
❒ A pause is shown as a “-” on the
display.
❒ You can insert a pause in numbers
stored in Quick Dials and Speed
Dials.
DIALING
Tone
This feature allows a machine connected to a pulse dialing line to send
tonal signals (for example if you want
to use a special service on a tone dialing line). When you press the {Tone}
}
key, the machine dials the number using tonal signals.
Limitation
❒ You cannot place a tone before the
first digit of a fax number.
❒ Some services may not be available
when using the {Tone}
} key.
Note
❒ A tone is shown as a “ • ” on the
display.
rect your fax message to a particular
terminal at the destination.
Limitation
❒ Subaddress can only be used with
ISDN.
Note
❒ You need to program a User Function key with the subaddress function. ⇒ P.164 “ASSIGNING USER
FUNCTION KEYS”
2
❒ You can program a subaddress
number in a Quick Dial or Speed
Dial.
❒ If you want to assign a subaddress
to your fax machine, contact your
service representative.
A Set your original and select any
scan settings you require.
- Sending Tonal Signals by ISDN
(ISDN Option Required)
You can still send tone signals to a G3
user even if the machine is only connected to an ISDN line.
Note
❒ This feature can only be used for
Memory or Immediate Transmission. You cannot dial through
ISDN using On-hook Dial or Manual Dial.
B Select either G4 or G3 (ISDN).
C Dial the fax number with the
number keys.
D Press
the User Function key
({
{F1}
}-{
{F5}
}) where the subaddress
function has been registered.
nicating
Start
Manual RX
File
File
TEL
Mode
TX File
Status
De
Su
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
01
02
03
04
05
06
ND2L04E3
“/” will appear on the display.
Subaddress (ISDN option required)
ISDN allows two or more terminals
(such as a facsimile and digital telephone) to be connected to a single
line. These terminals are identified by
their subaddress numbers. If the terminals connected to the line at a destination are assigned subaddresses,
dialing a subaddress allows you to di-
E Enter the destination subaddress
with the number keys.
F Press the {Start}} key.
45
SENDING A FAX MESSAGE
Chain Dial
This allows you to compose a telephone number from various parts,
some of which may be stored in
Quick Dials or Speed Dials and some
of which may be input using the
number keys.
2
Limitation
❒ Maximum length of telephone or
fax number: 254 digits
Note
❒ For Memory Transmission and Immediate Transmission, insert a
pause between numbers. For Onhook Dial and Manual Dial, no
pause is needed.
Additionally, you can store a name
that will appear on the display whenever you press that Quick Dial.
Note
❒ To check the contents of the Quick
dial, print the list. ⇒ P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”
❒ If the Quick Dial key is used as other functions like Groups, you cannot program the Quick Dial in it.
❒ Flip the Quick Dial plate over to
access Quick Dial keys 01-28 or 2956.
❒ You can have the label stored with
a Quick Dial printed on the first
page received at the other end. ⇒
P.99 “Label Insertion”
Reference
P.43 “DIALING”
- (Example) 01133-1-555333
Assume that 01133 is stored in Quick
Dial 01 and that 1 is stored in Speed
Dial 01.
A Place the original and select any
scan settings you require.
B Press {Quick Dial}
} key 01.
C Press the {Pause/Redial}
} key.
D Press the {Speed Dial}
} key and {0}
}
and {1}
} using the number keys.
E Press {5}
}, {5}
}, {5}
}, {3}
}, {3}
} and
{3}
} using the number keys.
F Press the {Start}
} key.
Quick Dials
When you have stored a destination's
number in a Quick Dial key, you can
dial the number by just pressing that
key.
46
A Set your original and select any
scan settings you require. ⇒ P.37
“SCAN SETTINGS”
B Press
the {Quick Dial } key in
which the destination's number is
programmed.
01
06
07
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
08
01
10
11
12
13
14
H
I
K
L
M
N
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
X
Y
Z
V
02
W
03
J
04
05
ND2L05E1
If the destination's name has been
stored, the name is shown on the
display. Otherwise, the fax number is shown.
DIALING
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
} key and try again.
{Clear/Stop}
❒ If you wish to dial another destination, press [Add] and dial another fax number.
C Press the {Start}} key.
B Press the {Speed Dial}} key.
Speed Dial
On Hook Dial
Pause /
Redial
1
2
3
ABC
DEF
4
5
6
GHI
JKL
MNO
7
8
9
PRS
TUV
WXY
Clear / Stop
C
Start
2
Enter
Tone
0
OPER
Speed Dials
ND2R03E3
If you store a number in a Speed Dial,
when you want to dial it, just press
the Speed Dial key followed by a 2 or
3 digit code. ⇒ P.143 “Registering
Speed Dials”
Note
❒ To check the contents of the Speed
Dials, print the list.
❒ As standard, you can use codes 0099 for Speed Dials. If the Optional
Fax Feature Expander is installed,
codes 000 to 999 become available.
❒ If a search letter is registered with
a Speed Dial, you can find this
number quickly using the Telephone Directory feature. ⇒ P.47
“Telephone Directory”
❒ You can have the label stored with
a Speed Dial printed on the first
page received at the other end. ⇒
P.99 “Label Insertion”
A Place your original and select any
scan settings you require. ⇒ P.37
“SCAN SETTINGS”
C Enter the two-digit code (00 to 99)
or three-digit code (000 to 999) for
the destination with the number
keys.
If the destination's name has been
programmed, it flashes up on the
display. Otherwise, the fax number appears.
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
} key and try again.
{Clear/Stop}
❒ If you wish to dial another destination, press [Add] and dial another fax number.
D Press the {Start}} key.
Telephone Directory
This feature lets you find a stored
Speed Dial quickly by just entering a
single letter, e.g., the first letter of the
name stored for that number.
47
SENDING A FAX MESSAGE
Preparation
To use the telephone directory,
you need to register a search letter
when you program Speed Dials. ⇒
P.143 “Registering Speed Dials”
Limitation
❒ Speed Dial codes cannot be
searched for by symbol or number.
2
❒ Names enclosed within ( ) are not
searched for.
A Set your original and select any
D Enter the search letter by pressing
one of the Quick Dial keys (A to
Z).
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
08
01
10
11
12
13
14
H
I
K
L
M
N
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
X
Y
Z
V
W
J
ND2L05E1
The names or fax numbers registered in Speed Dials are shown in
numerical order on the display.
scan settings you require.
B Press the {Speed Dial}} key.
Speed Dial
On Hook Dial
Pause /
Redial
1
2
3
ABC
DEF
4
5
6
GHI
JKL
MNO
7
8
9
PRS
TUV
WXY
Clear / Stop
C
E Enter the two-digit code (00 to 99)
or three-digit code (000 to 999) for
the destination with the number
keys.
Start
Enter
0
Tone
OPER
ND2R03E3
C Press [Tel.Dir.] .
Note
❒ If the list does not contain the
desired
destination,
press
↓Next].
↑Prev.] or [↓
[↑
ND1X02E8
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear/Stop}
} key to try again.
❒ If you wish to dial another destination, press [Add] and dial another fax number.
F Press the {Start}} key.
Groups
If you frequently send the same message to more than one place, program
these numbers into a Group. Then
you can send the messages to all the
48
DIALING
destinations in that Group with just a
few keystrokes. You can also program a name for the Group (for example, “Branch Offices”) which will be
displayed before you press the {Start}
}
key.
Preparation
You need to program the Groups.
⇒ P.129 “Registering Quick Dials”
Limitation
❒ A Quick Dial programmed for
Group cannot be used for other
functions.
❒ Group Dial can be used only for
Memory Transmission and Polling
reception; it cannot be used for Immediate Transmission.
Note
❒ Groups are only available with
Memory Transmission and Polling
reception.
❒ To check the contents of the
Groups, print the list.
❒ You can program up to 9 Groups.
❒ You can store up to 200 destinations in a Group. If a Quick Dial or
Speed Dial is registered in two
Groups, it takes up the space of
one destination.
❒ Groups can contain Transfer Station codes, but note that these
Groups cannot be used for normal
transmission because the Transfer
Station codes are not dialable numbers. ⇒ P.173 “Multistep Transfer”
Reference
⇒ P.135 “Registering Groups”
A Set your original and select any
scan settings you require.
B Press the Quick Dial key in which
the Group is programmed.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
08
01
10
11
H
I
15
16
J
17
13
14
K
L
M
N
18
19
12
20
21
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
X
Y
Z
V
W
2
ND2L05E1
The Group number is shown on
the display. If the Group name is
programmed, the name is also
shown on the display.
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear/Stop}
} key and start again.
❒ If you wish to dial another destination, press [Add] and dial another fax number.
C Press the {Start}} key.
Optional Group Dial
An Optional Fax Feature Expander is required to use this function.
If the Optional Group Dial function
has been assigned to a User Function
key, dialing is easy. Just press the
User Function key and enter the Optional Group number (10 - 30).
You can use Optional Groups to specify several destinations at a time. You
can program up to 9 Groups and up
to 21 Optional Groups.
Preparation
To use this function, you need to
have programmed a User Function
key as the Optional Group Dial
49
SENDING A FAX MESSAGE
function in advance. ⇒ P.164 “ASSIGNING
USER
FUNCTION
KEYS”
Limitation
❒ Optional Group Dial can only be
used only with Memory Transmission. If you select the Immediate
Transmission mode, it automatically switch to the Memory Transmission mode.
2
Note
❒ You can include up to 200 destinations in a Group. If a Quick Dial or
Speed Dial is registered in two
Groups, it takes up the space of
one destination.
❒ Groups can contain Transfer Station codes, but note that these
Groups cannot be used for normal
transmission because the Transfer
Station codes are not dialable numbers. ⇒ P.173 “Multistep Transfer”
Reference
P.139 “Registering Optional Groups”
A Set your original and select any
scan settings you require.
B Press the User Function key ({{F1}}
through {F5}
}) in which the optional Group Dial function is registered.
nicating
Start
Manual RX
File
File
TEL
Mode
TX File
Status
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
} key and try again.
{Clear/Stop}
❒ If you wish to dial more destinations, press [Add] and dial another number.
D Press the {Start}} key.
Redial
The machine memorizes the last 10
destinations that have been dialed. If
you wish to send a message to a destination which you faxed to recently,
the Redial feature saves you finding
and entering the number again.
A Press the {Pause/Redial}} key.
Speed Dial
On Hook Dial
Pause /
Redial
1
2
3
ABC
DEF
4
5
6
GHI
JKL
MNO
7
8
PRS
TUV
Clear / Stop
C
Start
9
WXY
Enter
Tone
0
OPER
De
Su
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
01
02
03
04
05
06
ND2L04E3
C Enter an Optional Group number
with the number keys.
50
The Optional Group number is
shown on the display. If you have
previously registered a name with
this group, it is also shown on the
display.
ND2R03E1
B A list of previously dialed num-
bers will flash up. If you cannot
see the number you need use the
↑Prev.] and [↓
↓Next] keys to scroll
[↑
through them. Then enter the
DIALING
code for the number you wish to
redial e.g., “01”.
Limitation
❒ The following kinds of destinations are not memorized:
2
•
•
•
•
Quick Dials
Speed Dials
Group Dials
Destinations dialed by a Program
• Destinations dialed as End
Receivers for Transfer Request
• Forwarding terminal of the
substitute reception.
• Destination of Memory File
Transfer
• Destinations dialed using the
external telephone keypad
• Destinations dialed by Redial (regarded as already memorized)
• Any destinations after the
first number if multiple destinations were dialed.
❒ Do not dial any digits before
you press the Redial key. If you
press the {Pause/Redial}
} key after entering digits using the
number keys, a pause will be
entered instead.
Note
❒ If the receiver uses a facsimile of
the same manufacturer that is
capable of registering the RTI,
that name may be shown on the
display instead of the fax number.
51
SENDING A FAX MESSAGE
TRANSMISSION FEATURES
Stamp
Optional Stamp Unit is required
2
When sending a fax message using
the Document Feeder (ADF), the machine can stamp a circle mark at the
bottom of the original. When sending
a double sided document, they are
marked at top and bottom side on the
front page. This stamp indicates that
the original has been successfully
stored in memory for Memory Transmission, or that it has been successfully sent for Immediate Transmission.
❒ When the stamp starts getting
lighter, replace the cartridge. ⇒
P.220 “REPLACING THE STAMP
CARTRIDGE”
❒ If a page was not stamped even
though the Stamp feature is turned
on, you need to re-send that page.
❒ By default, Stamp is turned off. If
you use this feature often, you can
adjust the User Parameters so that
the home setting is on. In this case,
Stamp can easily be turned off for
any single transmission by pressing the {Stamp}
} key. ⇒ P.203
“Changing the User Parameters”
A Press the {F5}}
nicating
Start
Manual RX
A
key.
File
File
TEL
Mode
TX File
Status
De
Su
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
01
02
03
04
05
06
ND2L04E2
The Stamp indicator will light.
Pressing the {F5}
} key again will
turn Stamp off.
ND0X01E0
Limitation
❒ Stamp only works when scanning
from the Document Feeder (ADF).
❒ When you select the ADF internal
tray, Stamp does not work.
❒ While scanning the document, you
cannot switch stamp on or off.
❒ Do not open the document feeder
(ADF) while scanning the document. Document jam should occur.
Note
❒ When the Stamp Unit installed,
} key is automatically assigned
{F5}
as the Stamp key.
52
ID Transmission
This feature allows you to restrict
transmission of messages only to machines of the same make, and only to
those machines that have the same
Polling ID. The transmission options
let you switch ID transmission on and
off for each separate transmission.
Note
❒ The default setting is off. Turn this
feature on with the User Parameters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the User
Parameters”
TRANSMISSION FEATURES
F Code (SUB)
Normally you can only use Confidential Transmission to send to fax machines of the same make that have the
Confidential Reception feature. However, if the other machine supports a
similar feature called “F Code”, you
can send fax messages to the other
party using this method instead.
Preparation
You need to assign the F Code feature to a User Function key beforehand.
You can only use this feature in a
G3 communications (not with G4).
You cannot use Chain Dial with
this feature.
You cannot select this function
when carrying out standard Confidential Transmission
B Dial the destination fax number
using the number keys.
C Press
2
the User Function key assigned with the F Code feature.
nicating
Start
Manual RX
File
File
TEL
Mode
TX File
Status
De
Su
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
01
02
03
04
05
06
ND2L04E3
D Enter
the function number for
SUB(S) on the number keys.
E Enter the ID code on the number
keys.
Note
❒ The ID can be up to 20 digits long
and consist of digits, spaces, * and
#.
❒ Make sure the ID matches the
specification of the fax you are
sending to.
❒ You can store IDs in Quick Dials,
Speed Dials, Groups and Programs.
❒ Messages you send using this feature are marked “SUB” on all reports.
A Set your document and make any
changes to the scan settings if necessary.
F Press the {Start}} key.
Note
❒ If you use Immediate Transmission and the destination fax machine does not support the F
code feature, a message will appear on the display to inform
you of this. In this case, press
OK to cancel the transmission.
53
SENDING A FAX MESSAGE
F Code (PWD)
There are times when you may wish
to use a password when sending confidential faxes with the F Code feature.
2
Limitation
❒ You can enter a password up to 20
digits long.
Note
❒ Messages you send using this feature are marked “PWD” on all reports. ⇒ P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”
JBIG Transmission
FAX 400dpi option is required
If you use JBIG (Joint Bi-level Image
Experts Group) compression you can
send photographic originals at high
speed across G3/IG3 lines.
Limitation
❒ If ECM is turned off, JBIG Transmission is not available.
❒ This feature requires that the other
party's fax machine has both the
JBIG function and ECM function
(G3 communication only).
54
3. Receiving a Fax Message
IMMEDIATE RECEPTION
Each page of a received fax message is
printed as soon as it is received. This
method is used for standard fax messages.
becomes impossible and the current
communication is terminated.
Receiver (your machine)
Sender
ND1X00E2
- Display During Reception
The sender's RTI or CSI appears on
the first line.
- Reception Resolution
This machine supports Standard, Detail and Super Fine (option) resolutions for reception. If you do not have
the 400dpi option, faxes sent at Super
Fine resolution will be printed on
your machine at Detail resolution.
This may result in a slightly different
from the sender's intention.
Reception will not take place if there
is not enough free memory left. If free
memory reaches 0 % during Immediate Reception, any further reception
55
RECEIVING A FAX MESSAGE
MEMORY RECEPTION
The machine waits until all pages of
the message have been received into
memory before printing the message.
Receiver (your machine)
Sender
3
ND1X00E3
This method is used with the following features:
• Two in one P.38 “Photo”
• Multi-copy when set to multiple
copies P.65 “Multi-copy Reception”
• Reverse Order Printing P.68 “Reverse Order Printing”
• Substitute Reception P.57 “Substitute Reception”
• 2-sided Printing (Both Optional
Duplex Tray and Fax Feature Expander are required) P.65 “2-Sided
Printing”
Important
❒ All the messages stored in memory
are deleted if the power is
switched off for more than one
hour. However, note that if the optional Hard Disk is installed, all
stored messages are not deleted.
❒ If Memory Reception is switched
on, the machine may not be able to
receive large numbers of messages
or messages with a high data content. In such cases, we recommend
you switch Memory Reception
mode off or add a memory card.
56
Limitation
❒ The machine may not be able to receive fax messages when the free
memory space is low.
Note
❒ If the memory free space reaches 0
% during Memory Reception, the
machine can no longer receive the
current fax message and stops
communicating.
SUBSTITUTE RECEPTION
SUBSTITUTE RECEPTION
If any of the conditions listed below
are met, the machine automatically
switches to Memory Reception mode
and stores messages in memory instead of printing them. This reception
mode, in which a received fax message is stored in memory unprinted,
is called Substitute Reception. Messages received using Substitute Reception are automatically printed
when the condition which caused the
machine to use Substitute Reception
is rectified. Substitute Reception takes
place when:
• Paper runs out
• Toner runs out
• Paper is jammed
• The front or side cover is open
• A fax is received during a copy or
print run
• When the delivery tray is full
Limitation
❒ Reception may not take place if
there is not enough free memory
left.
Note
❒ The Receive File indicator lights to
let you know when message(s)
have been received using Substitute Reception.
❒ If free memory reaches 0 % during
Substitute Reception, any further
reception becomes impossible and
the current communication is terminated.
Screening messages from
anonymous senders
To help you screen out unwanted
messages that may fill up your memory, the machine can be programmed
to only use Substitute Reception for
messages that arrive with RTI/CSI
identification.
Two settings are available:
• “When RTI or CSI is received”
• “Free”
3
Note
❒ The default setting is “When RTI
or CSI is received”, i.e. only store
messages when the RTI/CSI is
present. You can change this with
the User Parameters. ⇒ P.203
“Changing the User Parameters”
❒ Even if the sender does not have an
RTI or CSI, the machine will still
receive messages using Substitute
Reception if:
• Paper becomes jammed while
the power switch is on
• For some reason printing is not
possible e.g., copy job is in
progress
- When an RTI or CSI is Received
The machine switches to Substitute
Reception only when the sender has
programmed their RTI or CSI. If the
power is switched off for more than
an hour, all the messages received
into memory are deleted. In such a
case, the Power Failure Report or the
TCR can be used to identify which
57
RECEIVING A FAX MESSAGE
messages are lost so you can ask the
senders to transmit them again.
Important
❒ If a sender has not programmed
their RTI or CSI, the machine may
reject an important fax message.
We recommend that you ask important senders to register an RTI
or CSI in advance.
3
- Free
The machine switches to Substitute
Reception regardless of whether or
not the sender has programmed their
RTI or CSI.
58
SELECTING THE RECEPTION MODE
SELECTING THE RECEPTION MODE
There are two ways you can set up
your machine to handle incoming
calls:
• Fax mode
• Tel mode (handset option or external telephone required)
The default setting is Fax mode. You
can change this with the User Tools.
⇒ P.203 “Changing the User Parameters”
Fax Mode (Auto Reception
Mode)
When a telephone call comes in, the
machine receives it automatically as a
fax message. Use this setting for a
dedicated fax line.
Telephone Mode
When a call comes in, you have to
pick up the handset or external telephone and decide whether the call is
a fax message yourself. If you hear a
voice, continue your conversation as
you would using a normal telephone.
If you hear high pitched beeps, instruct the machine to receive the fax
by following the procedure below.
Use this setting if you wish to share
the line between the fax machine and
a telephone.
this function. ⇒ P.164 “ASSIGNING
USER FUNCTION KEYS”
A When the machine rings, pick up
the handset.
B If you hear beeps, press the User
Function key ({
}–{
{F5}
}) which
{F1}
has been programmed as the {Start
} key.
Manual RX}
C Replace the handset. The machine
will start receiving.
3
- Changing from Fax Mode to
TEL Mode
This function also requires the use of
a User Function key. By default, {F3}
}
is assigned as the [TEL Mode] key.
To change the reception mode, press
the User Function key which has been
programmed as the TEL Mode key
({
} by default).
{F3}
- Receiving a Fax in Telephone
Mode
This feature needs a User Function
key programmed as {Start Manual RX}
}.
By default, {F1}
} is already assigned
59
RECEIVING A FAX MESSAGE
RECEPTION FUNCTIONS
Transfer Station
Transfer Stations allow you to expand
the standard features of your fax machine to set up complex networks.
Transfer Stations must be machines of
the same make.
The diagram below may make the
concept clearer.
3
End Receiver
Requesting Transfer station
party
End Receiver
Transfer
result report
End Receiver
Limitation
❒ Polling ID's of the Requesting Party and Transfer Station must be
identical for this feature to work.
❒ This machine will not receive a
Transfer Request unless it has
enough free memory to store two
or more destinations dialed from
the number keys.
❒ If the Requesting Party specifies a
Group for the End Receivers and
the total number of End Receivers
exceeds 200, the Transfer Station
cannot transfer the message and
sends a Transfer Result Report to
the Requesting Party.
Reference
P.96 “TRANSFER REQUEST”
ND1X00E4
The following terminology is used in
this section.
❖ Requesting Party
The machine where the message
originates from, i.e. the machine
making a Transfer Request.
❖ Transfer Station
The machine that forwards the incoming message to another destination, i.e. the machine that
receives the Transfer Request. In
this section this refers to your machine.
❖ End Receiver
The final destination of the message, i.e. the machine that the
Transfer Station sends to. End Receivers must be programmed into
Quick Dials, Speed Dials or
Groups in the Transfer Station
(this machine).
60
- Multi-step Transfer
The principles of Transfer Stations
can be used to build up a multi-step
facsimile network where messages
are passed through several Transfer
Stations. By programming the end receivers in a Transfer Station Group,
you can enable this machine to transfer messages onto other Transfer Stations.
For more information, contact your
service representative.
This feature can only be used if the
machines are made by the same maker.
Note
❒ The optional Fax Feature Expander is required for this function.
RECEPTION FUNCTIONS
Reference
P.173 “Multistep Transfer”
- Sending the Transfer Result
Report
This machine compares the own fax
number of the Requesting Party with
the Requesting Party's number programmed in a Quick Dial or Speed
Dial, and if the lower five digits of the
two numbers match, it sends the
Transfer Result report to the Requesting Party.
For example:
• Requesting Party's own dial number:
001813-11112222
• Transfer Station's Quick Dial:
03-11112222
Transfer Result Report
This reports whether transmission to
the End Receivers was successful or
not.
Preparation
Register the own fax number in advance. ⇒ P.41 “CHANGING LINE
TYPE”
When the Transfer Station has transferred the message to all End Receivers, it sends the Transfer Result
Report back to the Requesting Party.
The machine prints the report if it
cannot be sent back to the Requesting
Party. You must program the fax
number of the requesting party in a
Quick Dial or Speed Dial in the Trans-
fer Station. ⇒ P.129 “Registering Quick
Dials”, P.143 “Registering Speed Dials”
Note
❒ By default, a portion of the original
image is printed on this report.
You can turn this off with the User
Parameters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the
User Parameters”
ID Reception
3
If you wish to limit reception of messages to those from machines of the
same make and with the same Polling
ID, contact your service representative to turn this feature on.
F Code (SEP)
Normally you can only use Polling
Reception to receive faxes from machines that have the Polling Reception feature. However, if the other
machine supports a polling reception,
you can receive fax messages from
the other party using this method instead.
Preparation
You need to assign the F Code feature to a User Function key beforehand. ⇒ P.164 “Storing/Editing the
Contents of a User Function Key”
Limitation
❒ You can only use this feature with
a G3 line (not with G4).
❒ You cannot use Chain Dial with
this feature.
Note
❒ The ID can be up to 20 digits long
and consist of digits.
61
RECEIVING A FAX MESSAGE
❒ Make sure the ID matches the
specification of the fax you are
sending to.
❒ You can store IDs in Quick Dials,
Speed Dials, Groups and Programs with number keys, space, #
and *.
❒ Messages you receive using this
feature are marked “SEP” on all reports.
A Make sure that the machine is in
3
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown. Then enter the
fax number.
F Enter
the function number for
Polling Reception on the number
keys.
Note
❒ If you can't see the function
number, search for it using the
↑Prev.] and [↓
↓Next] arrow keys.
[↑
G Depending
B Press
the User Function key assigned with the F Code feature.
nicating
Start
Manual RX
File
File
TEL
Mode
TX File
Status
De
which method you
are using, choose one of the following procedures:
Default ID Polling Reception
Su
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
01
02
03
04
05
06
ND2L04E3
C Enter
A Press the < or > key to
change the Default ID and
press [OK].
the function number for
SEP(P) on the number keys.
D Enter the ID code on the number
keys.
E Press the [Mode] key.
ID Override Polling Reception
A Press the < or > key to
change the Override ID and
press [OK].
The [Mode] menu is displayed.
B Enter a polling ID (4 characters) with the number keys and
the letter (A–F).
62
RECEPTION FUNCTIONS
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press
the {Clear/Stop}
} key and try
again.
• 0000 and FFFF is not available.
H Press [OK].
I Press [Exit].
The display returns to the [Mode]
menu and the Polling Reception
function is now checked.
3
J Press the {Start}} key.
F Code (PWD)
There are times when you may wish
to use a password when sending confidential faxes with the F Code “SUB”
and “SEP”features. ⇒ P.63 “F Code
(PWD)”
Limitation
❒ You can enter a password up to 20
digits long.
Note
❒ Messages you send using this feature are marked "PWD" on all reports.
JBIG Reception
The Fax 400dpi Option is required to use
this function.
It allows you to receive messages sent
in the JBIG format.
Limitation
❒ If ECM is turned off, JBIG Reception is not available.
❒ This feature is not available with
G4 lines.
63
RECEIVING A FAX MESSAGE
PRINTING FUNCTIONS
er correctly when you file received
messages.
Print Completion Beep
By default, the machine beeps to let
you know when a received message
has been printed.
Note
❒ You can alter the volume of the
beep or turn it off completely (set
the volume at minimum). ⇒ P.192
“Monitor Volume”
3
ND1X00E6
Checkered Mark
By default, a checkered mark is printed on the first page of fax messages to
help you separate them.
Limitation
❒ The center mark may deviate a little from the exact center of the
edge.
Note
❒ You can turn this feature on or off.
⇒ P.203 “Changing the User Parameters”
Reception Time
ND1X00E5
Note
❒ You can turn this feature off. ⇒
P.203 “Changing the User Parameters”
Center Mark
By default, marks are printed halfway
the left side and at the top center of
each page received. This makes it
easy for you to position a hole punch-
64
You can have the date and time when
a message was received printed at the
bottom of the received image. This
feature is turned off by default–turn it
on with the User Parameters. ⇒ P.203
“Changing the User Parameters”
Limitation
❒ When a received message is printed on two or more sheets, the date
and time is printed on the last
page.
Note
❒ The date and time when the message was printed can be also be recorded on the message. If you need
this feature, please contact your
service representative.
PRINTING FUNCTIONS
Multi-copy Reception
The Optional Fax Feature Expander is required to use this function.
If you switch this feature on, multiple
copies of each incoming fax message
will be printed. You can also choose
to have multiple copies made of messages from particular senders. ⇒
P.161 “INITIAL SETUP RX”, P.182
“Special Senders to Treat Differently
(Special RX Nos.)”
With this option installed, you can
have a received message printed on
both sides of the paper. By default,
this feature is turned off. Switch it on
with the Initial Setup RX and select
lengthwise L copy paper. ⇒ P.161
“INITIAL SETUP RX”
3
ND1X00E8
ND1X00E7
Limitation
❒ The maximum number of copies
that can be made of each message
is 10. If you are using Multi-copy
with Specified Senders, the maximum number is 10.
Note
❒ By default this feature is turned
off. Switch it on and set the number of copies with the Initial Setup
RX. ⇒ P.161 “INITIAL SETUP RX”
Limitation
❒ To use this function all pages of the
received document must be of the
same size-inform the sending party of this beforehand if necessary.
You must also have paper set in
your machine of the same size as
that sent by the sending party
(A4→A4, B4→B4 are typical examples, whether A3 and B5 sizes are
scanned in correctly will depend
on the fax machine). This machine
will scan in correctly landscape
A3,B4,A4,B5 and portrait A4, B5
and A5. The table below shows the
results that can be achieved when
❒ Note that the machine will use
Memory Reception for Multi-copy.
2-Sided Printing
An optional Duplex Tray and Fax Feature Expander are required to use this
function.
65
RECEIVING A FAX MESSAGE
sending and receiving using this
machine.
Originals
Top Binding Side Binding
ABC
A
B
L
T
3
A
B
ABC
L
G
.
B
ABC
D
L
T
A
ND0X05E3
❒ If the Duplex Unit cover is not
open, you cannot print double-sided documents that are more than
11.7” long and they will be printed
single-sided only.
❒ Note that the machine will use
Memory Reception for 2-Sided
Printing.
❒ This feature cannot be used with
Two in One.
❒ Printouts may vary in their direction/orientation depending on
how the sender set them.
❒ If another party sends you a fax
and their machine is not able to detect the size of the original correctly, the message may come out
truncated, separated or containing
excess white space when printed at
your end. For example, if the sending machine thinks a B5 original is
a B4 original, it will be printed at
your end on B4 size paper even if
you have B5 paper available in
your machine.
Note
❒ You can choose to have messages
only from selected senders printed
in this way. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the
User Parameters”
180 Degree Rotation Printing
When printing on both sides of the
paper, this machine rotates images as
shown in the diagram.
2
1
2
1
ND6A01E2
❒ This feature works only when all
pages are of the same width and
are received into memory.
66
CP2B02E0
PRINTING FUNCTIONS
Image Rotation
If you have installed paper in the cassette sideways K, incoming fax messages will be rotated automatically to
fit on the paper.
• Two 81/2 × 5.5 “ K messages are
printed side by side on a sheet of
81/2 × 11” L.
your machine
3
ND1X01E0
ND1X00E9
Limitation
❒ You can choose to have received
messages printed from the a specified tray. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the
User Parameters”
Two In One
When two messages of the same size
and direction are received consecutively, they are printed on a single
sheet when you turn this feature on.
This can help you economize on paper.
• Two A5 K messages are printed
side by side on a sheet of A4 L.
• Two B5 K messages are printed
side by side on a sheet of B4 L.
• Two A4 K messages are printed
side by side on a sheet of A3 L.
Limitation
❒ This feature does not work with
messages larger than A5 K, B5 K,
A4 K, or LT K. When A5 K, B5
K, A4 K or LT K size paper is
loaded in the machine, each page
of the received message is output
on a single sheet.
❒ If paper matching the size and direction of a received document is
not available, Two In One is not
possible.
Note
❒ By default this feature is turned
off. Switch it on with the User Parameters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the
User Parameters”
❒ This feature uses Memory Reception.
Page Separation and Length
Reduction (not available in
some countries)
When the size of a received message
is longer than the paper loaded in the
machine, each page of the message
can be split and printed on several
sheets, or reduced and printed on a
single sheet. For example, when LT
67
RECEIVING A FAX MESSAGE
L paper is loaded, this feature splits
the received message if the excess
length is about 0.79” or more, and reduces it if the excess length is within
about 0.79”. When a message is split,
the split mark (*) is inserted at the
split position and about 0.39” of the
split area is duplicated on the top of
the second sheet.
ing the message from the last page
received. By default, this feature is
turned off but you can turn it on with
the Initial Setup RX. ⇒ P.161 “INITIAL SETUP RX” Note that when on,
this feature will use Memory Reception.
When this feature is on, the first page
will be printed last.
3
your machine
ABC
(Document)
Print
ND1X01E1
ND1X01E2
Note
❒ Your service representative can
customize this feature with the following settings. Bracketed values
are defaults.
•
•
•
•
•
Reduction (on)
Print split mark (on)
Overprinting (on)
Overprinting length (0.39”)
Guideline for split (when message is 0.79” longer than paper)
❒ You can adjust the overprinting
length and length of reduction
within the following ranges:
• Guideline for split: 0 – 6.1”
• Overprinting length: 0.16”,
0.39”, 0.79”, 1.57”
Reverse Order Printing
Page Reduction
If you have switched this feature on
and you receive a message that is
longer than the paper in the cassette,
usually the machine prints it on two
pages. If you turn this feature on the
machine reduces the width and
length of the received image so that it
will fit on one page. If A4 L paper
size is loaded and a message of B4 L
size is received, the machine will reduce the message to a single A4 L
sheet.
your machine
(B4 size)
reduction
(A4 size)
Normally, received pages are printed
and stacked on the tray in the order
they are received. If you turn this feature on, the machine will start print-
68
ND1X01E3
PRINTING FUNCTIONS
Note
❒ By default this feature is turned
off. Switch it on with the User Parameters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the
User Parameters”
Reference
P.67 “Page Separation and Length Reduction (not available in some countries)”
TSI Print
Usually the sender's TTI is printed on
received messages. If the sender has
not programmed their TTI, you will
not be able to identify them. However, if you turn this feature on, the
sender's RTI P.193 “RTI/TTI” or CSI
P.193 “RTI/TTI” is printed instead so
you can find out where the message
came from.
Note
❒ You can turn it on or off with the
User Parameters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the User Parameters”
CIL/TID Print
The ISDN unit is required to use this
function.
Two features are provided for identification of messages received by G4
(ISDN). If turned on, this information
will be printed on every page. Turn
CIL and TID on and off with the User
Parameters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the
User Parameters”
The CIL (Call Identification Line) refers to the combination of the receiver's own fax number, name, the
sender's own fax number and name,
time, and page number. The default
setting is on. The TID refers to the
name registered by the sender in their
TTI. The default setting is on.
3
Limitation
❒ This feature is available only when
receiving in G4 mode.
Note
❒ You can turn CIL off with the User
Parameters.
When There is No Paper of the Correct Size
If there is no paper in your machine that matches the size of a received message,
the machine will choose a paper size based upon the paper you have available.
For example, if your machine has LG (8.5 × 15”) L installed and you receive an
LT (8.5 × 14”) L size message, check the LT column of the table below. The paper size at the top has the highest priority. In this case, since LG (8.5 × 14”) L is
higher priority than DLT (11 × 17”) K, the message is printed on LG (8.5 × 14”)
L.
❖ Priority Table
Page Reduction
Disabled
Reduction in Sub-scan Direction
Enabled
Page Separation Threshold
20 mm
Width or Length Priority
Width
69
RECEIVING A FAX MESSAGE
Image Rotation
Half of the page is blank
Page Reduction
A4
B5
2
11x17"
A3
A4
B5
B4
11x17"
4 A4
B5
B5
8.5x11"
7
F/F4
A4
8.5x11"
A3
A3
A4
8.5x11"
F/F4
A4
8.5x11"
6
8.5x14"
8.5x11"
5
F/F4
8.5x11"
3 A4
A4
A4
A5
A3
8.5x14"
8.5x11"
8.5x11"
11x17"
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
8.5x11"
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
F/F4
8.5x11"
A3
F/F4
F/F4
8.5x14"
A4
A4
8.5x11"
8.5x11"
A4
8.5x11"
B4
8.5x11"
8.5x11"
A3
8.5x14"
F/F4
8.5x11"
F/F4
8.5x14"
8.5x14"
F/F4
B4
A3
11x17"
B4
B4
A3
B4
B4
A3
8.5x14"
11x17"
11x17"
8.5x14"
11x17"
F/F4
1
11x17"
A5
8.5x11"
B5
8.5x11"
A4
8.5x11"
A4
8.5x11"
B4
8.5x11"
Paper Select Priorities
3
A3
8.5x11"
Received Image Size
11x17"
8.5x11"
B4
B4
F/F4
8.5x11"
11x17"
8.5x14"
A3
B5
10
F/F4
A5
11x17"
A3
A5
A5
A5
11
8.5x14"
8.5x14"
B4
B5
B5
B5
8 B4
9
12
8.5x14"
B5
B5
B5
11x17"
B5
B5
B5
Lengthwise
Sideways
ND0X01E5
• KK and LL indicate that the message is split over two pages of paper with
the orientation and size shown.
Limitation
❒ Paper placed in the bypass tray is not usually selected for printing a received
message. However, you can use this tray if you select the bypass tray as the
main paper tray using Reception with Specified Senders. ⇒ P.182 “Special
Senders to Treat Differently (Special RX Nos.)”
❒ The paper size used to print a received message may be different from the size
of the sent original.
Note
❒ Widths that this machine can receive are A4, B4, LT, LG, and A3. Any messages narrower than A4 or LT are sent as A4 or LT width with the length unchanged.
70
PRINTING FUNCTIONS
Reference
P.67 “Page Separation and Length Reduction (not available in some countries)”
P.68 “Page Reduction”
P.67 “Image Rotation”
Just Size Printing
If you turn this feature on and no paper tray is stocked with paper of a suitable
size to print a received document, a message will appear on the display prompting you to load paper of the required size. When you have loaded the new paper,
you can then print the message.
Two messages can appear:
• Paper Cassette
3
Paper designated to print FAX/Lists are
empty.
Refill A4 paper.
OK
ND0X04E0
• Bypass Tray
Paper designated to print FAX/Lists are
empty.
Refill A4 paper to Bypass trey.
OK
ND0X01E6
Note
❒ You can turn this message on or off with the User Parameters ⇒ P.203
“Changing the User Parameters”. By default this message is turned off.
Out Of Paper Display Message
If the paper tray runs out of paper, you can have a message appear on the display asking you to add more paper.
Note
❒ By default this message is turned off. You can turn it with the User Parameters. See P.203 “Changing the User Parameters”
71
RECEIVING A FAX MESSAGE
Having Incoming Messages
Printed on Paper From the
Bypass Tray
You can have messages sent from
Specified Senders printed on paper
from the Bypass Tray. This is useful if
you need messages printed on a size
of paper not stocked in the paper cassette(s).
3
Limitation
❒ When the optional Fax Feature Expander is installed, you can set paper between 128 and 800 mm long
in the Bypass Tray.
Note
❒ Before you can use this feature,
you need to turn on Authorized
Reception (Initial Setup RX settings, P.161 “INITIAL SETUP
RX”), program the Specified Senders (Key Operator Settings, Special
RX No.) along with the Paper Tray
set to “Bypass Tray”.
❒ When you set paper sizes other
than A4 landscape, B4 landscape
and portrait, A3 landscape and
portrait in the Bypass Tray, specify
the paper size.⇒ P.162 “To set the
Bypass Paper Size”
❒ If the specified paper size and the
size of paper set in the Bypass Tray
do not match, paper jams may occur and the image may be truncated.
❒ If you use this feature, Image Rotation is not possible.
72
4. Advanced Transmission
Features
OVERVIEW
Overview
This feature describes various options that you can choose when sending a fax
message. The selections you make will only apply to the current fax message.
73
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES
SEND LATER
Using this feature, you can instruct
the machine to delay transmission of
your fax message until a later time
which you specify. This allows you to
take advantage of off-peak telephone
charges without having to be by the
machine at the time.
B Press [Mode].
Transmitter
ND1X02E9
The Transmission Mode menu appears.
Receiver
4
C Enter the “Send
Later” function
number with number keys.
Send Later
at 21:00 (9:00PM)
ND1X01E4
For ease of use, you can program the
time when your phone charges become cheaper as the Economy Transmission time. ⇒ P.195 “Registering
The Economy Transmission Time”
Then if you have a non urgent fax,
just select Send Later with Economy
Transmission when you scan it in.
Faxes will be queued in memory and
will start being sent at Economy
Transmission time.
Note
❒ You can not specify a time more
than 24 hours into the future.
❒ If you wish to use Economy Transmission, program the time when
your phone charges get cheaper. ⇒
P.195 “Registering The Economy
Transmission Time”
❒ This feature is only available with
Memory Transmission.
A Set your original and select any
scan settings you require.
74
D Enter the time with the number
keys. To change AM/PM, press
the [AM ↔ PM] (North America
only) or press [Economy TX].
Note
❒ If the current time shown on the
display is not correct, adjust it.
⇒ P.208 “Date/Time”
❒ When entering numbers smaller than 10, add a leading zero.
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear/Stop}
} key and try again.
❒ To cancel Send Later, press
[Cancel] and the display will return to the Transmission Mode
menu.
SEND LATER
E Press [OK].
The Transmission Mode menu is
shown on the display. A check
mark is added to Send Later.
F Press [Exit].
4
ND1X03E0
The initial display is shown.
Note
❒ “Send Later” is shown on the
display. If you set up another
advanced transmission function
(except Polling Reception),
“Others” is displayed.
G Dial and press the {Start}} key.
Note
❒ You can cancel transmission of
a message set up for Send Later.
⇒ P.103 “Canceling a Transmission”
75
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES
CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION
If you do not want your message to be
picked up casually at the other end,
use this feature. The message will be
stored in memory at the other end
and will not be printed until an ID is
entered.
Transmitter
Receiver
4
ND1X01E5
Preparation
If you install the optional Fax Feature Expander or Hard Disk option, program the Confidential ID.
⇒ P.196 “ID Code”
Limitation
❒ The destination machine must be
of the same make and have the
Confidential Reception feature.
❒ The destination machine must
have enough memory available.
Note
❒ If the optional Fax Feature Expander is installed, we recommend
that you program the Confidential
ID beforehand.
❒ An ID can be any 4 digit number
except 0000.
A Set your original and select any
scan settings you require.
B Press [Mode].
There are two types of Confidential
Transmission:
❖ Default ID
The other party can print the message by entering the Confidential
ID programmed in their machine.
❖ ID Override
Should you wish to send a confidential message to a particular person at the other end, you can
specify the Confidential ID that
person has to enter to see that message. Before you send the message,
don't forget to tell the intended receiver the ID that must be entered
to print it.
76
ND1X02E9
The Transmission Mode menu appears.
C Enter the “Confidential TX” func-
tion number with the number
keys.
D Depending
on the Confidential
Transmission type, use one of the
following procedures:
CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION
Default ID
A Press the < or > keys to turn
Default ID on and press [OK].
Note
❒ To Cancel the Confidential
Transmission, press [Cancel].
The Transmission Mode
menu is shown on the display.
E Press [Exit].
The Transmission Mode menu
is shown again. A check mark is
added to Confidential TX.
Note
❒ To cancel the Confidential
Transmission, press [Cancel].
The Transmission Mode
menu is shown on the display.
4
ND1X03E0
The initial display is shown.
Override ID
A Press the < or >keys to turn
Override ID on.
B Enter the Confidential ID (4digit number) with the number
keys and press [OK].
Note
❒ “Conf.Trans” is shown on the
display. If you set up another
advanced transmission function
(except Polling Reception),
“Others” is displayed.
F Dial and press the {Start}} key.
Note
❒ For details on deleting a Confidential Transmission. ⇒ P.76
“CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION”
ND1X03E0
The Transmission Mode menu
is shown again. A check mark is
added to Confidential TX.
77
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES
PERSONAL CODE TRANSMISSION
Personal Codes allow you to keep
track of machine usage (e.g., for billing purposes). If everybody uses a
Personal Code when they use the fax
machine, the codes or the names programmed for the codes will be printed in the TCR and other reports. This
will help you to check up on who has
been using the machine and how often. ⇒ P.116 “PRINTING THE TCR”
Limitation
❒ Personal codes may be any 4-digit
number except 0000 (0001 through
9999). You can program up to 20
personal codes. If the Optional Fax
Feature Expander is installed, up
to 50 personal codes can be programmed. ⇒ P.166 “Registering
Personal Codes”
4
A Set your original and select any
scan settings you require.
B Press [Mode].
D Enter
a personal code (4-digit
number) with the number keys.
Note
❒ If a personal code is programmed with a name, it is
shown below the personal code
on the display.
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear/Stop}
} key and try again.
❒ To cancel the Personal Code
Transmission, press [Cancel].
The Transmission Mode menu
is shown on the display.
E Press [OK].
The Transmission Mode menu is
shown again. A check mark is added to “Personal Code”.
F Press [Exit].
ND1X02E9
The Transmission Mode menu appears.
C Enter a “Personal Code” function
number with the number keys.
78
ND1X03E0
The initial display is shown.
PERSONAL CODE TRANSMISSION
Note
❒ “Pers. Code XXXX” is shown on
the display. If you set up another advanced transmission function (except Polling Reception),
“Others” is displayed.
G Dial and press the {Start}} key.
4
79
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES
SENDING AN AUTO DOCUMENT
If you often have to send a particular
page to people (e.g., a map, a standard attachment or a set of instructions), store it as an Auto Document
assigned to a Quick Dial key. Then,
when you need to send that page to
somebody, just press the Quick Dial
that you assigned it to instead of having to scan the whole page in again.
❒ You can print an Auto Document
or a summary of Auto Documents
currently stored in memory. ⇒
P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”
A Set your original and select any
scan settings you require.
B Press [Mode ].
Preparation
You need to program an Auto Document.
4
You can fax an Auto Document by itself, or attach it to a normal fax message.
Important
❒ Whenever you store or change an
Auto Document, we recommend
that you print the Auto Document
list for reference. ⇒ P.153 “Auto
Document list”
ND1X02E9
The Transmission Mode menu appears.
C Enter the “Auto Document” func-
tion number with the number
keys.
Limitation
❒ You can attach one Auto Document to each transmission.
❒ You can store up to 6 Auto Documents. With optional Feature Expander, you can store up to 18
Auto Documents. ⇒ P.151 “Registering Auto Documents”
D Enter
the number of the Auto
Document you want to send with
the number keys.
Note
❒ Originals with Auto Documents
are sent by Memory Transmission.
❒ When sending an Auto Document
with another original, the Auto
Document is sent first.
❒ Storing Auto Documents reduces
the amount of free memory slightly. Unless you delete the document, free memory will not return
to 100%.
80
Note
❒ If the list does not contain the
Auto Document you want to
send, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next] .
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear/Stop}
} key and try again.
SENDING AN AUTO DOCUMENT
❒ To cancel the Auto Document,
press [Cancel]. The Transmission Mode menu is shown.
E If you are sending just the Auto
Document, press [#]. If you wish
to send it along with another original, press [OK].
The Transmission Mode menu is
redisplayed. A check mark is added to “Auto Document”.
4
F Press [Exit].
ND2C0104
The initial display is shown.
Note
❒ “Auto Doc.” is shown on the
display. If you set up another
advanced transmission function
(except Polling Reception),
“Others” is displayed.
G Dial and press the {Start}} key.
81
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES
2-SIDED TRANSMISSION (DOUBLE-SIDED
TRANSMISSION)
Use this feature to send 2-sided originals from the Document Feeder
(ADF). Both sides of an original will
be scanned. The front and back of the
scanned original will be printed in order, on separate sheets at the other
end. Note that the orientation of alternate sheets may be reversed at the
other end.
4
B Press [Mode].
ND1X02E9
Limitation
❒ The front and back of a 2-sided
document are scanned in different
directions. This means that when
the front and back sheets of each
page are printed at the other end,
they may be upside-down in relation to each other.
C Enter the “2-Sided TX” function
Note
❒ If the first page is a single-sided
cover sheet, you can choose to
have this page sent using singlesided transmission. The remaining
pages will be sent using Duplex.
D Press the < or > key to select the
The Transmission Mode menu appears.
number with the number keys.
first page that you want to be
scanned on both sides.
❒ You can confirm whether both
sides were properly scanned in
with the Stamp feature ⇒ P.52
“Stamp”.
A Set your original in the Document
Feeder (ADF) and select any scan
settings you require.
Note
❒ If your document contains the
single-sided cover letter as the
first page, select From 2nd
sheet, so that the machine scan
both sides from the second
page.
E Press [OK] .
82
2-SIDED TRANSMISSION (DOUBLE-SIDED TRANSMISSION)
F Press [Exit].
The initial display is shown.
Note
❒ “2-Sided TX” is shown on the
display. If you set up another
advanced transmission function
(except Polling Reception),
“Others” is displayed.
4
The Transmission Mode menu is
redisplayed. A check mark is added to “2-Sided TX”.
G Dial and press the {Start}}
key.
83
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES
BOOK FAX
Use to send book originals from the
exposure glass. Pages are scanned in
the order shown below.
Note that depending on the paper sizes available on the destination machine, the message may be reduced
when printed at the other end.
C Enter
the “Book Fax” function
number with the number keys.
D Press the < or > keys to select
the size of the original.
4
Exposure glass
ND1X01E6
Note
❒ You can have bound originals
scanned in left page first or right
page first. By default, the machine
scans in the left page first but you
can change this setting with the
User Parameters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the User Parameters”
❒ If you choose 11×17”, the original will be sent using Image Rotation Transmission.
A Set your original on the exposure
E Press [S
S Pages] to toggle between
glass and select any scan settings
you require.
Note
❒ To cancel this mode, press [Cancel]. The Transmission Mode
menu is shown on the display.
pages 1 and 2 (see middle right
corner of the display).
B Press [Mode] .
ND1X02E7
ND1X02E9
The Transmission Mode menu appears.
Note
❒ Select “From Page 1” to send a
book original from the first
page. Select “From Page 2” if
you want to send a cover letter
as the first page.
F Press [OK].
84
BOOK FAX
The Transmission Mode menu is
shown. A check mark is added to
“Book Fax”.
G Press [Exit].
ND1X03E0
The initial display is shown.
4
Note
❒ “Book Fax” is shown on the display. If you set up another advanced transmission function
(except Polling Reception),
“Others” is displayed.
H Dial and press the {Start}} key.
Bound Original Page Order
When sending bound originals
(books, magazines etc.), you can
choose to have either the left page or
right page sent first.
Note
❒ The default setting is Send Left
Page First. You can change this setting with the User Parameters ⇒
P.203 “Changing the User Parameters”.
85
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES
CHOOSING THE AREA TO BE SCANNED
YOURSELF (IRREGULAR SCAN AREA)
Usually the machine automatically
detects the size of an original when it
is scanned. However, you may wish
to override this and choose the area to
be scanned yourself.
4
ADF
C Enter the “Irreg. Scan Area” func-
tion number with the number
keys.
D Press the < or > key to select the
paper size.
exposure glass
ND0X01E3
You can either choose one of the standard paper sizes (A4 KL, B4 L, A3
L, 81/2 × 11" K L, 11" × 17" K) or
one of two custom sizes programmed
in advance (Area 1 and Area 2). ⇒
P.16 “Paper Size and Scanned Area”
Although you can specify a different
scan area for each page when using
the exposure glass, only one size is allowed when scanning from the Document Feeder (ADF).
A Set your original and select any
scan settings you require.
B Press [Mode].
Note
❒ To see which paper sizes have
already been programmed,
press [Status].
❒ To cancel the Irreg. Scan Area,
press [Cancel]. The Transmission Mode menu is shown.
E Press [OK].
The Transmission Mode menu is
shown again. A check mark is added to Irreg. Scan Area.
F Press [Exit].
ND1X02E9
The Transmission Mode menu appears.
86
ND1X03E0
CHOOSING THE AREA TO BE SCANNED YOURSELF (IRREGULAR SCAN AREA)
The initial display is shown.
Note
❒ “Irreg.Area” is shown on the
display. If you set up another
advanced transmission function
(except Polling Reception),
“Others” is displayed.
G Dial and press the {Start}}
key.
4
87
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES
TRANSMISSION DEADLINE (TRD)
If you have to send an urgent message and the line is busy, this feature
saves you standing by the machine
and redialing the number. If the message cannot be sent the first time, the
machine redials automatically at intervals of five minutes any number of
times until the deadline passes. After
the deadline passes, the Transmission
Result Report is automatically printed. This indicates whether or not the
message was sent within the deadline.
4
Limitation
❒ You can not specify a deadline
more than 24 hours into the future.
Note
❒ If the message cannot be sent before the deadline and the number
of redials is less than 5, the machine continues redialing until it
has redialed five times then prints
the Transmission Result report. If
the number of redials has already
reached 5, the machine prints the
Transmission Result report and
stops transmission.
A Set your original and select any
scan settings you require.
B Press [Mode].
C Enter the “Trans. Deadline” func-
tion number with the number
keys.
Note
❒ If the appropriate display is not
↓Next].
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
D Enter the deadline with the number keys.
Note
❒ If the current time on the display is not correct, adjust it. ⇒
P.208 “Date/Time”
❒ To enter a number smaller than
10, add a leading zero.
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear/Stop}
} key and try again.
❒ To cancel the Transmission
Deadline, press [Cancel]. The
Transmission Mode menu is
shown.
E Press [OK].
The Transmission Mode menu is
shown. A check mark is added to
“Trans. Deadline”.
ND1X02E9
The Transmission Mode menu appears.
88
TRANSMISSION DEADLINE (TRD)
F Press [Exit].
ND1X03E0
The initial display is shown.
4
Note
❒ “TRD” is displayed. If you set
up another advanced transmission function (except Polling
Reception), “Others” is shown.
G Dial and press the {Start}} key.
89
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES
POLLING TRANSMISSION
Use Polling Transmission when you
want to leave an original in the machine's memory for others to pick up.
The message will be sent when the
other party calls you up.
Transmitter
(This machine)
Transmission Receiver
Request
4
ND1X01E7
There are three types of Polling
Transmission.
❖ Free Polling Transmission
Anybody can poll the message
from your machine. The machine
sends it regardless of whether Polling ID's match.
❖ Default ID Polling Transmission
The message will only be sent if the
Polling ID of the machine trying to
poll your message is the same as
the Polling ID stored in your machine. Make sure that both machines' Polling IDs are identical in
advance.
❖ Override ID Polling Transmission
You must enter an Override Polling ID unique to this transmission.
This ID overrides that stored in the
Polling ID. The user must supply
this ID when they poll your machine and if the IDs match, the
message is sent. Make sure the other end knows the ID you are using
in advance.
Limitation
❒ Polling Transmission is allowed
only if the receiver's machine has
the Polling Reception feature. With
Free Polling, a message can also be
sent to other manufacturer's machines as long as they have the
Polling Reception feature. With
Default ID and Override ID Polling Transmission, an original can
be sent only to a the machine of the
same make with the Polling Reception feature.
❒ Free Polling and ID Polling Transmission allow only one file to be
stored in memory. Personal ID
Polling Transmission allows a file
to be stored in memory for each ID;
a total of up to 200 files for varying
ID's can be stored.
❒ Before using “Default ID Polling”
and “Override ID Polling”, you
need to program the polling ID.
❒ A polling ID may be any string of
four numbers (0 to 9) and characters (A to F) except 0000 and FFFF.
Note
❒ The communication fee is charged
to the receiver.
A Set your original and select any
scan settings you require.
B Press [Mode].
ND1X02E9
90
POLLING TRANSMISSION
The Transmission Mode menu appears.
C Enter
the “Polling TX” function
number with the number keys.
lect “Use once”. To repeatedly send the original, select
“Save”.
Default ID Polling Transmission
A Press the < or >key to select
“Default ID” and press [OK].
Note
❒ If the appropriate display is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
D Depending on the Polling Trans-
mission type, use one of the following procedures:
B Press [S
S File] and specify
whether to save the stored original or not.
4
Free Polling Transmission
A Press the < or > key to select[Free Poll.] then press [OK].
ND1X02E7
B Press[S
S File] and specify
whether to save the stored original or not.
Each time you press the key, the
text at the middle right corner of
the display toggles between
“Save” and “Use once”.
Note
❒ To delete the original immediately after transmission, select “Use once”. To repeatedly send the original, select
“Save”.
ND1X02E7
Each time you press the key, the
text at the middle right corner of
the display toggles between
“Save” and “Use once”.
ID Override Polling Transmission
A Press the < or >key to select
ID Override and press [OK].
Note
❒ To delete the original immediately after transmission, se-
91
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES
B Enter the 4 character Polling ID
with letter keys/ number keys
and the letter (A–F).
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press
the {Clear/Stop}
} key and try
again.
F Press [Exit].
ND1X03E0
The initial display is shown.
0000 and FFFF is not available.
C Press [S
S File] and specify
whether to save the stored original.
4
Note
❒ “Polling TX” is displayed. If
you set up other advanced
transmission function (except
Polling Reception), “Others” is
displayed.
G Press the {Start}} key.
ND1X02E7
Each time you press the key, the
text at the middle right corner of
the display toggles between
“Save” and “Use once”.
Note
❒ To delete the original immediately after transmission, select “Use once”. To repeatedly send the original, select
“Save”.
E Press [OK].
The Transmission Mode menu is
shown. A check mark is added to
“Polling TX”.
Note
❒ To cancel the Polling Transmission, press [Cancel]. The Transmission Mode menu is shown.
92
Polling Transmission Clear
Report
This report allows you to verify
whether Polling Transmission has
taken place.
Limitation
❒ This report is not printed if the
User Parameters are set to allow
the stored originals to be repeatedly sent (Save). ⇒ P.203 “Changing
the User Parameters”
Note
❒ This report is turned on by default.
You can turn it off if you wish. ⇒
P.203 “Changing the User Parameters”
❒ By default, a portion of the sent image is printed on the report. You
POLLING TRANSMISSION
can turn this off with the User Parameters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the
User Parameters”
❒ You can also check the result of a
Polling Transmission with the
TCR.
4
93
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES
POLLING RECEPTION
Use this function if you want to poll a
message from another terminal. You
can also poll documents from many
terminals with only one operation
(use Groups and Keystroke programs
to fully exploit this feature).
Receiver
Sender
(This machine)
Transmission
Request
4
ND1X01E8
There are two types of Polling Reception.
❖ Default ID Polling Reception (Free
Polling Reception)
Use this method for Free Polling or
Default ID Polling. If the Polling ID
is programmed in your machine,
any messages waiting in the transmitting machine with the same ID
are received. If the other machine
does not have any messages waiting with the same Polling ID, any
messages that do not require ID
are received (Free Polling).
❖ Override ID Polling Reception
You must enter an Override Polling ID unique to this transmission.
This ID overrides that stored in the
Polling ID.
Your machine will receive any
messages waiting in the transmitting machine with matching ID's.
If no ID's match, any messages that
do not require ID are received
(Free Polling).
94
Limitation
❒ Polling Reception requires that the
other machine can perform Polling
Transmission.
❒ To receive a message sent by any
Default ID Polling Transmission or
Override ID Polling Transmission,
it is necessary to specify the same
polling ID as the sender's.
❒ To receive a message sent by Default ID Polling Transmission or
Override ID Polling Transmission,
the sender must use a machine of
the same make that has polling capability. With Free Polling Reception, a message can be also
received from other manufacturers' machines as long as they have
polling capability.
❒ A Polling ID may be any four numbers (0 to 9) and characters (A to F)
except 0000 and FFFF.
A Press [Mode].
ND1X02E9
The Transmission Mode menu appears.
B Enter the “Polling RX” function
number with the number keys.
POLLING RECEPTION
Note
❒ If the appropriate display is not
↓Next].
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
E Press [Exit].
C Depending
which method you
are using, choose one of the following procedures:
Default ID Polling Reception
A Press the < or > key to select
the Default ID and press [OK].
ND1X03E0
The following display is shown.
4
ID Override Polling Reception
A Press the < or > key to select
the Override ID and press [OK].
Note
❒ “Polling RX” is displayed.
F Dial and press the {Start}} key.
Polling Reserve Report
This report is printed after Polling Reception has been set up.
B Enter a polling ID (4 characters) with the number keys and
the letter (A–F).
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press
the {Clear/Stop}
} key and try
again.
❒ 0000 and FFFF is not available.
D Press [OK].
The Transmission Mode menu is
shown. A check mark is added to
Polling Reception.
Note
❒ To cancel Polling Reception,
press [Cancel]. The Transmission Mode menu is shown.
Note
❒ By default this report is turned off.
Turn it on with the User Parameters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the User
Parameters”
Polling Result Report
This report is printed after a Polling
Reception has been completed and
shows the result of the Polling Reception.
Note
❒ You can also check the result of a
Polling Reception with the TCR.
❒ By default this report is turned on.
Turn it on with the User Parameters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the User
Parameters”
95
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES
TRANSFER REQUEST
Transfer Request allows fax machines
that have this feature to automatically
distribute incoming messages onto
multiple fax destinations. This feature
helps you save costs when you send
the same message to more than one
place in a distant area, and saves time
since many messages can be sent in a
single operation.
The diagram below may make the
concept clearer.
4
Requesting
party
End Receiver
Transfer
Station
End Receiver
Transfer
Result Report
End Receiver
ND1X01E9
Preparation
Before you can use this feature you
must program the Polling ID and
your own dial number. ⇒ P.196
“Polling ID”, P.198 “G3 Analog
Line”
Polling ID's of the requesting party
(this machine) and Transfer Stations must be identical.
The following terminology is used in
this section.
❖ Requesting Party
The machine where the message
originates from, i.e. the machine
making a Transfer Request (in this
section, this machine).
❖ Transfer Station
The machine that forwards the incoming message to another desti96
nation, i.e. the machine that
receives the Transfer Request.
❖ End Receiver
The final destination of the message, i.e. the machine that the
Transfer Station sends to. End Receivers must be programmed into
Quick Dials, Speed Dials or
Groups in the Transfer Station.
Limitation
❒ The Transfer Stations you specify
must be machines of the same
make as this machine and have the
Transfer Station function.
❒ You can specify up to 99 Transfer
Stations in a Transfer Request.
❒ You can have up to 30 End Receivers per Transfer Station. If you
specify a Transfer Station Group,
the Group counts as a single receiver.
❒ The combined total of End Receivers and Transfer Stations you specify with the number keys cannot
exceed 99.
A Set an original and select any scan
settings you require.
B Press [Mode].
ND1X02E9
The Transmission Mode menu appears.
TRANSFER REQUEST
C Enter
the “Transfer Request”
function number with the number keys.
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ If the appropriate display is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
D Enter
a Transfer Stations and
press [Recv. Stn].
Note
❒ You cannot enter the numbers
of the End Receivers directly.
The numbers must be stored in
Quick Dials, Speed Dials or
Groups in the Transfer Station(s). To specify an End Receiver, use the special format
described in ⇒ P.98 “Specifying
an End Receiver”.
❒ Press [Add RcvStn] if you wish
enter more End Receivers.
❒ Press < or > to see the End Receivers already entered. You
can select an End Receiver from
this list and cancel it by pressing
the {Clear/Stop}
} key.
❒ To cancel the Transfer Request,
press [Cancel].
4
F When you have specified all the
End Receivers, press [OK].
G If you want to enter an additional
Transfer Station, press [Yes] and
repeat steps 4 to 6.
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ Enter the fax numbers of the
Transfer Stations with either
Quick Dials, Speed Dials or the
number keys.
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear/Stop}
} key and try again.
❒ To cancel the Transfer Request,
press[Cancel] . The Transmission Mode menu is shown
again.
If you press [No], the Transmission
Mode menu is shown and a check
mark is added to Transfer Request.
H Press [Exit].
E Enter one or more End Receivers.
ND1X03E0
97
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES
The following display is shown.
Note
❒ The numbers of Transfer Stations and End Receivers are displayed.
I Press the {Start}} key.
Specifying an End Receiver
4
When you make a Transfer Request,
you must specify the final destinations (End Receivers) for your message.
You cannot enter the numbers of the
End Receivers directly. Instead, enter
a simple code that describes where
the numbers are stored in the Transfer Station (in Quick Dials, Speed Dials or Groups).
The numbers must first have been
stored in Quick Dials, Speed Dials or
Groups in the Transfer Station(s).
❖ Quick Dial
Enter {q } followed by the number (2 digits) of the Quick Dial
where the End Receiver is stored.
For example, to choose the number
stored in Quick Dial 01 in the
Transfer Station, enter: {q } {0}
}
}
{1}
❖ Speed Dial
Enter {q }, {p}
} followed by the
Speed Dial code (2 or 3 digits).
For example, to choose the number
stored in Speed Dial 12 in the
Transfer Station, enter:{
{q } {p}
}
} {2}
}
{1}
98
❖ Group Dial
Enter{
}, {p}
} followed
{q } , {p}
by the Group number (2 digits).
For example, to choose the number
stored in Group 04 in the Transfer
Station, enter:{
{q } {p}
} {p}
} {0
}{4}
}
TRANSMISSION OPTIONS
TRANSMISSION OPTIONS
This section describes various features that you can switch on and off
for any particular transmission by following the procedure at the end of
this section.
In addition, if you frequently use a
certain configuration of options, you
can change the default home position
(on or off) of each option with the
User Parameters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing
the User Parameters”
of the image when received at the
other end.
Note
❒ Program the receiver's name and
number in a Quick Dial or Speed
Dial with Label Insertion turned
on with the user parameter.
4
- Auto Reduction
- TTI (Transmit Terminal
Identification) Print
By default, the machine adds your
TTI identification to each message
you send so it appears on the printed
fax at the other end. You can change
your TTI with the Key Operator Settings. ⇒ P.166 “KEY OPERATOR
SETTINGS”
Note
❒ You can switch this feature off
with the User Parameters. ⇒ P.203
“Changing the User Parameters”
- Label Insertion
With this feature you can have the receiver's name printed on the message
when it is received at the other end.
The name will be printed at the top of
the page and will be preceded by
“To”.
Limitation
❒ If you select Label Insertion, the label might be printed over a portion
By default, if the receiver's paper is
smaller than the paper you are sending on, the message is automatically
reduced to fit onto the paper available
at the other end.
Transmitter
(This machine)
Receiver
Reduction
ND1X02E0
Important
❒ If you turn this feature off, the
scale of the original is maintained
and some parts of the image may
be lost when printed at the other
end.
ND1X02E1
Note
❒ You can switch this feature on and
off with the User Parameters. The
99
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES
default setting is on. ⇒ P.203
“Changing the User Parameters”
C Enter
the “Options” function
number with the number keys.
- ID Transmission
If you turn this feature on, transmission will only take place if the destination's Polling ID is the same as
yours. This feature can stop you from
accidentally sending information to
the wrong place (you need to co-ordinate Polling ID's with the other party).
4
Note
❒ You can switch this feature on and
off with the User Parameters. The
default setting is off. ⇒ P.203
“Changing the User Parameters”
Note
❒ If “Options” is not shown, press
↓Next].
↑Prev.] or [↓
[↑
D Press the < or > key to switch
TTI Print on or off.
Note
❒ The default setting is on.
E If you want to set another option,
press [↓
↓Next].
Selecting Transmission
Options for a Single
Transmission
Note
❒ To finish, go to step 12.
F Press the < or > key to switch
A Set
the original and select any
scan settings you require.
Label Insertion on or off.
B Press [Mode].
Note
❒ The default setting is off.
❒ To cancel the changes, press
[Cancel]. The Transmission
Mode menu is shown.
ND1X02E9
The Transmission Mode menu appears.
G If you want to set another option,
↓Next].
press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
Note
❒ To finish, go to step 12.
100
TRANSMISSION OPTIONS
H Press the < or > key to switch
The initial display is shown.
Auto Reduction on or off.
Note
❒ The default setting is on.
❒ To cancel the setting, press [Cancel]. The Transmission Mode
menu is shown.
I If you want to set another option,
Note
❒ “Options” is shown. If you set
up another advanced transmission function (except Polling
Reception), “Others” is shown.
N Dial and press the {Start}} key.
4
press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
Note
❒ To finish, go to step 12.
J Press the < or > key to switch
closed network on or off.
K If you want to set another option,
press [↑
↑Prev.].
Note
❒ To finish, go to step 12.
L Press [OK].
The Transmission Mode menu is
shown. A check mark is added to
Options.
M Press [Exit].
ND1X03E0
101
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES
4
This page is intentionally blank.
102
5. Communication
Information
CHECKING AND CANCELING
TRANSMISSION FILES
Transmission files are originals that
have been stored in memory and are
awaiting transmission. The features
that produce transmission files are
Memory Transmission, Confidential
Transmission, Transfer Request, Polling Reception and Polling Transmission. These features are described in
detail elsewhere in this document.
This section describes how you can:
• Delete a file (cancel transmission)
• Print a file *1
• Check the destination(s) and options selected
• Alter when a file will be sent
• Resend a file
• Change destinations
• Delete destinations
• Add destinations
*1
Canceling a Transmission
A Press [Info.].
ND1X03E0
The Information menu is shown.
B Enter
the “Check/Cancel TX
Files” function number with the
number keys.
This does not apply to Polling Reception or Confidential Transmission.
Limitation
❒ If you cancel a file being sent, the
communication is immediately
stopped and the file is canceled. A
page which has already been sent
cannot be canceled.
Note
❒ If “Check/Cancel TX Files” is
↓Nnot shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
ext].
❒ You cannot change the start time
add/delete a destination while a
file is being sent.
103
COMMUNICATION INFORMATION
C Press the < or > key until the
file you want to delete is shown
and press [Delete].
F Press [Exit].
ND1X03E0
ND1X02E7
D Press [Yes].
The initial display is shown.
Printing a File
If you wish to check the contents of a
fax that is stored in memory and has
not been sent yet, use this procedure
to print it out.
5
A Press [Info.].
ND1X03E0
The file is erased.
E Press [Exit].
ND1X03E0
The Information menu is shown.
B Enter
ND1X03E0
the “Check/Cancel TX
Files” function number with the
number keys.
Note
❒ To delete another file, repeat
steps 3 and 4.
Note
❒ If “Check/Cancel TX Files” is
↓Nnot shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
ext].
104
CHECKING AND CANCELING TRANSMISSION FILES
C Press the < or > key until the
file you want to print is shown
and press [Print].
F Press [Exit].
ND1X03E0
ND1X02E8
D Press the {Start}} key.
The initial display is shown.
Checking and Editing a File
Use this procedure to check or edit
destination(s), check options selected
or alter the transmission time.
5
A Press [Info.].
The file is printed.
Note
❒ Press [Cancel] to stop printing
the file and return to the step 3
display.
E Press [Exit].
ND1X03E0
The Information menu is shown.
B Enter
the “Check/Cancel TX
Files” function number with the
number keys.
ND1X03E0
The Information menu is shown
again.
Note
❒ If “Check/Cancel TX Files” is
not shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
105
COMMUNICATION INFORMATION
C Press the < or > key until the
file you want to print is shown.
Then press [Check].
ND1X02E9
Changing the Transmission Time
A Enter the “Change Start Time”
function number with the
number keys.
B Enter the transmission time (4
digits) with the number keys.
D Depending
on the setting you
want to check or change, use one
of the following procedures.
5
Checking Destinations
(Destination List)
A Enter the “Destination List”
function number with the
number keys.
The total number of destinations and the fax number or
each destination's name is
shown.
Use 24-hour or 12-hour format
depending on your area. For 12hour format, press [AM ↔ PM]
to switch between AM and PM.
Note
❒ You can not specify a start
time more than 24 hours into
the future.
❒ To start transmission immediately, press [Immediate]. If
memory contains other files
queued for transmission,
those files are sent first.
Re-sending a File
Note
❒ To see hidden destinations,
press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
106
If you select the failed transmission file, you can resend it. This
feature allows you to transmit a fax
message again. You can choose to
have files that were not transmitted successfully stored in memory.
These files will be kept for either
up to 24 or 72 hours depending on
how you program this feature. ⇒
P.203 “Changing the User Parameters”
CHECKING AND CANCELING TRANSMISSION FILES
A Enter the “Retransmit ” function number with the number
keys.
A Enter the “Change Dest.” function number with the number
keys.
B Press [Yes].
B Change the destination.
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ If you do not want to send
the file, press [No].
C Enter the start time with the
number keys.
Use 24-hour or 12-hour format
depending on your area. For
12-hour format, press [AM ↔
PM] to switch AM and PM.
Note
❒ You can not specify a start
time more than 24 hours into
the future.
Note
❒ To cancel a destination, press
the < or > key until the destination you want to cancel is
shown and press the {Clear/
} key.
Stop}
5
❒ To add a destination, press
[Add] and enter the fax number with the number keys.
Destinations can be specified
only by using the number
keys. The destination is added to the end of the list.
❒ If you change a destination of
a file that is automatically being dialed or awaiting redial,
redial is canceled so you will
need to resend that file. ⇒
P.106 “Re-sending a File”
E Press [Exit].
F Press [Exit].
❒ To start transmission immediately, press [Immediate]. If
memory contains other files
queued for transmission,
those files are sent first.
Changing a Destination
ND1X03E0
You can delete or add destinations.
107
COMMUNICATION INFORMATION
G Press [Exit].
ND1X03E0
The Information menu is shown.
H Press [Exit].
5
ND1X03E0
The initial display is shown.
108
PRINTING A LIST OF FILES IN MEMORY (PRINT TX FILE LIST)
PRINTING A LIST OF FILES IN MEMORY
(PRINT TX FILE LIST)
Print this list if you wish to find out
which files are stored in memory and
what their file numbers are. Knowing
the file number can be useful (e.g.,
when erasing files).
Note
❒ The contents of an original stored
in memory can also be printed. ⇒
P.104 “Printing a File”
A Press [Info.].
Note
❒ Press [Cancel] to stop printing
the file list and return to the Information Menu display.
D Press [Exit].
The initial display is shown.
5
The Information menu is displayed.
B Enter
the “Print TX File list ”
function number with the number keys.
Note
❒ If “Print TX File list ” is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
C Press the {Start}} key.
The transmission file list is printed.
When the printing is completed,
the Information menu is shown.
109
COMMUNICATION INFORMATION
CHECKING THE TRANSMISSION RESULT (TX
STATUS)
If you wish to find out whether a file
was sent successfully, you don't have
to always print the TCR. With this
function you can browse through the
last 50 completed transmissions on
the display.
Limitation
❒ Only the last 50 transmissions are
shown. Earlier transmissions are
not available.
❒ If a transmission is completed
while you are using this function,
the result will not be shown until
you exit TX File Status and start it
again.
5
A Press [Info.].
ND1X03E0
The Information menu is shown.
B Enter the “TX Files Status ” func-
tion number with the number
keys.
Note
❒ If “TX Files Status ” is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
110
C Press [↑↑Prev.] or [↓↓Next] to scroll
through the list.
The results are shown two at a time
with the most recent above.
D Press [OK].
The initial display is shown.
CHECKING THE RECEPTION RESULT (RX STATUS)
CHECKING THE RECEPTION RESULT (RX
STATUS)
This function lets you check up on the
last 50 messages received without
having to print the TCR. You can
browse through the received messages on the display.
Limitation
❒ Only the last 50 messages are displayed. Earlier messages are not
available.
❒ If a message is received while you
are using this function, the result
will not be shown until you exit RX
File Status and start it again.
C Press [↑↑Prev.] or [↓↓Next] to scroll
through the messages.
The results are shown two at a time
with the most recent above.
D Press [OK].
The initial display is shown.
E Press [Exit].
5
A Press [Info.].
ND1X03E0
The Information menu is shown.
B Enter the “RX Files Status” function number with the number
keys.
Note
❒ If “RX Files Status” is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
111
COMMUNICATION INFORMATION
PRINTING A CONFIDENTIAL MESSAGE
The optional Fax Feature Expander is required to use this function.
5
This feature is designed to prevent
messages being picked up casually by
anyone when they are received. If
someone sends you a message using
Confidential Transmission, it is
stored in memory and not automatically printed. To print the message
you have to enter the Confidential ID
code. When your machine has received a confidential message, the
Confidential File indicator lights.
B Enter the “Print Conf. RX” func-
Preparation
Before using this function, program your Confidential ID. ⇒
P.196 “ID Code”
C Enter the Confidential ID (4-digit
Important
❒ If the Main Power Switch is off
more than an hour, all Confidential Messages are deleted. In such a
case, use the Power Failure Report
to identify which messages have
been lost. ⇒ P.126 “WHEN POWER IS TURNED OFF OR FAILS”
Limitation
❒ You must program the Confidential ID for Confidential Reception
to work.
A Press [Info.].
tion number with the number
keys.
Note
❒ If “Print Conf. RX” is not
↓Next].
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
number) with the number keys.
Note
❒ If you receive a fax by Confidential ID Override Reception, enter the override Confidential ID.
❒ You need to obtain the override
Confidential ID from the sender.
D Press the {Start}} key.
The received messages are printed.
When printing has finished, the Information menu is shown.
Note
❒ If no Confidential Messages
have been received, the message “No reception file(s) exists.” is shown. Press [OK].
ND1X03E0
The Information menu is shown.
112
❒ If the Confidential IDs or Personal Confidential IDs do not
match, the message “No file(s)
exist for this Confidential ID.” is
PRINTING A CONFIDENTIAL MESSAGE
displayed. Press [OK] to cancel
the operation, check the Confidential ID or Personal Confidential ID with the other party
and try again.
E Press [Exit].
ND1X03E0
The initial display is shown.
5
Confidential File Report
By default, this report is printed
whenever your machine receives a
Confidential Message.
Note
❒ You can turn this report off with
the User Parameters. ⇒ P.203
“Changing the User Parameters”
113
COMMUNICATION INFORMATION
PRINTING A FILE RECEIVED WITH MEMORY
LOCK
Optional Fax Feature Expander is required to use this function.
This is a security feature designed to
prevent unauthorized users from
reading your messages. If Memory
Lock is switched on, all received messages are stored in memory and are
not automatically printed. To print
the messages, you have to enter the
Memory Lock ID code. When your
machine has received a message with
Memory Lock, the Receive File indicator blinks.
5
Preparation
Before you start, program your
Memory Lock ID.⇒ P.196 “Memory Lock ID”
A Make sure that the Receive File
indicator blinks. Press [Info.].
ND1X03E0
The Information menu is shown.
B Enter
the “Print Mem. Lock”
function number with the number keys.
Note
❒ Messages received by Polling Reception are automatically printed
even if this feature is switched on.
❒ If the Main Power Switch is turned
off for more than an hour, all messages protected by Memory Lock
will be deleted. In such a case, the
Power Failure Report will be printed so you can confirm which messages have been lost. ⇒ P.126
“WHEN POWER IS TURNED OFF
OR FAILS”
❒ Memory Lock is switched off by
default. Turn it on using the Facsimile User Tools. ⇒ P.172 “Memory Lock”
❒ You can also apply Memory Lock
to messages that come only from
certain senders. ⇒ P.182 “Special
Senders to Treat Differently (Special
RX Nos.)”
114
Note
❒ If “Print Mem. Lock” is not
shown on the display, press
❒ [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
C Enter the Memory Lock ID (4-digit number).
D Press the {Start}} key.
The received messages are printed.
When the printing is completed,
the Information menu is shown.
PRINTING A FILE RECEIVED WITH MEMORY LOCK
Note
❒ If no messages have been received, while Memory Lock is
switched on, the following message will appear.”No reception
file(s) exists.” Press [OK].
❒ If the Memory Lock IDs do not
match, the following message
will appear. “Wrong Memory
Lock ID.”Press [OK] and retry
after checking the Memory
Lock ID.
E Press [Exit].
5
ND1X03E0
The initial display is shown.
115
COMMUNICATION INFORMATION
PRINTING THE TCR
The TCR (Transaction Confirmation
Report) contains information about
the last 49 communications made by
your machine. By default, it is printed
automatically after every 50 communications (receptions + transmissions).
You can also print a copy of the TCR
at any time by following the procedure below.
Note
❒ The sender's name column of the
TCR is useful when you need to
register a special sender.
5
❒ If you do not want the TCR printed, you can turn it off. ⇒ P.203
“Changing the User Parameters”
A Press [Info.].
Note
❒ If “Print TCR” is not shown,
press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
C Press the < or > key to select the
format you want to print.
Note
❒ Select “File No.” to enter a 4digit file number with the number keys.
❒ Select “Pers. Code” to enter a
Personal Code (4-digit number)
with the number keys.
❒ Press [Cancel] to return to the Information menu.
D Press the {Start}} key.
The TCR is printed.
E Press [Exit].
ND1X03E0
The Information menu is shown.
B Enter
the “Print TCR” function
number with the number keys.
ND1X03E0
The initial display is shown.
ND1X03E0
116
DISPLAYING THE MEMORY STATUS
DISPLAYING THE MEMORY STATUS
Use this function to display a summary of current memory usage. Items
shown are the percentage of free
memory space, the number of received confidential messages, the
number of files to be sent, and the
number of received messages to be
printed.
A Press [Info.].
Note
❒ If “Others” is displayed, it
means that one or more Auto
Documents have been stored. ⇒
P.151 “Registering Auto Documents”
D Press [Exit].
5
ND1X03E0
ND1X03E0
The initial display is shown.
The Information menu is shown.
B Enter the “Memory Status” func-
tion number with the number
keys.
Note
❒ If “Memory Status” is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
C The
usage is displayed. When
you have finished, press [OK].
ND1X03E0
117
COMMUNICATION INFORMATION
5
This page is intentionally blank.
118
6. Troubleshooting
WHEN TONER RUNS OUT
When the machine has run out of toner the D symbol appears on the display. Note that even if there is no
toner left you can still send fax message.
⇒ P.32 “IMMEDIATE TRANSMISSION”
Important
❒ If you continue receiving and
sending faxes after toner runs out,
communication will not be possible after 200 ( 900 with the Fax Feature Expander ) communications.
Limitation
❒ The Memory Storage Report, Polling Reserve Report and Confidential File Report are not printed.
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
Enhanced
Image
Auto Reduce/
Enlarge
Menu
Zoom
Copy
Series
Copies
1
Combine
Copies
2
Margin
Adjust
3
Eras e Center/
Border
4
Fax
ND2L02E8
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press [Exit].
The error display closes.
⇒ P.24 “MEMORY TRANSMISSION”
119
TROUBLESHOOTING
ERROR MESSAGES AND THEIR MEANINGS
If there is an error, one of the following messages may appear on the display. It
might just flash up briefly, so if you are watching for errors, stay by the machine
and check the display.
Message
Problem and Solution
Clear Misfeed(s)
• Original misfeed
Remove originals from the Document
Feeder.
• Remove originals from Document
Feeder.
• Set any pages of the original that were
not scanned and send again.
Reset originals and press Start.
Original jammed during Memory Transmission. Reset originals that haven't been
scanned.
Error. Transmission has been cancelled.
A document jam occurred during Immediate Transmission. Press [OK] and resend
the page which has been not sent.
6
An error occurred during Immediate
Transmission. Press [OK] and re-send the
original.
Note
❒ There may be a problem with the machine or the telephone line (e.g. noise
or cross talk). If the error re-occurs frequently, contact your service representative.
Cannot detect original size. Reset original(s) and press Start key.
The machine failed to detect the size of the
original. Press < or > to select the size
and press the {Start}
} key again.
<FAX>
Personal Codes Access are switched on.
You need to enter a previously programmed 4 digit ID code. For more information, see P.166 “Personal Codes”.
Personal Code Access. Please enter your
Personal Code.
LService call
Functional problem with the fax. Please
contact your service representative.
There is a problem with the fax function.
Contact your service representative and
tell the code number shown in the display. The copier function will still work
normally.
Memory is full. Cannot store additional
If you press OK, the machine returns to
originals. (Stored original(s) will be trans- the standby mode and start transmitting
mitted.)
pages which has been scanned.
120
SOLVING PROBLEMS
SOLVING PROBLEMS
This table lists some common problems and their solutions.
Problem
Solution
Refer to
Image background
Adjust the scan density.
appears dirty when
received at the other
end.
P.38 “Image Density (Contrast)”
Printed or sent image contains spots.
---
The Document Feeder (ADF) or
exposure glass is dirty. Clean
them. See the Copy Reference
Make sure that ink or eraser is dry
before setting the original.
Received image is
too light.
Request the sender to increase the P.14 “ACCEPTABLE
image density.
TYPES OF ORIGINALS”
When using moist, rough or processed paper, the printed image
may be partly invisible. Only use
recommended paper.
When D is blinking, toner is beginning to run out. Replace the
toner cartridge soon. ⇒See the
Copy Reference.
Message appears
blank at the other
end.
6
---
The original was set upside down. P.18 “HOW TO SET AN
Set it properly.
ORIGINAL”
You want to cancel a If the original is being stored,
Memory Transmis- press the {Clear/Stop}
} key.
sion.
If the original is being sent, use
“Check/Cancel TX Files” in the
Information menu.
P.4 “OPERATION PANEL”
You want to cancel Press the {Clear/Stop}
} key.
an Immediate Transmission.
P.4 “OPERATION PANEL”
You cannot add any
destination in Group
though it does not
reach the maximum
number.
P.18 “HOW TO SET AN
ORIGINAL”
99 (with the Fax Feature Expander P.44 “Restrictions When Diit is 999) destination has been pro- aling with the Number Keys”
grammed with the number keys.
Program it with the Quick Dial
key or Speed Dial instead.
121
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
Solution
Immediate transmis- Use memory transmission while
sion error occurs
copying in multiple numbers.
while copying in
multiple numbers.
6
122
Refer to
P.24 “MEMORY TRANSMISSION”
INDICATORS
INDICATORS
When the Receive File Indicator is Lit or Flashing
If the Receive File indicator is blinking, a message has been received and stored
in memory with Memory Lock. You need to print it out manually. ⇒ P.114
“PRINTING A FILE RECEIVED WITH MEMORY LOCK”
If the Receive File indicator is lit, a message has been received but could not be
printed for some reason. The message was stored in memory (Substitute Reception). When you solve the problem, the message will be automatically printed
out. The table below lists some problems that could have caused Substitute Reception to take place and their solutions.
Reference
P.114 “PRINTING A FILE RECEIVED WITH MEMORY LOCK”
Why Substitute Reception Indication/Status
Occurred
Paper has run out
Toner is empty
Solution
} key is lit
B and/or {Fax}
in red.
Add paper.
D is lit
Replace the toner cartridge.
6
⇒See the "Loading Paper"
in the Copy Reference."
⇒See the "Adding Toner"
in the Copy Reference.
Paper is jammed
x is lit
Remove the jammed paper.
⇒See the "Clearing Misfeed" in the Copy Reference.
Cover is open
The message “Doors/Cov- A cover other than the Docers open” appears.
ument Feeder (ADF) or
front cover is open.
⇒Close the cover.
Machine is busy printing
with another function
The machine is printing
with another function.
The message will be printed after the current job finishes automatically.
Output Tray is full.
The Ouput Tray is full. Re- Remove paper from the
move paper.
Output Tray.
123
TROUBLESHOOTING
When the Confidential File Indicator is Lit
If this indicator is lit, a message has been received into memory with Confidential Reception. You need to print it out manually. ⇒ P.112 “PRINTING A CONFIDENTIAL MESSAGE”
} key is Lit in Red
When the {Fax}
If this key is lit, refer to the table below and take the appropriate action.
Problem
Solution
Paper has run out.
Add paper.
⇒See the Loading Paper in the Copy Reference.
6
124
The paper output tray is full.
Remove the paper from the tray.
The machine is in RDS (Remote
Diagnositc System) mode.
Wait with the main power switch on. Machine will
go to the standby mode after it exits from the RDS
mode.
A facsimile error has occurred.
The facsimile has a problem. Contact a service representative. The copier will still function normally.
WHEN AN ERROR REPORT IS PRINTED
WHEN AN ERROR REPORT IS PRINTED
An error report is printed when a message could not be successfully sent or received.
Possible causes include a problem with your machine or the receiver's, noise on
the telephone line etc. If an error occurs during transmission, re-send the original. If an error occurs during reception, ask the sender to re-send the message.
Note
❒ If the error happens frequently, contact your service representative.
6
125
TROUBLESHOOTING
WHEN POWER IS TURNED OFF OR FAILS
Even if the main power switch is turned off, the contents of the machine's memory (programmed numbers etc.) will not be lost. However, if power is lost for
more than 1 hour through the main power switch being turned off, a power cut
or the power cable being removed, memory contents will be lost. Lost items will
include any fax messages stored in memory using Memory Transmission or Reception.
If a file has been deleted from memory, a Power Failure Report is automatically
printed as soon has power is restored. This report can be used to identify lost
files. If an original stored for Memory Transmission was lost, re-send it. If a message received by Memory Reception or Substitute Reception was lost, ask the
sender to re-send it. If an Auto Document was lost, you will need to store it in
memory again.
Important
❒ Make sure that 100 % is shown on the display before you unplug the machine.
If a lower value is shown, some data is currently stored in memory.
❒ Right after a power failure, the internal battery needs to be sufficiently recharged to guard against future data loss. Please keep the machine plugged
in and the main power switch on for at least one week after the power loss
occurs.
6
Note
❒ If you install the Hard disk option, all files stored in memory are not erased
even if there is a power failure.
126
7. Facsimile User Tools
ACCESSING THE USER TOOLS
The User Tools allow you to program
the machine with your identification,
store frequently used numbers and
settings, and customize the default
settings to match your needs.
So you can find the User Tool you
want quickly and easily, they are
grouped by function:
❖ Register/Delete
Use to program or delete: Quick
Dials, Groups, Optional Groups,
Speed Dial, Keystroke Programs,
Auto Documents, Irregular scan
Area
❖ Reports/Lists
Use to print: the TCR, Group list,
Keystroke Program list, Speed Dial
list, Auto Document list, Forwarding list, Quick Dial list and Auto
Documents, Authorized Reception
list
❖ Initial Setup TX
Use to set defaults for: Transmission mode (Memory/Immediate),
scanning conditions (Resolution,
Image Density and Original Type)
❖ Initial Setup RX
Use to turn on or off: Reverse Order Printing Checkered Mark,
Center Mark, Print RX Time,
Multi-copy Reception, Authorized
Reception, Special RX NOS., Forwarding, 2-sided printing.
❖ Key Op. Settings
Use to program/check: your
name, your fax number, line type,
various ID codes, monitor volume,
date and time, number of documents transmitted/received
Preparation
Some menus will not fit on the dis↓Next] to
play. Press [↑
↑Prev.] and [↓
scroll through them if you cannot
see the item you need.
Press [PrevMenu] to return to the
Previous menu.
Items that are currently selected
appear highlighted.
Press the [OK] key to accept the
new settings.
Note that the changes will not be
made if you do not press the [OK]
key.
Press [OK] or [Cancel] to return to
the previous display.
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
❖ User Functions
Use to program settings you frequently use into the User Function
Keys
127
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
Note
❒ Function numbers are different
depending on the machine
model and options attached.
F Follow
the instructions on the
display.
For more details on each User
Tool, see the relevant pages of this
manual.
.
Exiting User Tool mode
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the number that matches
the category you require.
7
Note
❒ If you select “Key Op. Settings,”
you must enter the function
number for “Key Op. Settings”
with number keys and press the
{#}
} (Enter) key within 3 seconds.
E Enter the function number of the
User Tool you require.
128
A When you have made your changes and pressed [OK], press the {Us} key to return to
er Tools/Counter}
standby mode.
Note
❒ To exit “Key Op. Settings”, you
need to return to the Facsimile
User Tools initial display. Press
[PrevMenu] on each display until
you reach the main menu, then
press the {User Tools/Counter}
}
key.
REGISTER/DELETE MENU
REGISTER/DELETE MENU
Registering Quick Dials
To save time, you can program a fax
number that you use often into a
Quick Dial key. Then, whenever you
are sending a message to that location, just press that Quick Dial key to
dial.
Use the following steps to program a
new Quick Dial or to edit or overwrite
existing Quick Dials. There are 56
Quick Dials available.
You can register the following items
in each key:
• Destination fax number (up to 254
digits)
• Destination name
Important
❒ We recommend that you print the
Quick Dial list and keep it when
you program or change fax numbers. ⇒ P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”
Limitation
❒ When a registered Quick Dial key
is being used for a standby Memory Transmission, the message
“This destination is in use for
standby transmission file. Please
modify/delete after transmission.” is shown and you cannot
change the destination for this key.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
7
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Register/Delete” using the number keys.
E Enter
the function number for
“Reg. Quick Dial” using the number keys.
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
129
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
F Press the Quick Dial key which
you want to register.
Note
❒ If you press a wrong key, press
[PrevMenu] then try again.
❒ You can press [Status] to see
which Quick Dial keys have
been programmed.
G Enter
a fax number using the
number keys.
I Enter the destination name.
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ If a destination name is already
registered in this Quick Dial
key, the name is shown on the
display. If you wish to change
this name, press the {Clear/Stop}
}
key and enter another name.
Reference
P.213 “Entering Text”
J Press [OK].
The fax number and name are displayed.
7
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear/Stop}
} key and try again.
❒ If a fax number is already registered in this Quick Dial key, the
number and communication
type are shown on the display.
If you wish to change the fax
number, press the {Clear/Stop}
}
key and enter another number.
❒ You cannot omit the fax number.
H Press [Name] .
Note
❒ If you wish to omit the destination name, go to step 11.
130
K Press [OK] to register the new setting.
Note
❒ If you press [Cancel], the entered
values are canceled and the display shown in step 7 appears
again.
L Press [Exit].
The display shown in step 6 appears again.
M Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
REGISTER/DELETE MENU
C Enter
Quick Dial List
the number of the “Fax”
mode.
Printing the Quick Dial list allows
you to check destinations registered
in Quick Dial keys. ⇒ P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Deleting Quick Dials
This procedure describes how to find
a programmed Quick Dial and delete
it.
Limitation
❒ When a Quick Dial key is being
used for a standby Memory Transmission, the message “This destination is in use for standby
transmission file. Please modify/
delete after transmission.” is
shown and you cannot delete the
destination for this key.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Register/Delete” using the number keys.
E Enter
the function number for
“Delete QuickDial” using the
number keys.
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
7
F Press the Quick Dial key which
you want to delete.
The current contents of the key are
displayed.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
Note
❒ If you press the wrong key,
press [No] then try again.
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
131
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
❒ You can press [Status] to see
Quick Dial keys that have been
already programmed.
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ If you press [No], the destination
is not deleted and the display is
shown in step 6 appears again.
H Press [Yes] to delete the destination stored in this Quick Dial.
Note
❒ If you press [No], the destination
is not deleted and the display
shown in step 6 appears again.
I Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Quick Dial Key and Function
Key Label (Dial label)
You can print a template that can be
used to make labels for Quick Dial
and User Function keys. The template
will have destination or Group names
programmed in Quick Dials, and the
132
Limitation
❒ Print the template on A4 label paper that can be peeled and stuck on
the operation panel.
Note
❒ You can print the template from
the Bypass Tray.
❒ You can choose whether to print
on transparent or non-transparent
label paper with the User Parameters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the User
Parameters”By default the setting is
“Non-transparent”.
❒ To print the label template, see
P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”.
G Press [Yes].
7
names of functions assigned to User
Function keys.
REGISTER/DELETE MENU
Non-transparent label paper
Dial label (Jan. 9. 1998 2:14PM)
1
2
01-07
ABC COMPANY
4
01 NEW YOR 02 G TRONT 03 P SEND L 04
05 *LONDON 06 PARIS O 07 MAIN OF
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
53
54
55
56
50
1
3
51
52
2
3
4
NEW YORK O G TRONT OFF P SEND LATE
LONDON OFF PARIS OFFI MAIN OFFIC
08-14
15-21
7
22-28
29-35
36-42
43-49
50-56
5
F Code
TX Flles
Status
TEL Mode G4
Stamp
Please cut and stick on above the One Touch key
ND0X03E6
1. Quick Dial key number
2. Destination name
3. Group name (G)
4. Program name (P)
5. Programmed contents of User Function keys
133
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
Transparent label paper
Dial label (Jan. 9. 1998 2:14PM)
ABC COMPANY
1
01-07
2
3
4
NEW YORK O G TRONT OFF P SEND LATE
LONDON OFF PARIS OFFI MAIN OFFIC
08-14
15-21
22-28
29-35
36-42
43-49
50-56
5
7
F Code
TX Flles
Status
TEL Mode G4
Stamp
Please cut and stick on above the One Touch key
ND0X03E5
1. Quick Dial key number
1. Destination name
1. Group name (G)
1. Program name (P)
1. Programmed contents of User Function keys
134
REGISTER/DELETE MENU
Registering Groups
If you send the same message to several destinations at the same time on a
regular basis, program these destination numbers as a Group. This allows
you to dial these destinations with a
single key press.
Use these steps to program a new
Group or to edit or overwrite an existing Group.
You can register the following items
in a Group:
• Destination fax numbers (up to 200
numbers for each group, up to 254
digits for each number)
• Group name (up to 20 characters)
You can enter destination numbers
with Quick Dial keys, Speed Dials, or
the number keys.
Important
❒ It is recommend that you print the
Group Dial list and keep it when
you register or change destinations. ⇒ P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”
Limitation
❒ The maximum number of Groups
you can register is 9.
❒ The maximum number of destination you can register in a Group is
200. This 200 can be composed of
up to 55 Quick Dial numbers, 100
Speed Dial numbers and 98 numbers entered directly with the
number keys. The maximum number of the destination you can register in all group is 255.
❒ The number of destinations that
can be registered with the number
keys depends on how the machine
is used. You can register up to 99
destinations for all the Groups.
❒ If you register a Group with the
number keys when a file is waiting
to be transmitted, a message is
shown. You sometimes cannot register any more destinations even
when the number of specified destinations is 99 or less. This is because a fax number is stored in
memory for the file to be transmitted. When the transmission is completed and the fax number is
deleted, you can register the
Group.
❒ When a lot of destinations are registered in a Group using number
keys, you sometimes cannot enter
a destination for a Memory Transmission with the number keys.
❒ When a registered group is being
used for a standby Memory Transmission, the message “This destination is in use for standby
transmission file. Please modify/
delete after transmission” is
shown and you cannot change destinations for this Group.
7
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
135
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the Fax.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Register/Delete” using the number keys.
7
E Enter
the function number for
“Reg. Group Dial” using the
number keys.
F Press the Quick Dial key in which
you want to register the Group.
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press
[Cancel] then try again.
136
❒ You can press [Status] to see
which Quick Dial keys are currently programmed.
G Enter the first
fax number then
press [Add] before you enter the
next.
Note
❒ Enter a destination in any of the
following three ways:
• Enter the fax number using
the number keys.
• Press a Quick Dial key in
which the destination is registered.
• Press the {Speed Dial}
} key
and enter a Speed Dial code.
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear/Stop}
} key and re-enter
the correct Group number.
❒ If destinations are already registered, they are shown on the
display. Press the < or > key
to scroll through the destinations on the display. If you want
to change a destination, select it
and press the {Clear/Stop}
} key.
Press the {Clear/Stop}
} key once
to erase a Quick Dial or Speed
Dial number, or press it repeatedly to erase a number entered
with the number keys. When
you specify the destination using the number keys, the digit
will be erased one by one. When
REGISTER/DELETE MENU
using Quick dial or Speed dial,
they will be erased at once.
❒ You cannot omit the fax number.
L Press [OK] to register the Group.
H Repeat step 7 for all the destina-
tions you want registered in the
Group.
I Press [Name].
J Enter the Group name.
Note
❒ If the Group name is already
registered, it is shown on the
display. If you wish to change
the Group name, press the
} key and enter an{Clear/Stop}
other name.
Reference
P.213 “Entering Text”
K Press [OK].
The entered fax numbers and
Group name are shown on the display.
Note
❒ Press the < or > key to scroll
through the destinations on the
display. If you want to change a
destination, select it and press
the {Clear/Stop}
} key. Press the
} key once to erase a
{Clear/Stop}
Quick Dial or Speed Dial number, or press it repeatedly to
erase a number entered with the
number keys.
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ If you press [Cancel], the Group
is not programmed and the display shown in step 6 appears
again.
M Press [Exit].
The display shown in step 6 appears again.
N Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Group Dial list
7
The Group list allows you to print
and check destinations registered in
Groups and Optional Groups. ⇒
P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”
Deleting Groups
This function deletes all destinations
registered in a Group.
Limitation
❒ When a registered Group is being
used for a Memory Transmission
on standby, the message “This destination is in use for standby transmission file. Please modify/delete
after transmission.” is displayed
and you cannot delete destinations
for this Group.
137
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press
[No] and press the correct key.
❒ You can press [Status] to see
Quick Dial keys are programmed with Group.
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
The registered Group is shown on
the display.
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
G Press [Yes].
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
7
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
D Enter
the function number for
“Register/Delete” using the number keys.
E Enter
the function number for
“Delete Group Dial” using the
number keys.
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ If you press [No], the Group is
not deleted and the display is
shown in step 6 appears again.
H Press [Yes].
The Group is deleted.
F Press the Quick Dial key whose
Group you wish to delete.
ND1X03E0
138
REGISTER/DELETE MENU
Note
❒ If you press [No], the Group is
not deleted and the display
shown in step 6 appears again.
I Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
❒
Registering Optional Groups
An optional Fax Feature Expander is required to use this function.
Installing the Fax Feature Expander
option enables you to store more
Groups. These extra Groups are referred to as Optional Groups.
Use these steps to program a new Optional Group or edit or overwrite an
existing one. You can register the following items in each Optional Group:
• Destination fax numbers (up to 200
numbers for each group, up to 254
digits for each number)
• Group name (up to 20 characters)
To specify destinations you can use
Quick Dial keys, Speed Dials, or the
number keys.
Important
❒ We recommend that you print the
Optional Group Dial list and keep
it when you register or change destinations. ⇒ P.158 “REPORTS/
LISTS”
❒
❒
Limitation
❒ The maximum number of Optional
Groups you can register is 21.
❒ Before you can use this feature you
must program a User Function
Key with the Optional Group function. ⇒ P.164 “ASSIGNING USER
FUNCTION KEYS”
❒ The maximum number of destinations you can register in Groups is
❒
2000; 56 in quick dial keys, 1000
speed dials, and 999 numbers entered directory with the number
keys.
The number of destinations that
can be registered with the number
keys depends on how the machine
is used. It is possible to register 999
destinations for all the Optional
Groups. If you register 999 destinations with the number keys, however, you cannot perform a
Memory Transmission or specify a
Group. When you register destinations on the number keys, the
number of destinations must be
998 or less. ⇒ P.43 “Number Keys”
If you register an Optional Group
with the number keys when a file
is waiting to be transmitted, the
message “You have exceeded the
maximum machine specifications.
No additional entry with number
keys” is shown and you sometimes
cannot register any more destinations even when the number of
specified destinations is 998 or
less. This is because a fax number
is stored in memory for the file to
be transmitted. When the file
transmission is completed and the
fax number is deleted, you can register a Group.
When a lot of destinations are registered in the number keys for an
Optional Group, you sometimes
cannot dial a destination for a
Memory Transmission with the
number keys.
When a previously registered Optional Group is being used for a
standby transmission, the message
“This destination is in use for
standby transmission file. Peace
modify/delete after transmission”
7
139
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
is shown and you cannot change
destinations for this Group.
A Make sure that the machine is in
E Enter
the function number for
“Reg. Opt. G.Dial” using the
number keys.
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
F Enter the Optional Group
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
number (10 to 30) you want to register
using the number keys.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
7
C Enter
the number of the “Fax”
mode.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
Note
❒ If you make a mistake with the
first digit, press the {Clear/Stop}
}
key and enter a correct number.
If you make a mistake with the
second digit, press [Cancel] and
enter the number again.
❒ You can press [Status] to see the
currently registered Optional
Groups.
G Enter
the first destination, then
press [Add] before entering the
next.
D Enter
the function number for
“Register/Delete” using the number keys.
Note
❒ You can enter destinations in
any of the following three ways:
• Enter a fax number with the
number keys.
140
REGISTER/DELETE MENU
• Press a Quick Dial key in
which a destination is registered.
• Press the {Speed Dial}
} key
and enter a code.
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
} key and try again.
{Clear/Stop}
❒ If destinations are already registered, they are shown on the
display. Press the < or > key
to scroll through the destinations on the display. If you want
to change a destination, select it
and press the {Clear/Stop}
} key.
Press the {Clear/Stop}
} key once
to erase a Quick Dial or Speed
Dial number, or press it repeatedly to erase a number entered
with the number keys.
The entered fax numbers and Optional Group name are shown on
the display.
Note
❒ If destinations are already registered, they are shown on the
display. Press the < or > key
to scroll through the destinations on the display. If you
want to change a destination,
select it and press the {Clear/
} key. Press the {Clear/Stop}
}
Stop}
key once to erase a Quick Dial
or Speed Dial number, or press
it repeatedly to erase a number
entered with the number keys
L Press [OK] to store the information
you have just entered.
Note
❒ You cannot omit a fax number.
H Repeat step 7 for all the destina-
7
tions to be registered in the Optional Group.
I Press [Name].
J Enter the name.
Note
❒ If a Group name is already registered, it is shown on the display. If you want to change the
name, press the {Clear/Stop}
} key
and enter another name.
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ If you press [Cancel], the Optional Group is not registered
and the display shown in step 6
appears again.
M Press [Exit].
The display shown in 6 appears
again.
N Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Reference
P.213 “Entering Text”
K Press [OK].
141
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
- Checking the Contents of
Optional Groups
Print the Optional Group dial list (see
P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”).
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Deleting Optional Groups
This function deletes all destinations
registered in an Optional Group.
Limitation
❒ If a registered Optional Group is
being used for a standby Memory
Transmission, the message “This
destination is in use for a
standby transmission file.
Please modify/delete after
transmission” is shown and you
cannot change destinations for this
Group.
7
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
142
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Register/Delete” using the number keys.
E Enter
the function number for
“Delete Opt.G.Dial” using the
number keys.
F Enter the Optional Group
number (10 to 30) you wish to delete
using the number keys.
Note
❒ If you make a mistake with the
first digit, press the {Clear/Stop}
}
or [Cancel] and enter the correct
number. If you make a mistake
with the second digit, press No
and enter the number again.
REGISTER/DELETE MENU
❒ You can press [Status] to see
which Optional Groups are programmed.
G Press [Yes].
Note
❒ If you press [No], the Optional
Group is not deleted and the
display shown in step 6 appears
again.
❒ The registered destinations are
shown.
Registering Speed Dials
If you register a destination in a
Speed Dial, you can dial that number
by just pressing the {Speed Dial}
} key
followed by a two or three digit code.
Use these steps to program a new
Speed Dial or overwrite an existing
one. You can register the following
items in a Speed Dial:
• Destination fax number (up to 100
numbers, up to 254 digits for each
number)
• Destination name
• A Telephone Directory search letter (A to Z)
Important
❒ It is recommended that you print
the Speed Dial list and keep it
when you register or change a destination. ⇒ P.158 “REPORTS/
LISTS”
ND1X03E0
H Press [Yes] to delete the Optional
Group.
7
Limitation
❒ When a registered Speed Dial is
being used for a standby Memory
Transmission, the message “This
destination is in use for
standby transmission file.
Please modify/delete after
transmission” is shown and you
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ If you press [No], the Optional
Group is not deleted and the
display shown in step 6 appears
again.
cannot change the destination for
this Quick Dial.
❒ You can specify codes 00 to 99.
❒ If you install the Function Upgrade
Card (option), you can register up
to 1,000 numbers in Speed Dials.
In this case codes 000 to 999 are
used.
I Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
143
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
the Speed Dial code you
want to register using the number
keys.
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear/Stop}
} key and enter the
correct number.
❒ You can press [Status] to see
which Speed Dials are programmed.
2
2
2
Enhanced
F Enter
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
7
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Register/Delete” using the number keys.
E Enter the function number for “
Reg. Speed Dial” using the number keys.
G Enter
a fax number using the
number keys, and select the communication type.
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear/Stop}
} key and enter the
correct number.
❒ If a fax number is already registered in this Speed Dial, the
number is shown on the display. If you wish to change the
fax number, press the {Clear/
} key and enter another
Stop}
number.
❒ You cannot omit the fax number. Be sure to register it.
H Press [Name].
144
REGISTER/DELETE MENU
Note
❒ If you wish to omit the destination name, go to step 11.
L Enter a search letter (A to Z) for
the Telephone Directory.
I Enter the destination name.
Reference
⇒ P.213 “Entering Text”
M Press [OK].
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ If a destination name is already
registered in the Speed Dial, the
name is shown on the display. If
you wish to change the destination name, press the {Clear/
} key and enter another
Stop}
name.
The search letter you entered is
shown.
N Press [OK].
The fax number, destination name,
and search letter are registered.
Reference
P.213 “Entering Text”
7
J Press [OK].
ND1X03E0
The entered destination number
and name are shown on the display.
Note
❒ If you press [Cancel], the Speed
Dial is not registered.
O Press [Exit].
P Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
K Press [Tel.Dir.].
Speed Dial list
Print this list to check which destinations are programmed. ⇒ P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”
ND1X03E0
Deleting Speed Dials
Use this procedure to delete any
Speed Dials you are not using anymore.
145
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
Limitation
❒ If a registered Speed Dial is being
used for a standby Memory Transmission, the message “This destination is in use for
standby transmission file.
Please modify/delete after
transmission.” is shown and
you cannot change the destination
for this Speed Dial.
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
7
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
D Enter
the function number for
“Register/Delete” using the number keys.
E Enter
the function number for
“Delete Speed Dial” using the
number keys.
F Enter
the Speed Dial code you
wish to delete.
The registered destination is
shown on the display.
Note
❒ If you make a mistake before entering the first digit, press the
} key and enter the
{Clear/Stop}
correct number. If you make a
mistake after entering the last
digit, press [No] and enter the
number again.
❒ You can press [Status] to see
which Speed Dials are currently
programmed.
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
146
G Press [Yes].
Note
❒ If you press [No], the Speed Dial
is not deleted and the display
shown in 6 appears again.
REGISTER/DELETE MENU
H Press [Yes].
• Program name (up to 20 characters)
Important
❒ We recommend that you print the
Keystroke Program list and keep it
when you register or change a
function. ⇒ P.158 “REPORTS/
LISTS”
ND1X03E0
The Speed Dial is deleted.
Note
❒ If you press [No], the Speed Dial
is not deleted and the display
shown in 6 appears again.
I Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Storing Keystroke Programs
If you regularly send messages to a
particular destination or transmit using the same features, you can save a
lot of repetitive keypad operations by
storing this information in a Keystroke Program.
Keystroke Programs can then be recalled by just pressing a Quick Dial
key. The following procedure can be
used to program a new Keystroke
Program or overwrite an old one.
You can register the following items
in Keystroke Programs:
• Memory Transmission, Immediate
Transmission, destinations (up to
200 numbers), Resolution, Original
Type, G3 or G4 communication
mode, Stamp, Send Later, Confidential Transmission, Personal
Code transmission, Auto Document, Book Fax, Irregular Scan Area, Transmission Deadline, Polling
Transmission, Polling Reception,
Transfer Request, and optional
functions
Limitation
❒ The maximum number of programs you can register is 56.
❒ You cannot register a program in a
Quick Dial key used for another
function.
❒ When a registered program key is
being used for a Memory Transmission on standby, the message
“This destination is in use
for
standby
transmission
file. Please modify/delete
after
transmission” is dis-
played and you cannot change the
function for this key.
7
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
147
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
G Press [Feature].
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Register/Delete” using the number keys.
ND1X03E0
H Carry out the sequence of operations you wish to store in this program, then press the [OK] key you
selected in step 6.
E Enter
the function number for
“Store Program” using the number keys.
ND1X03E0
7
F Press a Quick Dial key you want
to register.
The “Store Program” display is
shown.
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press
[Cancel] and press the correct
key.
❒ You can press [Status] to see
Quick Dial keys with Keystroke
Programs already in them.
148
Note
❒ If you press the {Clear Modes/En} key, the display reergy Saver}
turns to the steps before
keystroke programming.
❒ For example, say you wish to
use Send Later to destination
number 0123456789. The sequence of operations would be:
• Enter “0123456789” using the
number keys.
• Press [Mode].
• Enter the function number
for Send Later using the
number keys.
• Set Send Later ⇒ P.74
“SEND LATER”.
❒ If a program is already stored in
the Quick Dial key, the function
name is shown on the display. If
you want to change the pro-
REGISTER/DELETE MENU
gram, press the {Clear Modes/En} key and program
ergy Saver}
function again.
I Press [OK].
J Press [Name].
The program is stored.
Note
❒ If you press [Cancel], the Keystroke Program is canceled and
the display shown in step 6 appears again.
N Press [Exit].
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ You cannot omit a program
name. Be sure to register it.
K Enter the program name.
Note
❒ If a program name is already
registered in the Quick Dial key,
the name is shown on the display. If you wish to change the
program name, press the {Clear/
} key and enter another
Stop}
name.
Reference
P.213 “Entering Text”
L Press [OK]
The function and program name
are shown on the display.
The screen shown in step 6 appears
again.
O Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Keystroke program list
The Keystroke Program list allows
you to print and check functions registered in keystroke programs.⇒
P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”
7
Using a Keystroke Program
E.g., execute a program using Send
Later for the fax number
“0123456789.”
A Set your original.
Note
❒ If the destination, resolution,
contrast and/or original type
are not registered in the program, carry out these operations now.
M Press [OK].
149
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
B Press
the Quick Dial key programmed with the Keystroke Program.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
In this example, the fax number
and program name “Send Later”
are shown on the display.
C Press the [OK] key then the {Start}}
key.
The machine starts scanning the
original.
The message will be sent at the
specified time.
Deleting a Keystroke Program
Limitation
❒ When a registered program is being used for a standby Memory
Transmission, the message “This
destination is in use for
standby transmission file.
Please modify/delete after
transmission” is shown and you
cannot delete the program.
7
Note
❒ If you delete a program, the registered program name is also deleted.
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
150
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Register/Delete” using the number key.
E Enter
the function number for
“Delete Program” using the number keys.
F Press the Quick Dial containing
the program you wish to delete.
REGISTER/DELETE MENU
The contents of the program are
shown on the display.
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press
[No] and the correct key.
❒ You can press [Status] to see the
Keystroke Programs currently
programmed.
G Press [Yes].
Registering Auto Documents
If you find that you often have to send
a particular page to people (e.g., a
map, a standard attachment, or a set
of instructions), store that page in
memory as an Auto Document. This
saves re-scanning the original every
time you wish to send it.
Use the following procedure to program a new Auto Document or overwrite an existing one.
Important
❒ You can store the following items
in an Auto Document:
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ If you press [No], the program is
not deleted and the display
shown in step 6 appears again.
H Press [Yes].
ND1X03E0
The program is deleted.
• Original (up to 6 documents/
with optional Fax Feature Expander, 18), one page for each
message)
• Scanning conditions (Resolution, Original Type, and Image
Density)
• Irregular Scan Area
• Document name (up to 10 characters)
❒ We recommend that you print the
Auto Document list and keep it
when you register or change a document. ⇒ P.158 “REPORTS/
LISTS”
7
Limitation
❒ You can only send one Auto Document per transmission.
❒ If you install the optional Fax Feature Expander, you can store up to
18 Auto Documents.
Note
❒ If you press [No], the program is
not deleted and the display
shown in step 6 appears again.
I Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
151
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
F Enter
the number of the Auto
Document you want to register
using the number keys.
Note
❒ If you make a mistake with the
first digit, press the {Clear/Stop}
}
key and enter the correct number. If you make a mistake for
digit, press [Cancel] key and enter the correct number.
❒ If a document is already registered with that Auto Document
number, the name is shown on
the display.
G Press [Name].
7
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
ND1X02E7
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Register/Delete” using the number keys.
Note
❒ You cannot omit a document
name. Be sure to register it.
H Enter the Auto Document name.
E Enter
the function number for
"Reg. Auto Doc." using the number keys.
152
Note
❒ If the Name is already registered, it is shown on the display.
If you want to change the document name, press the {Clear/
REGISTER/DELETE MENU
} key and enter another
Stop}
name.
Reference
P.213 “Entering Text”
The Auto Document is stored. The
display shown in step 6 appears
again.
N Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
I Press [OK].
Auto Document list
Note
❒ If you are storing a standard
size document, go to step 12.
J Press [Size].
The Auto Document list allows you to
print and check stored Auto Document names. To print this list, follow
the steps shown in “Reports/Lists”.
⇒ P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”
Deleting an Auto Document
ND1X02E8
K Select a size using the < and >
keys and press [OK].
Limitation
❒ You cannot delete an Auto Document waiting to be transmitted.
Delete it after the transmission or
delete the Auto Document after
deleting the file waiting to be
transmitted.
7
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
ND1X03E0
The document name and original
size are shown on the display.
L Set
your original and press the
{Start}
} key.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
The machine starts scanning the
original.
M When the original has been com-
2-Sided
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
pletely scanned in, press [Exit].
153
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
G Press [Yes].
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Register/Delete” using the number keys.
E Enter
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ If you press [No], the document
is not deleted and the display
shown in step 6 appears again.
H Press [Yes].
the function number for
“Delete Auto Doc.” using the
number keys.
7
F Enter
the number of the Auto
Document you want to delete using the number keys.
ND1X03E0
The Auto Document is deleted.
Note
❒ If you press [No], the document
is not deleted and the display
shown in step 6 appears again.
I Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
The stored document is shown on
the display.
Note
❒ If you make a mistake with the
first digit, press the {Clear/Stop}
}
key and enter the correct number.
154
Registering Irregular Area
When you select Irregular Area to
scan a non-standard size original, two
custom sizes of original are available
(Area 1 and Area 2). Use this function
to register these custom sizes in advance.
To change an existing Irregular Scan
size, just use the following procedure
to overwrite it.
REGISTER/DELETE MENU
Important
❒ When registering or changing an
original size, we recommend that
you make a memo of the new size.
Limitation
❒ For the vertical length (width), select “Auto,” “A4 (210 mm),” “B4
(257 mm),” “A3 (297 mm),” “8 1/2
inch,” or “11 inch.”
❒ For the horizontal length, specify
from 128 to 432 mm or from 5.5 to
17 inches. You cannot set a length
less than 128 mm or longer than
432 mm.
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Register/Delete” using the number keys.
E Enter the function for “Reg. Irreg.
Area” using the number keys.
Note
❒ If the appropriate display is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
F Press [Area 1] or [Area 2].
7
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
Note
❒ If a size is already registered, it
is shown on the display.
2
Staple
ND1X03E6
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
G Press [Vert.].
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
ND1X02E7
155
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
H Select a size you want to register
using the < or > key and press
[OK].
ND1X03E0
The specified size is shown on the
display.
Note
❒ When you select “[Auto]”, “---”
is shown on the display.
Note
❒ Each time you press [mm ↔
inch], the units change between
“inch” and “mm” alternately. If
you enter a length and change
the unit by pressing [mm ↔
inch], the length is converted automatically according to the
unit (fractions are rounded off).
For example, when you enter
{2}
}, {5}
}, and {0}
} in millimeters
and change to “inch,” the length
“9.8 inch” is shown on the display. If you press “mm” again
“249 mm” is displayed.
K Press [OK].
I Press [Horiz.].
The display shown in 6 appears
again.
7
L Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Deleting an Irregular Area
ND1X02E8
J Enter a length using the number
keys and press [OK].
ND1X03E0
The specified size is shown on the
display.
156
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
REGISTER/DELETE MENU
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
F Press [Area 1] or [Area 2].
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
ND1X03E6
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press
[No] and choose a correct one.
G Press [Yes].
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Register/Delete” using the number keys.
E Enter
the function number for
“Delete Irreg.Area” using the
number keys.
7
ND1X03E0
The Irregular Area is deleted.
Note
❒ If you press [No], the Irregular
Area is not deleted and the display shown in step 6 appears
again.
H Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Note
❒ If the appropriate display is not
↓Next].
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
The registered sizes are displayed.
157
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
REPORTS/LISTS
This function allows you to print the
following reports and lists manually.
Select a report or list as needed.
• TCR (Transaction Confirmation
Report) ⇒ P.116 “PRINTING THE
TCR”
• Quick Dial list ⇒ P.131 “Quick Dial
List”
• Group Dial list ⇒ P.137 “Group
Dial list”
• Keystroke Program list ⇒ P.149
“Keystroke program list”
• Speed Dial list ⇒ P.145 “Speed Dial
list”
• Auto Document list ⇒ P.153 “Auto
Document list”Auto Document list
• Authorized Reception list ⇒ P.191
“Sender/Authorized Reception List”
A Make sure that the machine is in
7
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Register/Delete” using the number keys.
E Enter
the Reports/Lists number
you want to print out using the
number keys.
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
Note
❒ If you can't see the item you
↓Next].
need, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
F Press the {Start}} key.
When printing is completed, the
display shown in step 5 appears
again.
2-Sided
Staple
❒ If you make a mistake, press
[Cancel] and enter the correct
number.
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
Note
❒ If you press Cancel before printing starts, the printing stops and
the display shown in step 5 appears again.
G Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
158
INITIAL SETUP TX
INITIAL SETUP TX
When you turn on the machine or return to Copy mode, the machine returns to the home settings. You can
change these home settings so that
the machine starts with your most frequently used features selected.
This procedure can be used to change
the home settings for the transmission mode (Memory/Immediate
Transmission) and scanning conditions (Resolution, Original Type, Image Density, and Auto Image
Density).
Note
❒ You can also choose whether the
machine returns to the home settings after each communication. ⇒
P.203 “Changing the User Parameters”
A Make sure that the machine is in
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Initial Setup TX” using the number keys.
The “Initial Setup TX” menu is
shown on the display.
E Enter
a function number using
the number keys.
7
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
F Select
the mode you want to
change using the < or > keys
then press [OK].
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press
Cancel and enter the correct
number.
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
159
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
❖ Transmission Mode Example
ND1X03E0
❖ Resolution Example
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ If you want to change other settings, repeat steps 5 and 6.
7
G Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
160
INITIAL SETUP RX
INITIAL SETUP RX
The Initial Setup Reception function
allows you to turn the following reception functions on or off.
• Reception Mode P.59 “SELECTING THE RECEPTION MODE”
• Checkered Mark P.64 “Checkered
Mark”
• Center Mark P.64 “Center Mark”
• Print RX Time P.64 “Reception
Time”
• Multi-copy Reception P.65 “Multicopy Reception”
• 2-sided Printing P.65 “2-Sided
Printing”
• Reverse Order Printing P.68 “Reverse Order Printing”
• Authorized RX P.188 “Authorized
Reception”
• Special RX Nos. P.182 “Special
Senders to Treat Differently (Special
RX Nos.)”
• Forwarding P.175 “Forwarding”
• Bypass Paper Size⇒ P.162 “To set
the Bypass Paper Size”
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
A Make sure that the machine is in
E Enter the function number of the
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
} key and enter the
{Clear/Stop}
correct number.
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
7
D Enter
the function number for
“Initial Setup RX” using the number keys. The Initial Setup RX
menu is shown on the display.
item you want to change with the
number keys.
F Change
the setting with the <
and > keys and press [OK].
161
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
❖ Reception Mode Example
To set the Bypass Paper Size
A Press the <and >keys to select
Auto.
ND2C0104
❖ Checkered Mark Example
ND1X03E1
B Press Ppr.Size.
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ If you wish to change other
functions, repeat steps 5 and 6.
❒ Select on or off for Checkered
Mark, Center Mark, Print RX
Time, 2-Sided Printing, Authorized RX, Special RX Nos., and
Reverse Printing.
❒ For Multi-copy Recp., enter the
number of copies using the
number keys.
❒ For Forwarding, select the messages to forward, either from all
the senders, from specified
senders or nothing.
7
G Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
ND1X02E6
C Press Vert..
ND1X02E7
D Press
the < and > keys to select
size and press [OK].
ND1X03E5
162
INITIAL SETUP RX
E Press Horiz..
ND1X02E7
7
163
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
ASSIGNING USER FUNCTION KEYS
You can program each of the User
Function keys ({
} –{
{F5}
}) with a
{F1}
function that you use frequently.
When you wish to use that function,
instead of having to search through
several menus to find it, just press the
appropriate User Function key. This
procedure can be used to edit, delete
or change the contents of the User
Function keys.
Note
❒ At default the following functions
are programmed by default. Tel
mode cannot be programmed in
F1/F2 keys.
7
Key Standard
With Options
F1
Start Manual
RX
←
F2
Transmission
Result Display
←
F3
TEL Mode
←
F4
-
G3/G4 Mode
Selection (with
ISDN option)
F5
-
Stamp with
Stamp option
Storing/Editing the Contents
of a User Function Key
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“User Functions” using the number keys.
E Press the User Function key you
want to use.
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press
Cancel and press the correct
key.
164
ASSIGNING USER FUNCTION KEYS
❒ You can press [Status] to see
how the User Function keys are
currently programmed.
❒ If you have the optional ISDN
unit installed, you can not re-assign User Function key {F4}
}.
❒ If you have the optional stamp
unit installed, you can not re-assign User Function key {F5}
}.
❖ E.g., “Print TCR”
F Enter
the function number you
want to register into the User
Function key using the number
keys and press [OK].
ND1X03E0
7
Note
❒ To see a function number not
displayed on the display, press
↓Next].
↑Prev.] or [↓
[↑
❒ If you wish to store more functions, repeat steps 5 and 6 for
other keys.
❒ If you press Cancel, the function
is not stored and the display
shown in step 5 appears again.
G Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Using a User Function
A Press
the User Function Key
({
{F1}
}–{
{F5}
}) in which the function
you want to use is stored.
The stored function's display is
shown.
165
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS
Personal Codes
This function allows you to keep
track of machine usage. When Personal Codes are programmed and
Personal Code Access is turned on users have to enter their Personal Code
before they send a fax. ⇒ P.207
“Printing the User Parameter List”
Important
❒ We recommend that you print the
Personal Code list and keep it
when you register or change a Personal Code. ⇒ P.158 “REPORTS/
LISTS”
Note
❒ To enter a Personal Code when
send a fax, follow the steps shown
in “Personal Code Transmission”.
⇒ P.78 “PERSONAL CODE
TRANSMISSION”
7
❒ If Personal Code Access is
switched on, users cannot use the
facsimile feature unless they enter
their Personal Code. ⇒ P.169 “Personal Code Access”
Registering Personal Codes
You can register the following items
in a Personal Code:
• Personal Code (any 4 digit number
except 0000)
• Name (up to 20 characters)
To change an existing Personal code,
just overwrite it with a new one.
Limitation
❒ On a standard model you can register up to 20 codes. If you install
the Fax Feature Expander option,
166
the maximum number of personal
codes you can register is 50.
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS
number keys and press the {#}
}
(Enter) key within 3 seconds.
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
play. If you wish to change the
name, press [Name] and enter
another name. If you wish to
program another code, press
[Cancel] and enter the new code.
❒ You can press [Status] to see
which codes have been already
programmed.
E Enter
the function number for
“Personal Code” using the number keys.
H Press [Name].
F Enter
the function number for
“Reg. Pers. Code” using the number keys.
ND1X02E7
I Enter the name.
7
G Enter a Personal Code using the
number keys.
Note
❒ If you enter a wrong number for
the first, second, or third digit,
press the {Clear/Stop}
} key and
enter a correct number. If you
enter a wrong value for the
fourth digit, press Cancel and
enter the correct number from
the first digit.
Note
❒ If the name has already been
programmed, it appears on the
display. If you wish to change
the name, press the {Clear/Stop}
}
key and enter another name.
Reference
P.213 “Entering Text”
J Press [OK].
The entered Personal Code and
name are shown on the display.
❒ If you enter a Personal code that
has already been programmed,
the contents appear on the dis-
167
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
K Press [OK] to register the code and
name.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ If you press [Cancel], the entered
Personal Code is canceled and
the display shown in step 7 appears again.
L Press [Exit].
The display shown in step 7 appears again.
M Press [PrevMenu] 3 times.
N Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
7
Deleting a Personal Code
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
number keys and press the {#}
}
(Enter) key within 3 seconds.
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
168
E Enter
the function number for
“Personal Code” using the number keys.
KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS
F Enter
the function number for
"Delete Pers. Code" using the
number keys.
The Personal Code is deleted.
G Enter the Personal Code you want
to delete using the number keys.
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear/Stop}
} key and enter the
correct code.
❒ You can press [Status] to see
which codes have been already
programmed.
H Press [Yes].
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ If you press [No], the Personal
Code is not deleted and the display shown in step 7 appears
again.
J Press [PrevMenu] 3 times.
K Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Personal Code Access
The machine can be set up so that users cannot use it without entering a
registered Personal Code. This prevents an unauthorized person from
sending a fax message and helps
track the activity of each user.
7
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
ND2C0104
If you press [No], the Personal
Code is not deleted and the display
shown in step 7 appears again.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
I Press [Yes].
169
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
Access” using the number keys.
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
F Enter the number for “Pers.Code
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
G Switch access on or off using the
< or > key and then press [OK].
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
ND1X03E0
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the number for “Key Op.
Settings” using the number keys
and press the {#}
} key within 3
seconds.
7
Note
❒ If you press [Cancel], the previous setting is not changed and
the display shown in step 6 appears again.
H Press [PrevMenu] twice.
I Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
The display returns to the Personal
Code screen.
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
E Enter
the number for “Personal
Code” using the number keys.
170
Printing the Personal Code List
Print this list to find out the registered
Personal Codes and their names.
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
F Enter
the function number for
“Print Pers. Code” using the number keys.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the number for “Key Op.
Settings” using the number keys
and press the {#}
} key within 3
seconds.
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
E Enter
the number for “Personal
Code” using the number keys.
G Press the {Start}} key.
When printing is completed, the
display shown in step 4 appears
again.
Note
❒ If you press [Cancel] before
printing starts, the printing
stops and the display shown in
step 6 appears again.
H Press [PrevMenu] twice.
I Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
7
ECM
If a part of a transmission fails because of a line problem, the lost data
is automatically resent. For this feature to work, the other machine must
have ECM. By default, ECM is turned
on, but you can change this with the
following procedure.
When ECM is off data transmission
speed shifts down below 14.4 Kbps
and JBIG compression is not available.
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
171
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
F Switch ECM on or off using the
< or > key and press [OK].
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
User Tools / Counter
ND1X03E0
Enhanced
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter
the number of the Fax
mode.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
7
D Enter
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
number keys and press the {#}
}
(Enter) key within 3 seconds.
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
↓Next].
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
E Enter
the function number for
“ECM” using the number keys.
172
Note
❒ If you press [Cancel], the previous setting is not changed and
the display shown in step 5 appears again.
G Press [PrevMenu].
H Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Memory Lock
The optional Fax Feature Expander is required to use this function.
When you switch Memory Lock On,
received messages are stored in memory and not printed automatically.
When a message is received in Memory Lock mode, the Receive File indicator blinks. To print this message,
enter the Memory Lock ID. A user
who does not know the ID cannot
print the message. This prevents an
unauthorized person from seeing the
message.
To use Memory Lock, program the
Memory Lock ID and switch it on.
KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
E Enter
the function number for
“Memory Lock” using the number keys.
F Switch Memory Lock on or off using the < and > keys and press
OK.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND1X03E0
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
number keys and press the {#}
}
(Enter) key within 3 seconds.
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
Note
❒ If you press Cancel, Memory
Lock is not switched on and the
display shown in 5 appears
again.
7
G Press [PrevMenu].
H Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Multistep Transfer
The optional Fax Feature Expander is required to use this function.
This machine can be used to build up
a multi-step facsimile network that allows messages to be sent via multiple
Transfer Stations and achieve greater
efficiency in processing Transfer Requests.
The following procedure describes
how to program a Transfer Station
number into a Group. Providing this
Group contains the appropriate End
Receiver Information (Group codes),
173
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
when your machine receives a Transfer Request, it will pass the message
to the Transfer Station(s) you specify.
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
number keys and press the {#}
}
(Enter) key within 3 seconds.
174
F Press
the Quick Dial key you
want to store this Transfer Group
in.
2
2
D Enter
the function number for
“Multistep Transf” using the
number keys.
2
Book
2
7
E Enter
2-Sided
Staple
Enhanced
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
↓Next].
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
Note
❒ You can press [Status] to see the
current status of the Group.
❒ If the machine has the Optional
Group feature (optional Fax
Feature Expander is required),
you can register a Transfer Station. Select the Group type you
wish to register using the number keys. To select a Group,
press a Quick Dial key. To select
an Optional Group, enter the
Optional Group code using the
number keys. In this example,
Optional Group is selected.
KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS
G Specify a Transfer Station.
Note
❒ Enter the Transfer Station's fax
number using a Quick Dial key,
Speed Dial or the number keys.
⇒ P.46 “Quick Dials”, P.47
“Speed Dials”, P.43 “Number
Keys”
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear/Stop}
} key and enter the
correct number.
❒ If you press Cancel, the setting
is canceled and the display
show in 6 appears again.
This is useful if, for example, you are
visiting another office and would like
a copy of your messages sent to that
office so you can read them.
In this section, the machines that messages are forwarded to are referred to
as Forwarding Stations. The locations
from which you would like messages
forwarded from are referred to as
Specific Senders.
You can register:
• 5 Forwarding Stations (up to 32
digits for each number)
• 30 Specific Senders (maximum 10
per Forwarding Station, up to 20
characters each with G3 and 24
with G4)
• Wild Cards ⇒ P.213 “Wild Cards”
Important
❒ It is recommended that you print
the Forwarding/Sender list and
keep it when you register or
change a receiver or sender. ⇒
P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”
H Press [OK].
ND1X03E0
I Press [OK].
J Press [PrevMenu].
K Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Forwarding
The optional Fax Feature Expander is required to use this function.
Using this feature, you can select
messages from Specified Senders to
be printed on your machine and then
sent on to another fax machine.
7
Limitation
❒ This feature only works if the incoming message is from another
party that has been programmed
as a Specific Sender.
❒ The Forwarding function does not
forward messages received with
Confidential Reception, Memory
Lock, Polling Reception mode, or
messages received by Transfer Request.
❒ You cannot register a sender who
does not have an RTI or CSI.
❒ You can register up to 30 Specific
Senders for Forwarding, Special
RX Nos., and Authorized Reception functions. You sometimes cannot register 30 senders depending
on the number of senders regis-
175
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
tered with other functions. If you
install the optional Fax Feature Expander, you can register up to 50
senders.
Note
❒ You can print a forwarding mark
on forward messages. ⇒ P.207
“Printing the User Parameter List”
❒ To register a sender, use an RTI or
CSI. When you communicate with
a sender using G4, register the G4
TID.
❒ You can find out the RTI or CSI of
a sender by looking in the destination name column of the TCR.
❒ Before using the Forwarding function, register Forwarding Stations
and select the messages to forward. ⇒ P.161 “INITIAL SETUP
RX”
❒ You can specify whether or not to
send received messages on to another fax machine automatically.
See “Changing User Parameters”
⇒ P.203 “Changing the User Parameters”. This feature is called “Forwarding”. The default setting is
“Off”.
❒ You can specify whether or not to
print forwarded messages. This
feature is called “Local Printing”.
The default setting is on. ⇒ P.203
“Changing the User Parameters”
7
Registering Forwarding Stations
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
176
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
number keys and press the {#}
}
key within 3 seconds.
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
E Enter
the function number for
“Forwarding” using the number
keys.
KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS
F Enter
the function number for
“Reg. Receiver” using the number keys.
I Press [Exit].
G Choose
a receiver (Forwarding
Station) to program be entering
the its code number.
ND1X03E0
J Press [PrevMenu] 3 times.
K Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Deleting a Forwarding Station
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press
[Cancel] and enter a correct
number.
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
H Enter
the Forwarding Station's
fax number using the number
keys and select the communication type, then press [OK].
7
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
ND1X03E0
2
2
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear/Stop}
} key and enter a correct number.
❒ If you have the optional ISDN
unit, select the line type to be
used before specifying a fax
number. ⇒ P.41 “CHANGING
LINE TYPE”
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
177
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
number keys and press the {#}
}
(Enter) key within 3 seconds.
Note
❒ If you press No, the Forwarding
Station is not deleted and the
display shown in 5 appears
again.
I Press [Yes].
The Forwarding Station is deleted.
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
↓Next].
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
E Enter
the function number for
“Forwarding” using the number
keys.
F Enter
the function number for
“Delete Receiver” using the number keys.
7
G Choose the receiver (Forwarding
Station) to delete by entering its
code number.
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ When you press [No], the Forwarding Station is not deleted
and the display shown in 5 appears again.
J Press [PrevMenu] 3 times.
K Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Registering Specific Senders
(Forwarding)
A Make sure that the machine is in
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press
[No] and enter a correct number.
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
H Press Yes.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
ND2C0104
178
KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
ter by entering its code number.
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter
G Choose a Specific Sender to regis-
the number of the Fax
mode.
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear/Stop}
} key and enter a correct number.
H Press [RTI/CSI].
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
number keys and press the {#}
}
(Enter) key within 3 seconds.
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
E Enter
the function number for
“Forwarding” using the number
keys.
F Enter
ND2C0101
I Register an RTI or CSI of a sender
7
and press [OK].
ND1X03E0
Reference
⇒ P.213 “Entering Text”
J Select whether or not to register a
sender as a wild card. ⇒ P.213
“Wild Cards”.
the function number for
“Register Sender” using the number keys.
179
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
K Press [Receiver].
N Press [Exit].
ND1X02E8
L Choose
the Forwarding Station
you want to assign this Specific
Sender to: enter its code and press
[OK].
ND1X03E0
O Press [PrevMenu] 3 times.
P Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Deleting a Specific Sender (Forwarding)
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
ND1X03E0
7
M Press [OK].
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
ND1X03E0
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
Note
❒ If you press [Cancel], the sender
is not registered and the display
shown in 7 appears again.
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
180
KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
H Press [Yes].
D Enter
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
number keys and press the {#}
}
(Enter) key within 3 seconds.
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
↓Next].
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
E Enter
Note
❒ If you press [No], the sender is
not deleted and the display
shown in 7 appears again.
I Press [Yes].
The sender is deleted.
the function number for
“Forwarding” using the number
keys.
F Enter
the function number for
“Delete Sender” using the number keys.
G Choose the Specified Sender you
want to delete by entering its code
with the number keys.
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear/Stop}
} key and enter a correct number.
❒ If you have a mistake with the
second digit, press [No] and enter the number again.
7
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ If you press [No], the sender is
not deleted and the display
shown in 5 appears again.
J Press [PrevMenu] 3 times.
K Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Specified Sender/Forwarding Station list
Print this list to find out which Specific Senders are assigned to which Forwarding Stations.
181
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
E Enter
the function number for
“Forwarding” using the number
keys.
F Enter
the function number for
“Print Sender List” using the
number keys.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
7
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
number keys and press the {#}
}
(Enter) key within 3 seconds.
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
182
Note
❒ If you press [Cancel] before
printing starts, the printing
stops.
H Press [PrevMenu] twice.
I Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
2-Sided
Staple
G Press the {Start}} key.
Special Senders to Treat
Differently (Special RX Nos.)
Special Reception numbers (Special
RX Nos.) allow you to treat incoming
messages from certain locations differently.
For example, you might want messages from your branch offices printed on a different color paper to
identity them at a glance. In this case,
program the branch office RTI/CSI's
as Specific Senders and select a paper
tray loaded with colored paper.
• Multi-copy *1 (Number of prints
setting).
You can have several copies of
messages printed.
• Cassette Select (tray from which
messages are printed).
You can choose the paper cassette
used when printing messages. If
you set different color paper in this
cassette, you will be able to recognize messages from certain senders at a glance.
KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS
Note
❒ If you receive a fax with a paper
size different from that set in the
paper cassette, the printout will
be split across several pages or
reduced to fit on the paper.
Limitation
❒ The Special Reception Numbers
function cannot used to treat messages received from a Specific
Senders if they are received with
Polling Reception or Free Polling.
❒ If you choose the optional Bypass Feed Tray, make sure the
size you programmed for this
tray matches the paper size in
this tray. For more details, P.14
“Acceptable Original Sizes”.
• Memory Lock *1
You can have messages received
into memory. To print them out,
P.114 “PRINTING A FILE RECEIVED WITH MEMORY LOCK”.
• 2-Sided Printing *2
Print on both sides of the paper.
❒ You cannot register a Specific
Sender who does not have an RTI
or CSI.
❒ You can register up to 30 senders
for Forwarding, Special Reception
Numbers, and Authorized Reception functions. You sometimes cannot register 30 senders depending
on the number of senders registered with other functions. If you
install the optional Fax Feature Expander, you can register up to 50
senders.
Limitation
❒ The function requires both the
optional Duplex Unit and Fax
Memory Board.
Note
❒ To register a sender, use an RTI or
CSI. When you communicate with
a sender using G4, register a G4
TID
*1
• Reverse Printing
You can have pages printed in the
opposite order in which they were
received.
You can adjust the following settings for this function:
• Specified Senders (maximum of
30, up to 20 characters each with
G3, up to 24 characters each
with G4)
• Wildcards P.213 “Wild Cards”
*1
*2
The optional Fax Feature Expander is
required.
Duplex Tray option and Fax Feature
Expander are required
Important
❒ It is recommended that you print
the Sender/Specified Number list
and keep it when you register or
change a sender. ⇒ P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”
7
❒ You can find the RTI or CSI of a
sender by looking in the destination name column of the TCR
❒ Before using the Special RX Nos.
function, switch this function to
On by following the steps shown
in Initial Setup RX. ⇒ P.161 “INITIAL SETUP RX”
Registering Specific Senders (Special X
Nos.)
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
183
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
F Enter
the function number for
“Register Sender” using the number keys.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
G Choose a number where you want
to program a Specific Sender.
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
7
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear/Stop}
} key and reenter a
correct value. If you enter a
wrong value for the second digit, press [Cancel] and enter it
again.
H Press [RTI/CSI].
D Enter
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
number keys and press the {#}
}
key within 3 seconds.
ND1X02E7
I Enter an RTI or CSI of a sender
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
and press [OK].
E Enter
the function number for
“Special RX Nos.”. using the
number keys.
ND1X03E0
184
KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS
❖ Memory Lock
Reference
P.213 “Entering Text”
J Select whether or not to register
the sender as a wild card. ⇒ P.213
“Wild Cards”.
ND1X03E0
❖ Reverse Printing
K Press [RX Mode].
ND1X03E0
ND1X02E8
L Select any features for this Specif-
❖ 2-Sided Printing
ic Sender. You can scroll through
them by pressing [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next]. Then press [OK].
7
❖ Multi-copy
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ Select only items you want to
change.
ND1X03E0
❖ Tray Select
❒ If you press [Cancel], the specified setting are canceled and the
display shown in 11 appears
again.
ND1X03E0
185
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
M Press [OK].
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
ND1X03E0
N Press [Exit].
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
ND1X03E0
O Press [PrevMenu] 3 times.
P Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
7
Deleting a Specific Sender
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
number keys and press the {#}
}
key within 3 seconds.
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
E Enter
the function number for
“Special RX Nos.” using the number keys.
F Enter
the function number for
“Delete Sender” using the number keys.
G Choose
a sender number you
want to delete by entering its code
186
KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS
with the number keys. The registered RTI or CSI is flash up.
Specified Sender List
Print this list to see the currently programmed Specific Senders.
A Make sure that the machine is in
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear/Stop}
} key and enter a correct value.
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
H Press [Yes].
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ If you press [No], the sender is
not deleted and the display
shown in 5 appears again.
I Press [Yes].
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
7
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
The sender is deleted.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ If you press [No], the sender is
not deleted and the display
shown in 5 appears again.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
J Press [PrevMenu] 3 times.
K Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
187
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
number keys and press the {#}
}
(Enter) key within 3 seconds.
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
E Enter
the function number for
“Special RX Nos.”. using the
number keys.
F Enter
the function number for
“Print Sender List” using the
number keys.
G Press the {Start}} key.
When the printing job is completed, the display shown in 6 appears
again.
Note
❒ If you press [Cancel] before
printing starts, printing stops
and the display shown in 6 appears again.
7
H Press [PrevMenu] twice.
I Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Authorized Reception
This feature helps you to reject junk
mail. It lets you specify which terminals you wish to receive fax messages
from; the others will be shut out. This
is useful if you are very annoyed with
someone.
You can register the following:
• 30 Specified Senders (up to 20
characters for each sender with G3,
24 with G4)
• Wild Card ⇒ P.213 “Wild Cards”
188
Important
❒ It is recommended that you print
the Sender/Authorized Reception
list and keep it when you register
or change a sender. ⇒ P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”
Limitation
❒ You cannot register a Specified
Sender who does not have an RTI
or CSI.
❒ You can register up to 30 senders
for Forwarding, Special RX Nos.,
and Authorized Reception functions. You sometimes cannot register 30 senders depending on the
number of senders registered with
other functions. If you attach the
optional Fax Feature Expander to
the machine, you can register up to
50 senders.
Note
❒ To register a sender, use an RTI or
CSI. If you communicate with a
sender using G4, register the G4
TID.
❒ To find out a senders RTI/CSI,
check the TCR.
❒ You need to switch Authorized Reception on. ⇒ P.161 “INITIAL SETUP RX”
❒ You can specify whether to receive
messages from only Specified
Senders or to exclude messages
from Specified Senders. The default setting is “Receive from Authorized Senders”. ⇒ P.203
“Changing the User Parameters”
KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS
Programming Specified Senders
A Make sure that the machine is in
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
↓Next].
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
E Enter
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
F Enter
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
the function number for
“Register Sender” using the number keys.
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
the function number for
“Authorized RX” using the number keys.
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
G Choose
a sender number you
wish to register.
7
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
{Clear/Stop}
} key and reenter a
correct value.
H Press [RTI/CSI].
D Enter
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
number keys and press the {#}
}
(Enter) key within 3 seconds.
ND1X02E7
189
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
I Enter an RTI or CSI of a sender
and press [OK].
Deleting a Specific Sender (Authorized
Reception)
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
ND1X03E0
Reference
P.213 “Entering Text”
J Select whether or not to register
the sender on a P.213 “Wild Cards”.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
K Press [OK].
2
Enhanced
7
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
ND1X03E0
L Press [Exit].
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
ND1X03E0
M Press [PrevMenu] 3 times.
N Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
190
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
number keys and press the {#}
}
(Enter) key within 3 seconds.
KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
↓Next].
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
The sender is deleted.
E Enter
the function number for
“Authorized RX” using the number keys.
F Enter
the function number for
“Delete Sender” using the number keys.
G Choose the sender to delete by en-
tering its code. The RTI/CSI will
flash up.
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ If you press [No], the sender is
not deleted and the display
shown in 5 appears again.
J Press [PrevMenu] 3 times.
K Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Note
❒ If you make a mistake, press
{Clear/Stop}
} and enter a correct
number.
H Press [Yes].
Print this list to find out which Specific Senders are currently programmed.
A Make sure that the machine is in
7
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ If you press [No], the sender is
not deleted and the display
shown in 7 appears again.
I Press [Yes].
Sender/Authorized Reception List
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
191
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
Monitor Volume
You can change the volume of the following sounds the machine makes.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
❖ On Hook
When you press the {On Hook Dial}
}
key.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
❖ Transmission
When the machine send a message.
D Enter
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
number keys and press the {#}
}
(Enter) key within 3 seconds.
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
↓Next].
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
7
E Enter
the function number for
“Authorized RX” using the number keys.
❖ Reception
When the machine receive a message.
❖ DiallingDialing
After pressing the {Start}
} key, this
sound is output until the line connects to the destination.
❖ Printing
Sounds when a received message
has been printed. See P.64 “Print
Completion Beep”.
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
F Enter
the function number for
“Print Sender List” using the
number keys.
G Press the {Start}} key.
Note
❒ When you press [Cancel], the
printing stops and the display
shown in 4 appears again.
H Press [PrevMenu] twice.
I Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
192
KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
❖ On Hook
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
ND1X03E6
G Adjust the volume using the < or
> key and press [OK].
D Enter
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
number keys and press the {#}
}
(Enter) key within 3 seconds.
ND1X03E5
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
↓Next].
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
E Enter
the function number for
“Monitor Volume” using the
number keys.
F Select an item you want to adjust
pressing [↑
↑Prev.] and [↓
↓Next].
Note
❒ On Hook, Transmission, Reception, Dialling, and Printing are
shown in that order.
Note
❒ When you press [Cancel], the
volume setting is canceled and
the display shown in 5 appears
again.
7
❒ Lowest = OFF
H Press [PrevMenu].
I Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
RTI/TTI
An RTI (Receive Terminal Identification) is passed to a receiver or sender
when you send or receive a fax. When
the RTI is received, it is shown on the
display and printed in a report at the
other end.
The TTI (Transmitter Terminal Identification) is printed on the header of
every fax you send.
You usually should contain your
name in both of these identifications.
193
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
Limitation
❒ The RTI does not work unless the
other party has the same make machine with the RTI feature.
❒ You can program up to 20 characters in a RTI and 32 in a TTI.
❒ You can program letter, symbols,
number, and spaces in an RTI and
TTI.
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
7
Sort
1-Sided
11
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
number keys and press the {#}
}
key within 3 seconds.
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
E Enter
the function number for
“RTI/TTI” using the number
keys.
F Press [ RTI].
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
D Enter
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
ND1X02E7
G Enter an RTI and press [OK].
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
194
ND1X03E0
Reference
P.213 “Entering Text”
KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS
when you phone rates are cheaper. ⇒
P.74 “SEND LATER”
H Press [TTI].
Limitation
❒ You can program only one Economy Transmission time.
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
ND1X02E8
I Enter a TTI and press [OK].
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
ND1X03E0
Sort
Reference
P.213 “Entering Text”
J Press [OK] to confirm.
Note
❒ If you press [Cancel], the entered
characters are canceled and the
display shown in 3 appears
again.
K Press [PrevMenu].
L Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Registering The Economy
Transmission Time
Economy Transmission allow you to
take advantage of off-peak line rates
by delaying transmission of messages
until a later time.
Use the procedure below to program
the Economy Transmission Time for
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
7
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
195
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
number keys and press the {#}
}
(Enter) key within 3 seconds.
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
E Enter
the function number for
“Economy TX” using the number
keys.
F Enter
an economy transmission
time using the number keys and
press [OK]. To change AM/PM,
press the [AM ↔ PM] key (North
America only)
7
Note
❒ If you press [Cancel], the entered
time is canceled and the display
shown in 5 appears again.
❖ Polling ID
This ID is required for using Transfer Request ⇒ P.96 “TRANSFER
REQUEST”, Transfer Station ⇒
P.60 “Transfer Station”, Default ID
Polling Transmission ⇒ P.90 “Free
Polling Transmission”, Default ID
Polling Reception ⇒ P.94 “Default
ID Polling Reception (Free Polling
Reception)”, ID Transmission ⇒
P.52 “ID Transmission”, ID Reception ⇒ P.61 “ID Reception”function.
❖ Memory Lock ID
This ID is required for printing a
message received using Memory
Lock. ⇒ P.114 “PRINTING A FILE
RECEIVED
WITH
MEMORY
LOCK”
Limitation
❒ A Polling ID can be any combination of digits (0 - 9) and letters (A F) except for 0000 and FFFF. When
you use Transfer Request, Transfer
Station, or ID Transmission, register the same ID code as that registered on the sender's machine.
G Press [PrevMenu].
H Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
❒ A Confidential ID and Memory
Lock ID can be any a four digit numeric code except for 0000.
❒ For Confidential ID and Memory
Lock ID, the optional Fax Feature
Expander is required.
ID Code
A Make sure that the machine is in
Use this procedure to register the following kinds of ID codes.
❖ Confidential ID
This ID is usually required for
printing a message received in the
Confidential Reception. ⇒ P.112
196
“PRINTING A CONFIDENTIAL
MESSAGE”
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
F Choose the ID you wish to program using the number keys.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
Enhanced
G Enter an ID code and press [OK].
2
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
number keys and press the {#}
}
key within 3 seconds.
Note
❒ For a Confidential ID and Memory Lock ID, use the number
keys to enter an ID code. For a
Polling ID, use the number keys
and letter keys (A to F).
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
} key and enter a cor{Clear/Stop}
rect code.
❒ If you press [Cancel], the entered
ID is canceled.
7
❖ Confidential ID
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
❖ Memory Lock ID
E Enter
the function number for
“ID Code” using the number
keys.
H Press [PrevMenu] twice.
I Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
197
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
G3 Analog Line
This function must be set up before
you connect the machine to a G3 analog line.
You can register the following items
with a G3 analog Line:
• PSTN Line Type (Dial Pulse/Tone)
• CSI (up to 20 digits)
• Own Analog Number (up to 16
digits)
Note
❒ A CSI (Called Station Identification) is notified to a receiver or
sender when you send or receive a
fax. When the CSI is received, it is
shown on the display or printed in
a report by the receiver's or sender's machine. The CSI works even
if the receiver or sender uses a different make machine.
7
❒ The CSI can contain numerals, a
plus sign (+), and spaces. You usually should register your country
code, area code (minus the leading
zero) and your fax number in that
order.
❒ Specify your own analog number
(the telephone number to which
your machine is connected) so that
the transfer station can return the
Transfer Result report to you. You
can program numbers and a pause
in your own number. Be sure to enter a pause after the area code.
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
198
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
number keys and press the {#}
}
(Enter) key within 3 seconds.
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
E Enter
the function number for
“G3 Analog Line” using the number keys.
KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS
F Enter
the function number for
“PSTN Line Type” using the
number keys.
K Enter an own analog number us-
ing the number keys and press
[OK].
G Select the desired line type and
press [OK].
ND1X03E0
L Press [PrevMenu] twice.
M Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
G3 Digital Line
ND1X03E0
H Enter
the function number for
“CSI” using the number keys.
I Enter CSI and press [OK].
In some countries, you can not use
this function.
This function must be set when you
connect the machine to an ISDN G3
digital line.
You can register the following items.
• CSI (up to 20 digits)
• Own Digital Number (up to 29
digits)
7
Note
❒ Optional ISDN required.
ND1X03E0
J Enter
the function number for
“Own Analog Number” using the
number keys.
❒ You need to register a CSI and
your own digital number. ⇒ P.198
“G3 Analog Line”
❒ If you wish to change your subaddress, contact your service representative.
❒ Program a User Function key for
the subaddress function.
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
199
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
F Enter
the function number for
“CSI” using the number keys.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
Enhanced
G Enter the CSI and press [OK].
2
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
ND1X03E0
H Enter
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
7
the function number for
“Own Digital Number” using the
number keys.
I Enter
your own digital number
using the number keys and press
[OK].
D Enter
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
number keys and press the {#}
}
(Enter) key within 3 seconds.
ND1X03E0
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
E Enter
the function number for
“G3 Digital Line” using the number keys.
200
J Press [PrevMenu] twice.
K Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
G4 Digital Line
This function must be set when you
connect the machine to the ISDN digital line.
You can register the following items:
• TID (up to 24 digit)
KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS
• Own Digital Number (up to 29
digit)
Note
❒ Optional ISDN unit is required.
❒ You can use a G4 TID if you use the
ISDN. The G4 TID is information
to be printed on a destination machine when you send a fax using
G4 down the ISDN.
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
number keys and press the {#}
}
(Enter) key within 3 seconds.
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
E Enter
the function number for
“G4 Digital Line” using the number keys.
F Enter
the function number for
“TID” using the number keys. In
some countries, you can not use
this function.
7
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
D Enter
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
G Enter
the number for “Country
Code”.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
201
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
H Enter
your Country Code using
the number keys and press [OK].
N Enter
the function number for
“Own Digital Number ” using the
number keys.
O Enter
ND1X03E0
I Enter the number for “Own Digi-
your own digital number
using the number keys and press
[OK].
tal Number” using the number
keys.
J Enter your fax number and press
[OK].
ND1X03E0
P Press [PrevMenu] twice.
Q Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
7
ND1X03E0
K Enter the number for “Terminal
Name.”
L Enter
your terminal name and
press [OK].
ND1X03E0
Reference
P.213 “Entering Text”
M Press [PrevMenu].
202
KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS
Changing the User Parameters
The User Parameters allow you to customize various settings to match your
needs.
To change the function settings, set the user parameter switches.
Preparation
Access to some User Parameter Settings requires installation of optional
equipment or that other settings be made beforehand.
- Switches and Bits
User Parameters are divided into Switches and each switch is divided into eight
bits. The right most bit is bit 0 and the left most is bit 7.
Switch
00
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
- User Parameter List
Switch
Bit
Item
0
1
00
0
Stamp home position
Off
On
3,2,1
Image density adjustment level home position
The higher the level, the greater the image density.
000: Auto Image Density, 001: Level 1 (lightest), 010: Level 2, 011:
Level 3, 100: Level 4, 101: Level 5 (darkest)
5,4
Character size (resolution) home position
00: Standard, 01: Detail, 10: Super fine
6
Transmission Mode home
position
Memory Trans- Immediate
mission
Transmission
203
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
Switch
Bit
Item
0
1
01
0
Label Insertion home position
Off
On
1
ID Transmission home posi- Off
tion
On
2
Auto Reduction home position
On
4,3
Original type home position
Off
00: Text, 01: Photo/Text, 10: Photo
02
7
03
204
5
TTI Print home position
Off
On
7
Return the machine to the
initial settings after each
communication
Off
On
0
Forwarding Mark
Off
On
1
Center Mark
Off
On
2
Print RX Time
Off
On
3
TSI Print
Off
On
4
Checkered Mark
Off
On
5
CIL Print
Off
On
6
TID Print
Off
On
0
Printing a Transmission Result Report (Memory Transmission) automatically
Off
On
2
Printing a Memory Storage
Report automatically
Off
On
3
Printing a Polling Reserve
Report automatically
Off
On
4
Printing a Polling Result Re- Off
port
On
5
Printing a Transmission Re- Off
sult Report (Immediate
Transmission) automatically
On
6
Printing a Polling Clear Report automatically
Off
On
7
Printing a TCR automatically
Off
On
KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS
Switch
Bit
Item
0
1
04
0
Printing a Confidential File
Report automatically
Off
On
7
Containing an image in a
Transmission Result Report
(Memory Transmission),
Memory Storage Report,
Communication Failure Report, or Transfer Result
Off
On
0
Receiving in Service Call
(SC) Condition
Possible (Substitute Reception)
Not possible
2,1
Receiving when the machine can not print.
05
00: Enabled unconditionally, 01: Enabled for RTI/CSI is received, 10: Enabled for Polling ID match, 11: Disabled
4
Personal Code Access
Off
On
5
Just Size Printing
Off
On
6
Scanning in Mixed Paper
Size Available
Off
On
7
Empty cassette alert
Off
On
1
Fax communication mode
home position
G3
G4
5
Selecting the Sheet to Print
the a Quick Dial Label
Paper label
sheet
Transparent label sheet
6
Scanning Start Page of the
Book Original
From the left
page
From the right
page
07
2
Parallel Memory Transmission
Off
On
08
2
Authorized Reception condi- Receive from
tion
authorized
Senders
Receive from
other than authorized Senders
10
1
Two in One
Off
On
3
Auto Reduction in printing
Off
On
1
Send PB/UUI to ISDN
UUI
PB
6
Local Printing at Forwarding Off
On
7
Polling file after sending
Standby
06
11
Delete
7
205
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
Switch
Bit
Item
14
0
Printing a document reImmediate
ceived with Auto Power-On printing
Reception
When turning
on the operation
2
Batch Transmission
Off
On
3
Clear modes when switching Off
the application
On
7
Manual Service report
Transmission
On
2,1,0
Paper feed Tray
15
0
1
Off
001: First, 010: Second, 011: Third, 100: 4th, 101:LCT
5
Fixed Input tray
On
Off
16
2
Paper Size Priority when receiving A4
A3
B4
24
1,0
Storing a message in memory which could not be transmitted
00: Off, 01: Store for 24 hours, 11: Store for 72 hours
25
7
7
Summer Time
How to Specify a User Parameter
• It is recommended that you print
the User Parameter list and keep it
when you register or change a user
parameter. ⇒ P.207 “Printing the
User Parameter List”
• Do not change any bit switches
other than those shown on the previous pages.
A Make sure that the machine is in
Off
On
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
206
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS
D Enter
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
number keys and press the {#}
}
(Enter) key within 3 seconds.
I Press [PrevMenu].
J Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Printing the User Parameter List
Print this list to see the current User
Parameter settings.
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
E Enter
the function number for
“User Parameters” using the
number keys.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
F Select a number for a switch you
wish to change by pressing
↑Switch] or [↓
↓Switch].
[↑
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
Staple
Book
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2-Sided
2
2
Enhanced
7
2
2-Sided
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
ND1X03E6
G Press a number key corresponding to the bit number you wish to
change e.g., press {0}
} to change
bit 0.
H When
you have finished, press
[OK].
Note
❒ If you press [Cancel], the specified settings are canceled and
the display shown in 3 appears
again.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
207
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
number keys and press the {#}
}
(Enter) key within 3 seconds.
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
E Enter the function “Prt.U.Parameters” using the number keys.
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
F Press the {Start}} key to print the
list.
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
7
Note
❒ If you press [Cancel] before
printing starts, the printing
stops and the display shown in
3 appears again.
G Press [PrevMenu].
H Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Date/Time
Use this function to set your machine's internal clock to the current
time and date. This time is shown on
the display, printed on pages and
used for various features, such as
Send Later.
If the current date and time are
wrong, use this procedure to correct
them.
208
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
number keys and press the {#}
}
(Enter) key within 3 seconds.
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS
E Enter the function number for “
Date/Time” using the number
keys.
F Select an item you want to change
using the < and > keys, enter
the month using [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next]
and enter the correct date or time
using the number keys. Then
press [OK].
Note
❒ When you enter a date, the day
is set automatically.
❒ Depending on your area, your
machine will either except the
date in 12 hours format or 24
hours format.
G Press [PrevMenu].
H Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Counters
This function allows you to check the
total number of transmitted, received,
scanned, and printed pages on the
display.
• Transmissions
: Total number of transmitted pages
• Receptions
: Total number of received pages
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
7
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
Summer Time
Whenever local custom requires advancing the clock or setting the clock
back, use this feature. You can easily
move the clock forwards when daylight saving time begins, and back
when it ends. To turn this feature on,
change the User Parameter Switch 25
digit 7. ⇒ P.207 “Printing the User Parameter List”
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
209
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
D Enter
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
number keys and press the {#}
}
(Enter) within 3 seconds.
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
↓Next].
E Enter
the function number for
“Counters” using the number
keys.
• 5 minutes
A Make sure that the machine is in
Facsimile mode and the standby
display is shown.
Note
❒ If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Fax}
} key.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Sort
1-Sided
11
2-Sided
2
Staple
Book
2-Sided
Stack
2-Sided
2-Sided
2
2
2
The totals are displayed.
F When you have checked the total
7
pages, press [OK].
G Press [PrevMenu].
H Press the {User Tools/Counter}}
key.
Auto Reset
If the machine is not used for a while,
the display will return to the Ready
condition. By default, the time that
must elapse before this happens is 30
seconds. If you wish, you can change
this interval to one of the following
settings:
• 1 minute
• 3 minutes
210
Enhanced
User Tools / Counter
Auto Reduce/
ND2L01E0
C Enter the number of the “Fax”.
The Facsimile User Tool main
menu appears.
Reference
For how to use the System User
Tools, refer to the System Settings manual.
D Enter
the function number for
“Key Op. Settings” using the
number keys and press the {#}
}
within 3 seconds.
KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS
Note
❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not
↓Next].
shown, press [↑
↑Prev.] or [↓
E Enter
the function number for
“Auto Reset” using the number
keys.
The totals are displayed.
F Select the interval with the < and
> keys. Then press [OK] key.
G Press [PrevMenu].
H Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
7
Paper Feed Selection
Using this feature, you can select
which tray to print out the message. If
you wish to use this feature, change
User Parameter Switch digits 0 to 2.
RDS (Remote Diagnostic
System)
If your machine has a problem, a service representative can perform various diagnostic tasks over the
telephone line from the service station to try to find out what is wrong
with your machine. The service technician can also use RDS to change
some of your machine's settings if
you request it.
211
FACSIMILE USER TOOLS
This page is intentionally blank.
7
212
8. Entering Text
ENTERING AND MODIFYING TEXT
This section describes how to enter
characters. When you enter a character, it is shown at the position of the
cursor. If there is a character at the
cursor position, the entered character
is shown before the character.
❖ < and >
Use to move the cursor left or
right.
Available Characters
Note
❒ If you wish to enter symbols, use
the [Symbols] key.
• Alphabetic characters
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
• Symbols
• Numerals
0123456789
Keys
❖ Number keys
Use to enter numbers.
❖ Quick Dial 01/29 to Quick Dial 28/56 (A
to Z)
Press these keys to enter upper and
lower case letters.
❖ [A←
←→a] key
Use to switch between upper and
lower case.
❖ Quick Dial 27/55
Press to enter a space.
❖ {Clear/Stop}
} key
Deletes a character at the cursor
position. You can delete a character at the right end of a line even if
the cursor is placed to the right of
the character.
❖ {Insert}
} key
Press if you wish to insert characters.
ND2C0102
❒ Flip the plate to access Quick Dial
keys not shown.
❒ Quick Dial 01/29 means Quick
Dial key 01 or 29.
- Wild Cards
When you register RTIs or CSIs for
multiple destinations, you can register a sequence of characters common
to these identifications as a wild card
instead of registering every identification.
If a destination has an RTI or CSI containing a wild card, the machine determines that the destination matches
the registered destination.
213
ENTERING TEXT
❖ Not using a wild card
Destination to be
registered (RTI)
NEW YORK
BRANCH
Number of registered identifications
3
How To Enter Text
Entering letters
A Press [A←
←→a] to switch between
Uppercase and Lowercase.
HONG KONG
BRANCH
SYDNEY
BRANCH
❖ Using a wild card
Destination to be
registered (RTI)
BRANCH
Number of registered identifications
1
Limitation
❒ You can register up to 30 wild
cards.
Note
❒ Compare identifications by neglecting spaces.
❒ You can use wild cards for the following functions:
• P.175 “Forwarding”
• P.182 “Special Senders to Treat
Differently (Special RX Nos.)”
• P.188 “Authorized Reception”
8
214
ND2C0101
B Press a Quick Dial key.
A letter is entered and the cursor
moves.
Note
❒ If you wish to you enter another
character continuously, repeat
step 2.
Entering symbols
A Press [Symbols].
The available symbols are shown
on the display.
ENTERING AND MODIFYING TEXT
B Select
the desired symbol by
pressing [↑
↑Prev.] and [↓
↓Next].
The numeral is entered and the
cursor moves.
Deleting characters
A Press the < and > keys to move
the cursor to a character you want
to delete.
ND2C0102
B Press the {Clear/Stop}} key.
ND2C0110
The character at the cursor position is deleted .
Note
❒ If you wish to delete another
character, repeat steps 1 and 2.
8
ND2C0101
C Enter the number for the symbols
using the number keys.
The symbols is entered and the
cursor moves.
Note
❒ If you wish to you enter another
symbol, repeat steps 2 and 3.
Entering numbers
A Press a number keys.
215
ENTERING TEXT
This page is intentionally blank.
8
216
9. Maintaining Your Machine
CONNECTING THE MACHINE TO A
TELEPHONE LINE AND TELEPHONE
Connecting The Telephone Line
To connect the machine to a telephone line, use a snap-in modular type connector.
Important
❒ Make sure the type of modular connector.
❖ Where to connect the machine
Analog
External
Telephone
ISDN
ND8A02E0
❖ When using a modular type connector
External
Telephone
ND8F01E0
217
MAINTAINING YOUR MACHINE
Connecting The Machine To The ISDN
Connect the machine to the ISDN if you have the optional ISDN unit. Use a modular type connector for the ISDN.
Important
❒ When you connect the machine to the ISDN, contact your service representative.
ND8F03E1
Connecting The Optional External Telephone
You can connect the handset and an external telephone to the machine. You can
use them for telephone calls.
Note
❒ Some telephone may not be connected or may suffer reduced functionality.
❖ Specifying the handset line type
9
TT
DP
ND1X00E0
The switch on the handset should be in the appropriate position-TT (Tone Dialing) or DP (Pulse Dialing).
218
CONNECTING THE MACHINE TO A TELEPHONE LINE AND TELEPHONE
❖ Adjusting the handset bell volume
0
7 8 9
1 2 3
4 5 6
Ringer
ND1X00E1
Adjust the handset ringer volume using the volume switch.
Selecting The Line Type
Select the line type to which the machine is connected. There are two types: tone
and pulse dial.
Select the Line Type using “PSTN Line Type” in ”Key Operator Settings”.⇒
P.198 “G3 Analog Line” The default settings is ”Tone”.
9
219
MAINTAINING YOUR MACHINE
REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE
Stamp option is option.
When the stamp is getting to become lighter, replace the cartridge.
Note
❒ Use the cartridge specified for this machine.
A Lift the document feeder and press the tab to open the stamp cover.
Limitation
❒ Do not pull the stamp cover strongly because cords are attached.
NDID05E0
B Pull out the cartridge.
9
NDID06E0
220
REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE
C Set a new cartridge.
New Cartridge
NDID06E2
D Replace the stamp cover until it clicks.
NDID05E1
E Close the document feeder.
Note
❒ Hold down the center part of the cover to make sure that it is closed completely.
9
Stamp Cover Layout
Stamp
Cartridge
Tabs
Catch
ND1D07E1
221
MAINTAINING YOUR MACHINE
This page is intentionally blank.
9
222
10. Appendix
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Fax Feature Expander and Hard Disk
A Fax Feature Expander and a 130-Mbytes hard disk can be added. By installing
them, you can increase the memory capacity and use the following features.
With the Fax Feature Expander, features of Multicopy RX, 2-Sided Printing,
Confidential reception, Memory Lock, Multi-Step Transfer, Forwarding, Memory Lock ID, Confidential ID are available.
- Memory Capacity
• With Fax Feature Expander Type 450 ( + 4MB, total 6MB):
480 pages
• With Fax Feature Expander and 130-Mbytes hard disk:
3,000 pages
Measured using a ITU-T#1 chart (Slerexe letter) at standard resolution.
Note
❒ If you would like to install both of these, please contact your service representative.
- Extended Features
You can use the optional Group dial and extend the following features.
Function
Without Fax Feature Expander
With Fax Feature Expander
Speed dial code
100
1000
Personal code
20
50
Memory Capacity for
Memory Transmission
160 sheet
480 sheet (with Fax Feature
Expander) 3000 sheet (with
Fax Feature Expander and
Hard Disk)
Memory Transmission file 200
1000
Auto Document
6
18
Communication Result
last 200 communication
last 900 communication
223
APPENDIX
Function
Without Fax Feature Expander
With Fax Feature Expander
Specific Sender
30
50
400 dpi High Resolution Option (FAX 400dpi Option Type 450)
This allows you to send and receive the fax messages at high resolution. JBIG
compression is also available with this option.
ISDN Unit (ISDN Option Type 450)
This allows you to send and receive messages using the ISDN (Integrated Service Digital Network).
Stamp (FAX STAMP TYPE 450)
Single-sided documents you send from the Document Feeder (ADF) have a
mark stamped on the top of the scanned side after they are scanned in. Doublesided documents you send from the Document Feeder (ADF) have a mark
stamped on top and bottom of one scanned side. Use these marks to check
whether a document was properly stored in memory when using Memory
Transmission, or if the originals was properly sent when using Immediate
Transmission.
Duplex Unit (AD340)
With Duplex Unit, 2–sided printing is available.
10
224
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Standard
G3, G4 (option)
Resolution
G3:
8 × 3.85/mm•200 × 100 dpi (Standard), 8 × 7.7/mm•200
× 200 dpi (Detail), 8 × 15.4/mm•200×400 dpi (Fine), 16 ×
15.4/mm•400 × 400 dpi (Super Fine: 400dpi Option Required)
G4:
200 × 100 dpi (Standard), 200 × 200 dpi (Detail), 400 × 400
dpi (Super Fine: 400dpi Option Required)
Transmission Time
G3: 3 seconds at 28,800bps, Standard resolution
G4: 3 seconds, Detail resolution
Data Compression
MH, MR, MMR, SSC, JBIG (400dpi Option Required)
Maximum Original Size
Standard size: A3/DLT Irregular size: 304 × 432 mm
Maximum Scanning Size
294 mm × 432 mm/11" × 17"
Print Process
Printing on standard paper using the laser
Transmission Speed
G3:
33,600/31,200/28,800/26,400/24,000/21,600/19,200/
16,800/14,400/12,000/9,600/7,200/4,800/2,400 bps (auto
shift down system)
G4:
64/56 kbps (auto speed matching)
❖ Power Consumption
Type1•Type2 (35 copy per
minute) model
Type 3 (45 copy per
minute) model
Transmission
255W
270W
Reception
235W
250W
Printing (Average)
365W
555W
Standby mode
265W
280W
Energy Saving mode
13W
13W
Maximum power consumption
1440W
1440W
10
225
APPENDIX
FUNCTION LIST
Advanced Transmission Features
10
226
Feature name
Description
Reference
Send Later
Sets the machine to automatically start transmission or polling reception at
an appointed time.
P.74 “SEND LATER”
Confidential Transmission
P.76 “CONFIDENTIAL
Sends a confidential message. This feature is divid- TRANSMISSION”
ed into Default ID
Confidential Transmission
and Override ID Confidential Transmission.
Personal Code TX
This will help you to check P.78 “PERSONAL CODE
up on who has been using TRANSMISSION”
the machine and how often.
Auto Document
Stores a commonly used
P.80 “SENDING AN AUTO
original and prints or sends DOCUMENT”
it directly.
2-Sided Transmission
Use to send 2-Sided originals (double-sided original) from the Document
Feeder (ADF).
Book Fax
When sending a book-type P.84 “BOOK FAX”
original, this feature scans
and sends the right and left
pages one by one.
Irregular Scan Area
When sending a non-standard size original, this feature specifies the length
and width. The machine
scans the original in the
specified size.
P.82 “2-SIDED TRANSMISSION (DOUBLE-SIDED TRANSMISSION)”
P.86 “CHOOSING THE
AREA TO BE SCANNED
YOURSELF (IRREGULAR
SCAN AREA)”
FUNCTION LIST
Feature name
Description
Reference
Transmission Deadline
You specify the deadline
P.88 “TRANSMISSION
for the transmission and,
DEADLINE (TRD)”
when it cannot be sent because the line to the destination is busy, the machine
redials any number of
times until the specified
time is reached.
Polling Transmission
Upon request from a desti- P.90 “POLLING TRANSnation, the machine sends MISSION”
an original stored in memory. This feature is divided
into Free Polling, default
ID Polling Transmission,
and Override ID Polling
Transmission.
Polling Reception
P.94 “POLLING RECEPSends a transmission request to the other party and TION”
receives a message from
the receiver. This feature is
divided into Default ID
polling Reception and ID
Override Polling Reception.
Transfer Request
Sends an original to a desti- P.96 “TRANSFER REnation via a facsimile
QUEST”
equipped with the transfer
station capability.
Options
Description
Reference
TTI Print
You can print a message including P.99 “TTI (Transmit Termithe name registered as a TTI on
nal Identification) Print”
the received message for each file.
Label Insertion
If you register the receiver's name P.99 “Label Insertion”
in a Quick dial or speed dial,
something followed by the receiver's name is automatically printed
at the top of the received message.
Auto Reduction
If the receiver uses paper narrow- P.99 “Auto Reduction”
er than the message, it is sent reduced to the receiver paper.
ID Transmission
Sends an original only to the machine of the same Polling ID as
that registered in the machine.
10
P.100 “ID Transmission”
227
APPENDIX
Communication Information
10
228
Feature name
Description
Reference
Checking and Canceling
the Transmission Files
This feature cancels, conP.103 “CHECKING AND
firms, or changes a file (res- CANCELING TRANSMIServation) for Memory
SION FILES”
Transmission, Confidential
Transmission, Transfer Request, Polling Reception, or
Polling Transmission.
Printing the TX File List
The transmission file list
can be manually printed.
This list allows you to
know the files stored in
memory or the file numbers.
P.109 “PRINTING A LIST
OF FILES IN MEMORY
(PRINT TX FILE LIST)”
Displaying the Transmission Result
Part of the TCR can be
shown on the display. The
results of the last 50 transmissions are displayed
from the latest one.
P.110 “CHECKING THE
TRANSMISSION RESULT
(TX STATUS)”
Displaying the Reception
Result
P.111 “CHECKING THE
Part of the TCR (Transaction Confirmation Report) RECEPTION RESULT (RX
can be shown on the disSTATUS)”
play. The results of the last
50 receptions are displayed
from the latest one.
Printing a Confidential
Document
Prints messages received in P.112 “PRINTING A CONConfidential Reception
FIDENTIAL MESSAGE”
mode.
Printing the Memory Lock
Prints messages received in P.114 “PRINTING A FILE
Memory Lock mode.
RECEIVED WITH MEMORY LOCK”
Printing the TCR
The TCR (Transaction Con- P.116 “PRINTING THE
firmation Report) can be
TCR”
manually printed. This report shows the results of
the last 50 communications.
Displaying the Memory
Status
The status of the memory is P.117 “DISPLAYING THE
shown on the display.
MEMORY STATUS”
FUNCTION LIST
User Tools
Feature name
Description
Reference
Register/Delete Quick Dial When you register a desti- P.129 “Registering Quick Dination in a Quick Dial, you als”
can specify the destination
only by pressing the Quick
Dial key.
Register/Delete Group
Dial
When you register several P.135 “Registering Groups”
destinations as a group in a
quick dial, you can specify
all the destinations by just
pressing a quick dial key.
Register/Delete Opt.
Group Dial
When you register several
destinations as an optional
group, you can specify all
the destinations by entering the two-digit group
number after pressing the
optional group dial key
(F1–F5).
P.139 “Registering Optional
Groups”
Register/Delete Speed Dial When you register a desti- P.143 “Registering Speed Dination in a speed dial, you als”
can specify the destination
by entering the two-digit or
three-digit speed dial code
after pressing the Speed
Dial key.
Store/Delete Keystroke
Program
Allows you to store a freP.147 “Storing Keystroke
quently used function or
Programs”
destination in a Quick Dial.
Register/Delete Auto Doc- Allows you to store a freument
quently used original in.
You can print or send the
original directly as necessary.
P.151 “Registering Auto
Documents”
Register/Delete Irregular
Area
P.86 “CHOOSING THE
AREA TO BE SCANNED
YOURSELF (IRREGULAR
SCAN AREA)”
Registers a frequently used
original size in advance
when you send a message
with the Irregular Scan
Area function.
10
229
APPENDIX
Feature name
Description
Reference
REPORTS/LISTS
This feature allows you to
print various reports and
lists manually. You can
print the following reports
and lists:
P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”
• TCR (Transaction Confirmation Report)
• Quick Dial list
• Group Dial list
• Keystroke Program list
• Speed Dial list
• Auto Document list
• Sender/Forwarding list
INITIAL SETUP TX
Setting the default setting P.159 “INITIAL SETUP
for the transmission mode TX”
and scanning conditions.
When you switch the power on, the machine settings
the items specified with
this feature.
INITIAL SET UP RX
Allows you to switch the
following reception functions to On/Off:
P.161 “INITIAL SETUP
RX”
• Reception Mode
• Checkered Mark
• Center Mark
• Print RX Time
• Multi-copy Reception
• Authorized RX
10
• Special RX Nos.
• Forwarding
• 2-Sided Printing
• Reverse Order Printing
• Bypass Paper Size
Assigning User Function
Keys
230
Stores a frequently used
P.164 “ASSIGNING USER
function in a User Function FUNCTION KEYS”
Key ({
{F1}
} to {F5}
}).
FUNCTION LIST
Feature name
Description
Reference
Key Operator Settings /
Personal Code
Registers personal code for P.166 “KEY OPERATOR
each person. When every
SETTINGS”
user enters a personal
codes in sending messages,
you can check the usage
status for each person.
ECM
If a part of transmission
P.171 “ECM”
fails due to a telephone line
fault, this feature resends
the failed part automatically.
Memory Lock
Switch the Memory Lock
P.172 “Memory Lock”
On or Off. To use it, register
an ID for printing a message received in Memory
Lock mode.
Multistep Transfer
Registers a transfer station P.173 “Multistep Transfer”
in a group dial. This allows
the message to be transmitted via multiple transfer
stations more efficiently
when the requesting party
sends a transfer request to
your machine.
Forwarding
Transfers received messag- P.175 “Forwarding”
es to a registered receiver
(forwarding destination).
Special RX Nos.
Allow messages from spec- P.182 “Special Senders to
ified senders to be treated Treat Differently (Special RX
differently.
Nos.)”
Authorized Reception
When you register specific
senders in advance, you
can restrict senders from
whom you receive message.
P.188 “Authorized Reception”
Monitor Volume
Adjusts the volume of
monitoring and beeper
sounds from the speaker
inside the machine.
P.192 “Monitor Volume”
10
231
APPENDIX
Feature name
Description
RTI/TTI
Registers information (RTI) P.193 “RTI/TTI”
to be shown on the display
and printed in a report by a
receiver's or sender's machine. This feature also registers information (TTI) to
be printed from a destination machine when you
send a fax.
Economy Transmission
Economy Transmission
means to send a fax when
communication charges
are lower. The Economy
TX feature registers this
time.
P.195 “Registering The Economy Transmission Time”
ID Code
Registers an ID required
for Transfer Request,
Transfer Station, Default
ID Polling Transmission,
Default ID Polling Reception, or ID Transmission.
P.196 “ID Code”
G3 Analog Line
Registers an own analog
P.198 “G3 Analog Line”
number, line type, and CSI
when you connect the machine to the G3 analog line.
G3 Digital Line
Registers own digital num- P.199 “G3 Digital Line”
ber and CSI, when you connect the machine to a ISDN.
G4 Digital Line
Registers an own digital
⇒ P.200 “G4 Digital Line”
number, TID (Terminal ID)
and subaddress when you
connect the machine to a
G4 digital line.
10
Changing User Parameters Allows you to change the
function settings to meet
your needs.
232
Reference
P.203 “Changing the User
Parameters”
Printing User Parameter
List
Allows you to print and
P.207 “Printing the User Pacheck User Parameters set- rameter List”
tings.
Date/Time
Adjusts the date and the
time as a reference.
P.208 “Date/Time”
FUNCTION LIST
Feature name
Description
Reference
Counters
Check the transmission, re- P.209 “Counters”
ception, and totals on the
display.
Auto Reset
Set the interval returning to ⇒ P.210 “Auto Reset”
the standby mode.
10
233
INDEX
180 Degree Rotation Printing, 66
2-Sided Printing, 56, 65, 185, 161
2-Sided Transmission, 14, 15, 28, 82, 226,
A
Acceptable types of Originals, 14
Analog Line Connector, 3
Authorized Reception, 188, 231
Authorized Reception List, 158, 191
Authorized RX, 161
Auto Document, 80, 151, 226, 229
Auto Document List, 153, 158
Auto Identification, 42
Auto Image Density, 39
Automatic Power Reception Function, 12
Automatic Redial, 26
Auto Reduction, 99, 227
Auto Reset, 210
B
Batch Transmission, 27
Book Fax, 84, 226
Broadcasting, 24
Bypass Paper Size, 161, 162
Bypass Tray, 2
C
Canceling a Transmission, 103
Center Mark, 64, 161
Chain Dial, 46
Changing a Destination, 107
Changing Line Type, 41
Changing the Transmission Time, 106
Checkered Mark, 64, 161
Checking and Canceling the Transmission
Files, 228
Checking and Editing a File, 105
Checking Destinations (Destination List),
106
Checking the Reception Result (RX Status), 111
Checking the Transmission Result (TX
Status), 110
CIL/TID Print, 69
Clear Modes/Energy Saver key, 5
234
Clear/Stop key, 6
Communicating Indicator, 4
Communication Failure Report, 29
Components, 1
Confidential File Report, 113
Confidential ID, 196
Confidential Reception Indicator, 4
Confidential Transmission, 76, 226
Counters, 209, 233
D
Date/Time, 208, 232
Default ID Polling Reception, 62, 94, 95
Default ID Polling Transmission, 90, 91
Density key (Contrast key), 6
Detail, 37
Dialing, 43
Dial label, 132
Display, 10
Displaying the Memory Status, 117, 228
Displaying the Reception Result, 228
Displaying the Transmission Result, 228
Document Feeder (ADF), 1
Dual Access, 12
E
ECM, 27, 33, 171, 231
Economy Transmission Time,
232
End Receiver, 60, 96, 98
Entering letters, 214
Entering numbers, 215
Entering symbols, 214
Entering Text, 213
Error Messages, 120
Error Report, 125
Exposure Glass, 1
74, 195,
F
Fax Feature Expander, 223
Fax key, 6
Fax Mode (Auto Reception Mode), 59
F Code (PWD), 54, 63
F Code (SEP), 61
F Code (SUB), 53
Forwarding, 161, 175, 231
Forwarding Stations, 176
Free Polling Transmission, 90, 91
Function List, 226
Function Map, iv
G
G3, 41
G3 Analog Line, 198, 232
G3 Digital Line, 199, 232
G3/G4 Mode Selection, 164
G4, 41
G4 Digital Line, 200
Group Dial, 229
Group Dial List, 137, 158
Groups, 48, 135
H
Hard Disk, 223
High Resolution Option, 5, 224
How to Set an Original, 18
I
ID Code, 196, 232
ID Override Polling Reception, 62, 95
ID Override Polling Transmission, 91
ID Reception, 61
ID Transmission, 52, 100, 227
Image density, 37
Image Density (Contrast), 38
Image Rotation, 67
Immediate Reception, 55
Immediate Transmission, 10, 23, 32
Indicators, 123
Initial Setup RX, 127, 161, 230
Initial Setup TX, 127, 159, 230
Internal Tray, 1
Interrupt key, 6
Irregular Area, 154, 229
Irregular Scan Area, 86, 226
ISDN, 218
ISDN Line connector, 2
J
JBIG Reception, 63
JBIG Transmission, 54
K
Key Operator Settings, 127, 166
Keystroke Program, 147, 229
Keystroke Program List, 149, 158
L
Label Insertion, 99, 227
Letters, 214
M
Main Power Switch, 2
Maintaining Your Machine, 217
Manual Dial, 35
Manual Image Density, 39
Memory Lock, 172, 185, 231
Memory Lock ID, 196
Memory Reception, 56
Memory Storage Report, 28
Memory Transmission, 10, 23
Monitor Volume, 192, 231
Multi-copy, 56, 185
Multi-copy Reception, 65, 161
Multistep Transfer, 60, 173, 231
N
Number key, 6, 43
Numbers, 215
O
On-hook Dial, 34
On Hook Dial key, 5
Operation Panel, 4
Operation Switch, 2
Opt. Group Dial, 229
Optional Group Dial, 49
Optional Groups, 139
Original Type, 37, 38
Original Type key, 6
Override ID Polling Reception, 94
Override ID Polling Transmission, 90
P
Page Reduction, 68
Page Separation and Length Reduction,
67
Paper Feed Selection, 211
Parallel Memory Transmission, 28
Pause, 44
Pause/Redial key, 6
Personal Code, 166, 231
Personal Code Access, 12, 169
235
Personal Code List, 170
Personal Code Transmission, 78
Personal Code TX, 226
Photo, 38
Photo/Text, 38
Polling ID, 196
Polling Reception, 94, 227
Polling Reserve Report, 95
Polling Result Report, 95
Polling Transmission, 90, 227
Polling Transmission Clear Report, 92
Print Completion Beep, 64
Printing a Confidential Document, 228
Printing a Confidential Message, 112
Printing a File, 104
Printing a File Received with Memory
Lock, 114
Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print
TX File List), 109
Printing Functions, 64
Printing the TCR, 228
Printing the Memory Lock, 228
Printing the TX File List, 228
Print RX Time, 161
Q
Quick Dial, 43, 46, 129, 229
Quick Dial Flip Plate, 6
Quick Dial keys, 6
Quick Dial List, 131, 158
R
RDS (Remote Diagnostic System), 211
Receive File Indicator, 4, 123
Reception Functions, 60
Reception Mode, 161
Reception Time, 64
Redial, 50
Register/Delete, 127, 129
Reports/Lists, 127, 158, 230
Requesting Party, 60, 96
Re-sending a File, 106
Resolution, 37, 159
Resolution key, 5
Reverse Order Printing, 56, 68, 161
Reverse Printing, 185
RTI/TTI, 193, 232
S
Scan Settings, 37
236
Selecting the Reception Mode, 59
Selection keys, 6
Sender/Authorized Reception List, 191
Send Later, 74, 226
Solving Problems, 121
Special Reception numbers, 182
Special RX Nos., 161, 183, 231
Specifications, 225
Specific Senders (Forwarding), 178
Specified Sender/Forwarding Station list,
181
Specified Sender List, 187
Speed Dial, 43, 47, 143, 229
Speed Dial keys, 5
Speed Dial List, 145, 158
Stamp, 52, 220
Standard, 37
Start key, 6
Subaddress, 45
Substitute Reception, 56, 57, 123
Summer Time, 209
Super Fine, 37
Switches and Bits, 203
Symbols, 214
T
TCR, 228
TCR (Transaction Confirmation Report),
116, 158
Telephone Directory, 47
Telephone Line, 217
Telephone Mode, 59
Text, 38
Tonal Signals, 45
Tone, 45
Tone key, 6
Toner, 119
Transfer Request, 96, 227
Transfer Result Report, 61
Transfer Station, 60, 96
Transmission Deadline (TRD), 88, 227
Transmission Features, 52
Transmission Mode, 159
Transmission Mode key, 5
Transmission Options, 99
Transmission Result Display, 164
Transmission Result Report (Immediate
Transmission), 33
Transmission Result Report (Memory
Transmission), 29
Transmission With Image Rotation, 12
Tray Select, 185
Troubleshooting, 119
TSI Print, 69
TTI Print, 99, 227
Two In One, 67, 56
U
User Function Keys, 4, 164, 230
User Functions, 127
User Parameter List, 203, 232
User Parameters, 203, 232
User Tools, 5, 127, 229
W
When the Confidential Reception Indicator is Lit, 124
When the Fax key is Lit, 124
When the Receive File Indicator is Lit or
Flashing, 123
Wild Cards, 213
237
FAX Option Type 450 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Printed in Japan
UE USA A6938607
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement